WO2023032846A1 - Enabling switch - Google Patents

Enabling switch Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2023032846A1
WO2023032846A1 PCT/JP2022/032213 JP2022032213W WO2023032846A1 WO 2023032846 A1 WO2023032846 A1 WO 2023032846A1 JP 2022032213 W JP2022032213 W JP 2022032213W WO 2023032846 A1 WO2023032846 A1 WO 2023032846A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
switch
movable member
contact
button
state
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2022/032213
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
雅丈 山野
Original Assignee
Idec株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Idec株式会社 filed Critical Idec株式会社
Priority to CN202280053218.6A priority Critical patent/CN117769752A/en
Priority to JP2023545527A priority patent/JPWO2023032846A1/ja
Publication of WO2023032846A1 publication Critical patent/WO2023032846A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H01ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
    • H01HELECTRIC SWITCHES; RELAYS; SELECTORS; EMERGENCY PROTECTIVE DEVICES
    • H01H13/00Switches having rectilinearly-movable operating part or parts adapted for pushing or pulling in one direction only, e.g. push-button switch
    • H01H13/50Switches having rectilinearly-movable operating part or parts adapted for pushing or pulling in one direction only, e.g. push-button switch having a single operating member
    • H01H13/56Switches having rectilinearly-movable operating part or parts adapted for pushing or pulling in one direction only, e.g. push-button switch having a single operating member the contact returning to its original state upon the next application of operating force
    • H01H13/58Switches having rectilinearly-movable operating part or parts adapted for pushing or pulling in one direction only, e.g. push-button switch having a single operating member the contact returning to its original state upon the next application of operating force with contact-driving member rotated step-wise in one direction

Definitions

  • an enable switch in which the state of the switch shifts from OFF to ON and then from ON to OFF as the button portion of the switch is pushed.
  • the enable switch is provided in an operation unit, which is a terminal for an operator to input when operating a robot or machine.
  • the operator keeps the switch in the ON state while performing the input.
  • the switch is in the OFF state, the input by the operator is cut off and is not transmitted to the operation target such as the robot.
  • the input to the operation unit will not be transmitted to the operation target, thereby ensuring the safety of the operator. is ensured.
  • Examples of such an enable switch include those disclosed in JP-A-2001-35300, JP-A-2002-42606, WO-2002/061779 and JP-A-2005-56635. .
  • the present invention is directed to an enable switch, and aims to miniaturize the enable switch.
  • a first aspect of the present invention is an enable switch, comprising: a case; a first movable member pushed downward toward the case; a contact; a contact mechanism that shifts the state of the contact from one of open and closed to the other, and further shifts from the other to the one.
  • a position of the first movable member with respect to the case when the first movable member is not pushed in is defined as a first position.
  • the position of the first movable member with respect to the case when the first movable member is pushed to the bottom is defined as a third position.
  • a predetermined position of the first movable member with respect to the case between the first position and the third position is defined as a second position.
  • the contact mechanism includes: a second movable member held by the first movable member and movable relative to the first movable member; a switch member that changes the state of the contact by being displaced as the member moves.
  • the first movable member includes an upper cam portion that contacts the second movable member from above, and a lower cam portion that contacts the second movable member from below.
  • the switch member Upon loss of the downward force applied to the member, the switch member returns to its original position and the state of the contacts transitions from the other to the one.
  • the first movable member returns from the third position to the first position, the second movable member moves upward together with the first movable member while the position of the switch member is maintained.
  • the lower cam portion contacts the second movable member from below, and the second movable member moves upward as the first movable member rises.
  • the movable member is moved relative to the first movable member in a second direction opposite to the first direction.
  • the enable switch can be miniaturized.
  • Aspect 2 of the present invention is the enable switch according to aspect 1, wherein when the first movable member is pushed from the first position to the second position, the second movable member pushes the switch member from above. The switch member is pushed down by the second movable member that contacts and moves downward together with the first movable member.
  • Aspect 3 of the present invention is the enable switch according to aspect 1 or 2, wherein the first movable member includes an upper surface portion that an operator touches when pushing the first movable member, and extends downward from the upper surface portion.
  • a cylindrical second movable member holding portion that holds the second movable member inside is further provided.
  • the upper cam portion is the upper end surface of a groove portion extending in a direction inclined with respect to the vertical direction on the side surface of the second movable member holding portion, and the lower cam portion is the lower end surface of the groove portion.
  • Aspect 4 of the present invention is the enable switch according to aspect 1 or 2, wherein the first movable member includes an upper surface portion that an operator touches when pushing the first movable member, and extends downward from the upper surface portion.
  • a tubular second movable member holding portion for holding the second movable member inside thereof is further provided.
  • the upper cam portion is provided on the lower surface of the upper surface portion.
  • the lower cam portion is a lower end surface of a recess provided on the side surface of the second movable member holding portion.
  • Aspect 5 of the present invention is the enable switch of aspect 1 or 2 (may be any one of aspects 1 to 4), wherein the second movable member is a second movable member extending in the vertical direction.
  • Aspect 6 of the present invention is the enable switch of aspect 1 or 2 (may be any one of aspects 1 to 5), wherein the second movable member has a central axis extending in the vertical direction. It is cylindrical or columnar with a center.
  • the relative movement of the second movable member in the first direction with respect to the first movable member is rotation to one side in the circumferential direction about the central axis.
  • the relative movement of the second movable member in the second direction with respect to the first movable member is rotation to the other side in the circumferential direction about the central axis.
  • Mode 7 of the present invention is the enable switch of Mode 1 or 2 (which may be any one of Modes 1 to 6), wherein the first movable member moves from the second position to the third position.
  • the downward movement of the second movable member is restricted by contacting the lower end surface of the second movable member with the case.
  • the lower end surface of the second movable member is a convex surface curved so that the central portion thereof is downwardly convex.
  • Aspect 8 of the present invention is the enable switch of aspect 1 or 2 (which may be any one of aspects 1 to 7), wherein the contact is arranged with the push button facing laterally. located inside said push button of a tactile switch.
  • the switch member includes a first switch member that directly contacts the second movable member, and a second switch member that is arranged between the first switch member and the push button of the tactile switch. Prepare. When the first movable member is pushed from the first position to the second position, the first switch member displaced by the force applied from the second movable member causes the second switch member to move to the tactility. biased against the push button of the switch to transition the state of the contacts from the one to the other.
  • a ninth aspect of the present invention is the enable switch according to Aspect 8, wherein the second switch member is pressed against the push button when the first movable member is pushed from the first position to the second position. Even after being biased, the first switch member continues to be displaced by the force applied from the second movable member, and the second switch member is elastic between the first switch member and the push button. transform.
  • Mode 10 of the present invention is the enable switch of mode 1 or 2 (any one of modes 1 to 7 may be used), wherein the contact is attached to a fixed terminal and the switch member. and a conductive elastic member that elastically deforms as the switch member is displaced.
  • the conductive elastic member is elastically deformed and the state of contact between the fixed terminal and the conductive elastic member is switched.
  • the state of the contact transitions from the one to the other.
  • the switch member returns to its original position together with the conductive elastic member, and the fixed terminal and the conductive elastic member are separated from each other.
  • the contact state is switched and the state of the contact shifts from the other to the one.
  • Aspect 11 of the present invention is the enable switch of aspect 1 or 2 (which may be any one of aspects 1 to 10), wherein the switch between the second movable member and the first movable member and is vertically compressed by the first movable member moving downward relative to the second movable member.
  • the switch between the second movable member and the first movable member and is vertically compressed by the first movable member moving downward relative to the second movable member.
  • the member is contacted from above to move the second movable member in the first direction as the first movable member descends.
  • the second movable member is displaced from the temporary fixing portion, and the restoring force of the operating elastic member moves the second movable member downward to apply force to the switch member, thereby causing the switch to move.
  • a member is displaced to change the state of the contact from the one to the other.
  • Aspect 12 of the present invention is the enable switch of aspect 1 or 2 (may be any one of aspects 1 to 11), wherein the switch is provided on the opposite side of the contact across the second movable member. It further comprises other contacts arranged. The state of the other contact is shifted by the contact mechanism in synchronization with the state of the contact.
  • the contact mechanism further includes another switch member arranged on the opposite side of the switch member with the second movable member interposed therebetween and held by the case.
  • the other switch member like the switch member, is in direct contact with the second movable member and is displaced in synchronism with the displacement of the switch member as the second movable member moves, Changing the state of said other contact.
  • FIG. 1 is a perspective view of an enable switch according to a first embodiment;
  • FIG. It is a top view of an enable switch. It is a vertical cross-sectional view of an enable switch. It is a perspective view of a button case. It is a perspective view of an operating member. It is a top view which shows a part of enable switch. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view showing a part of an enable switch. It is a top view which shows a part of enable switch. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view showing a part of an enable switch. It is a top view which shows a part of enable switch. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view showing a part of an enable switch. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view showing a part of an enable switch. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view showing a part of an enable switch. It is a top view which shows a part of enable switch. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view showing a part of an enable switch. It is a top view which shows
  • FIG. 4 is a side view showing the vicinity of the lower end surface of the operating member; It is a top view which shows the inner bottom face of a case.
  • FIG. 10 is a perspective view showing another example of the button case and the operation member; It is a front view of an enable switch according to a second embodiment. 4 is an exploded perspective view of an enable switch;
  • FIG. 3 is a side view showing the configuration of a part of an enable switch, with the configuration omitted;
  • FIG. 3 is a side view showing the configuration of a part of an enable switch, with the configuration omitted; It is a perspective view of a button cover. It is a perspective view of a button case. It is a front view which shows the structure of a part of contact vicinity. It is a perspective view which shows some members near a contact mechanism. It is a bottom view of an operation member. It is a top view of a case. It is a front view of an enable switch. It is a top view which shows the structure of a part of enable switch. It is a front view of an enable switch. It is a top view which shows the structure of a part of enable switch. It is a front view of an enable switch. It is a top view which shows the structure of a part of enable switch. It is a front view of an enable switch. It is a top view which shows the structure of a part of enable switch. It is a front view of an enable switch. It is a top view which shows the structure of a part of enable switch. It is
  • FIG. 4 is a graph which shows the relationship between the stroke of a button part, and an operation load.
  • 4 is a graph showing the relationship between the stroke of the button portion and the stroke of the microswitch;
  • It is a front view of an enable switch according to a third embodiment.
  • 4 is an exploded perspective view of an enable switch;
  • FIG. It is a top view which shows the 1st switch member vicinity.
  • It is a perspective view which shows the 1st switch member vicinity.
  • It is a front view of an enable switch according to a fourth embodiment.
  • 4 is an exploded perspective view of an enable switch;
  • FIG. It is a side view which shows the structure of a part of contact vicinity.
  • It is a perspective view which shows the structure of a part of contact vicinity.
  • It is a side view which shows the structure of a part of contact vicinity.
  • It is a side view which shows the structure of a part of contact vicinity.
  • It is a side view which shows the structure of a part
  • FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing an enable switch 1 according to the first embodiment of the invention.
  • FIG. 2 is a plan view showing the enable switch 1.
  • FIG. FIG. 3 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the enable switch 1 taken along line III--III in FIG.
  • a button cover 31 which will be described later, is drawn with a two-dot chain line, and the internal configuration of the button cover 31 is drawn with a solid line. 2, illustration of the button cover 31 is omitted.
  • the three directions perpendicular to each other are called the X direction, Y direction and Z direction.
  • the Z direction is also referred to as the vertical direction.
  • the Z direction may or may not match the vertical direction when the enable switch 1 is actually used. The same applies to other drawings.
  • the enable switch 1 is provided in an operation unit such as a teaching pendant of a robot or a controller of a work machine. Robots, work machines, and the like are objects to be operated by the operation unit.
  • the enable switch 1 permits operation of an operation target from the operation unit. Specifically, while the enable switch 1 is in the ON state, the operation of the operation target is permitted, and when the operator makes an input to the operation unit, a signal from the operation unit according to the input is transmitted to the operation target. When the enable switch 1 is in the OFF state, the operation of the operation target is not permitted, and the operator's input is not transmitted to the operation target.
  • the enable switch 1 is a so-called 3-position enable switch.
  • the enable switch 1 is OFF when the button portion 3 is not pressed (that is, the initial state), and is ON when the button portion 3 is pressed to some extent. When the portion 3 is further pushed in, it is in the OFF state.
  • the relationship between the state of the button portion 3 and the ON-OFF state of the enable switch 1 may be reversed to that described above. That is, the enable switch 1 may be in the ON state in the initial state, may be in the OFF state when the button portion 3 is pushed to some extent, and may be in the ON state when the button portion 3 is further pushed.
  • the enable switch 1 is a substantially rectangular parallelepiped member that is long in the X direction and short in the Y direction.
  • the X direction and Y direction are also referred to as “longitudinal direction” and “width direction”, respectively.
  • the enable switch 1 includes a case 2 , a button portion 3 , a contact 4 and a contact mechanism 5 .
  • Case 2 supports button portion 3, contact 4, contact mechanism 5, and the like.
  • the case 2 is also provided with connection terminals and the like for electrically connecting the enable switch 1 to other devices.
  • the case 2 is a substantially rectangular parallelepiped member that is long in the X direction and short in the Y direction.
  • the button part 3 is located on the upper side of the case 2.
  • the button portion 3 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the case 2 .
  • the button portion 3 is a substantially rectangular parallelepiped member. The button portion 3 is pushed downward toward the case 2 when the operator of the enable switch 1 pushes the upper surface downward (that is, in the (-Z) direction).
  • the button portion 3 includes a button cover 31, a button case 32, and a return elastic member (not shown).
  • the button cover 31 is a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box-shaped member that constitutes the outer shell of the button portion 3 and opens downward.
  • the canopy portion of the button cover 31 (that is, the (+Z) side end surface portion, hereinafter also referred to as “upper surface portion 311”) is a portion that the operator touches when pressing the button portion 3 .
  • the button case 32 is a member that is housed in the internal space of the button cover 31 and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape.
  • the button case 32 contacts the inner surface of the upper surface portion 311 of the button cover 31 (that is, the surface on the ( ⁇ Z) side) from below at the substantially central portion of the button cover 31 in the X direction.
  • the button case 32 is fixed to the inner surface of the upper surface portion 311 of the button cover 31 and extends downward from the upper surface portion 311 .
  • the button portion 3 moves vertically, the button case 32 moves vertically together with the button cover 31 .
  • the button portion 3 is also called a "first movable member".
  • FIG. 4 is an enlarged perspective view of the button case 32.
  • the button case 32 is provided with a substantially cylindrical through hole 35 centered on the central axis J1 extending in the Z direction.
  • the through-hole 35 has a substantially circular shape in plan view (that is, when viewed parallel to the Z direction from the (+Z) side), and is positioned substantially in the center of the button case 32 . That is, the button case 32 is a cylindrical member having a through hole 35 in the center. Inside the through hole 35 (that is, inside the button case 32), an operation member 51, which will be described later, is held.
  • a groove portion 34 extending to the upper surface of the button case 32 is provided on the (-X) side surface and the (+X) side surface of the button case 32 .
  • the two grooves 34 are open on the upper surface of the button case 32 .
  • the groove portion 34 extends in the ( ⁇ Y) direction and the (+Z) direction from approximately the center portion of the side surface (that is, approximately the center portion in the Y and Z directions). .
  • the groove 34 extends in the vertical direction and in the direction inclined with respect to the horizontal plane (that is, the XY plane). Further, the groove portion 34 is bent in the (+Z) direction near the (-Y) side surface of the button case 32 and reaches the upper surface of the button case 32 .
  • the upper end surface 341 of the groove 34 extends in the (-Y) direction and the (+Z) direction from the approximate center of the side surface. That is, the upper end surface 341 of the groove portion 34 is an inclined surface that is inclined with respect to the vertical direction and the horizontal plane.
  • a lower end surface 342 of the groove portion 34 extends in the (-Y) direction from approximately the center of the side surface, bends in the middle, and extends in the (-Y) direction and the (+Z) direction. That is, the lower end surface 342 of the groove portion 34 is a surface in which a surface extending substantially horizontally and an inclined surface inclined with respect to the vertical direction and the horizontal surface are continuous.
  • the shape of the groove portion 34 provided on the (+X) side surface of the button case 32 is substantially the same as the shape of the groove portion 34 provided on the ( ⁇ X) side surface.
  • the grooves 34 provided on the (+X) side surface of the button case 32 extend in the circumferential direction centered on the central axis J1 (hereinafter also simply referred to as the “circumferential direction”). ) is rotated 180°.
  • a return elastic member (not shown) is a member that can be elastically compressed in the vertical direction. placed in The return elastic member is, for example, a helical spring extending substantially parallel to the vertical direction.
  • the button portion 3 is pushed downward by the operator, and the button cover 31 and the button case 32 move downward from their initial positions, thereby elastically compressing the return elastic member in the vertical direction. .
  • the restoring force of the restoring elastic member pushes the button cover 31 and the button case 32 upward to return to their initial positions.
  • the arrangement, shape and structure of the return elastic member may be changed in various ways.
  • the return elastic member may be an elastic member (for example, a plate spring or the like) other than the coiled spring.
  • the enable switch 1 has two contacts 4 .
  • the two contacts 4 are arranged on the (+X) side and the ( ⁇ X) side of the button case 32 and the operating member 51 .
  • one of the two contacts 4 is located on one side of the button case 32 and the operation member 51 in the X direction
  • the other contact 4 is located on the button case 32 and the operation member 51 in the X direction.
  • 51 is placed on the opposite side of the one contact 4 .
  • the ( ⁇ X) side contact 4 includes two fixed contacts 41 , one moving contact 42 , and a contact moving mechanism 43 .
  • the two fixed contacts 41 are arranged side by side in the vertical direction.
  • the moving contact 42 is arranged between the two fixed contacts 41 and vertically faces the two fixed contacts 41 .
  • the contact moving mechanism 43 moves the moving contact 42 vertically.
  • the contact moving mechanism 43 is a known mechanism including a lever that holds the moving contact 42, a rotating shaft that rotatably supports the lever, a spring that is connected to the lever, and the like.
  • the structure of the contact moving mechanism 43 may be changed variously.
  • the two fixed contacts 41 do not necessarily have to be arranged in the vertical direction, and the arrangement of the two fixed contacts 41 and the one moving contact 42 may be changed in various ways.
  • the structure of the contact 4 does not necessarily have two fixed contacts 41 and one moving contact 42, and may be modified in various ways.
  • the state in which the moving contact 42 is in contact with the upper fixed contact 41 is the "open” state (that is, the OFF state) of the contact 4.
  • a state in which the moving contact 42 is in contact with the lower fixed contact 41 is a state in which the contact 4 is "closed” (that is, in an ON state).
  • the contact 4 is closed when the moving contact 42 is in contact with the fixed contact 41 on the upper side, and the moving contact 42 is in contact with the fixed contact 41 on the lower side.
  • the state may be that the contact 4 is "open”.
  • the structure of the contact 4 on the (+X) side is substantially the same as the structure of the contact 4 on the (-X) side.
  • the (+X) side contact 4 is arranged at a position obtained by rotating the ( ⁇ X) side contact 4 by 180° in the circumferential direction around the central axis J1.
  • the contact mechanism 5 shifts the state of the contact 4 from “open” to “closed” and then from “closed” to “open” as the button portion 3 is pushed toward the case 2.
  • the open/closed state that is, the ON-OFF state
  • the contact mechanism 5 shifts the state of the contact 4 from one of "open” and “closed” to the other, and further shifts from the other to the one.
  • the contact mechanism 5 includes the operation member 51 described above, two switch members 52, and an operation elastic member 53.
  • the operation member 51 is held by the button case 32 of the button portion 3 so as to be relatively movable with respect to the button case 32 .
  • the operation member 51 is arranged inside the through hole 35 (see FIG. 4) of the button case 32, and held by the button case 32 so as to be rotatable in the circumferential direction about the central axis J1. .
  • the button case 32 does not rotate in the circumferential direction.
  • the operating member 51 is a "second movable member" held by the button portion 3, which is the first movable member.
  • the button case 32 is a second movable member holding portion that holds the second movable member.
  • FIG. 5 is an enlarged perspective view of the operating member 51.
  • the operation member 51 is a substantially cylindrical member that extends vertically around the central axis J1.
  • the operating member 51 includes an operating member main body 511 and two operating member projecting portions 512 .
  • the operation member main body 511 is a substantially cylindrical member that extends vertically.
  • the operation member main body 511 is a substantially cylindrical member with a bottom centered on the central axis J1.
  • a lower end surface 513 of the operation member main body 511 is a convex surface (for example, a portion of a spherical surface) curved so that the central portion is convex downward.
  • the two operating member protrusions 512 are portions that protrude sideways from the upper end of the outer surface of the operating member main body 511 .
  • Each operation member projecting portion 512 has, for example, a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape extending in a radial direction centered on the central axis J1 (hereinafter also simply referred to as “radial direction”). In the state shown in FIG. 2, the two operating member projecting portions 512 are positioned on the (+X) side and the ( ⁇ X) side of the central axis J1.
  • one operating member projecting portion 512 of the two operating member projecting portions 512 is located on one side of the central axis J1 in the X direction, and the other operating member projecting portion 512 is located at the center in the X direction. It is located on the opposite side of the one operating member projecting portion 512 across the axis J1.
  • the two operating member projecting portions 512 have substantially the same shape, and one operating member projecting portion 512 is arranged at a position obtained by rotating the other operating member projecting portion 512 by 180° in the circumferential direction.
  • the operating member main body 511 is positioned within the through hole 35 (see FIG. 4) of the button case 32, and the two operating member projecting portions 512 extend into the two groove portions 34 of the button case 32. (see FIG. 4), respectively.
  • the operation member projecting portion 512 extends from the through hole 35 of the button case 32 through the side wall of the button case 32 at the groove portion 34 to the outside of the button case 32 .
  • the operating member 51 is held by the button case 32 so as to be rotatable about the central axis J1, and when the operating member 51 rotates, the operating member projecting portion 512 moves within the groove portion 34.
  • the operation member main body 511 and the operation member protrusion 512 are respectively the “second movable member main body” and the "second movable member protrusion”. .
  • An upper end surface 341 (see FIG. 4) of the groove 34 of the button case 32 is an upper cam portion that contacts the operating member projecting portion 512 from above.
  • the inclined surface of the lower end surface 342 of the groove portion 34 of the button case 32 is a lower cam portion that contacts the operating member projecting portion 512 from below.
  • the operation elastic member 53 is arranged inside the operation member 51 (that is, inside the operation member main body 511) inside the through hole 35 of the button case 32. In the state shown in FIGS. 1 and 3, the operating elastic member 53 is inserted from above into the internal space of the bottomed substantially cylindrical operating member main body 511, and the upper portion of the operating elastic member 53 extends upward from the upper end of the operating member main body 511. protruding to.
  • the operation elastic member 53 is a member that can be elastically compressed in the vertical direction.
  • the operation elastic member 53 is, for example, a spiral spring that extends substantially parallel in the vertical direction about the central axis J1. 1 and 3, the operation elastic member 53 is drawn in a substantially cylindrical shape for the sake of convenience. The same applies to other drawings.
  • the lower end of the operating elastic member 53 contacts the bottom of the operating member main body 511 .
  • the operating elastic member 53 is held from below by the operating member 51 .
  • the upper end of the operating elastic member 53 contacts the inner surface of the upper surface portion 311 of the button cover 31 . That is, the operation elastic member 53 is arranged between the button portion 3 and the operation member 51 .
  • the operating member 51 is an elastic member holder that holds the operating elastic member 53 from below.
  • the operating elastic member 53 is vertically compressed inside the operating member 51 by the downward movement of the button portion 3 relative to the operating elastic member 53 .
  • the shape and structure of the operation elastic member 53 may be changed in various ways.
  • the operation elastic member 53 may be an elastic member other than the coiled spring.
  • the operation member 51 may be, for example, a columnar member centered on the central axis J1.
  • the two switch members 52 are held by the case 2.
  • the two switch members 52 are arranged on the (+X) side and the ( ⁇ X) side of the button case 32 and the operation member 51 .
  • one switch member 52 of the two switch members 52 is located on one side of the button case 32 and the operation member 51 in the X direction
  • the other switch member 52 is located on the button case 32 in the X direction.
  • the operation member 51 on the opposite side of the one switch member 52 .
  • the two switch members 52 have substantially the same shape, and one switch member 52 is arranged at a position obtained by rotating the other switch member 52 by 180° in the circumferential direction.
  • the switch member 52 is a substantially rectangular single member in plan view.
  • the two switch members 52 are positioned below the two operating member projecting portions 512 and directly contact the lower end surfaces of the two operating member projecting portions 512 .
  • the switch member 52 is close to the lower end surface of the operating member projecting portion 512 with a small gap therebetween.
  • the state of the contact 4 is changed between “open” and “closed” by displacing the switch member 52. Further, in the enable switch 1, the forces applied to the two switch members 52 from the two operating member projecting portions 512 of the operating member 51 change substantially simultaneously. As a result, the two switch members 52 are displaced in synchronization with each other, and the states of the two contacts 4 are changed substantially simultaneously. Therefore, the states of the two contacts 4 are transferred synchronously with each other.
  • the case 2 is provided with temporary fixing portions 61 in the vicinity of each switch member 52 .
  • the temporary fixing portion 61 is, for example, a columnar portion extending in the vertical direction.
  • the temporary fixing portion 61 may be a part of the case 2 or may be a separate member attached to the case 2 .
  • the temporary fixing portion 61 is positioned below the operating member projecting portion 512 and spaced downward from the operating member projecting portion 512 .
  • the temporary fixing portion 61 overlaps the operation member projecting portion 512 in plan view (that is, in the vertical direction).
  • the temporary fixing portion 61 may partially overlap the operation member protruding portion 512 in a plan view, or may overlap the operation member projecting portion 512 entirely.
  • the operating member projecting portion 512 comes into contact with the temporary fixing portion 61 from above, thereby restricting the downward movement of the operating member 51 .
  • FIGS. 6A to 16A and 6B to 16B are plan views showing the (-X) side portion of the enable switch 1.
  • FIG. 6A to 16A similarly to FIG. 2, the illustration of the button cover 31 is omitted.
  • 6B to 16B are longitudinal sectional views showing the (-X) side portion of the enable switch 1.
  • FIG. The operation of each component in the (+X) side portion of the enable switch 1 is the same as the operation of each component in the (-X) side portion described below.
  • buttons portion 3 which is the first movable member, is pushed down toward the case 2 by an operator (not shown).
  • 14A to 16A and 14B to 16B show how the operator releases the button portion 3 and the button portion 3 returns from the pushed position to the original position.
  • the position of the button portion 3 in a state in which the button portion 3 is not pushed is referred to as the "first position.” ”.
  • the position of the button portion 3 in the state where the button portion 3 is pushed to the bottom is called the "third position”.
  • the position of the button portion 3 shown in FIGS. 11A and 11B is called "second position". The second position is a predetermined position of the button portion 3 between the first position and the third position.
  • the button portion 3 When the button portion 3 is positioned at the second position, the lower end of the operation member 51 is in contact with the inner bottom surface 21 of the case 2 , and the button case 32 is spaced upward from the inner bottom surface 21 of the case 2 . There is The lower end of the operating member 51 and the lower end of the button case 32 are in contact with the inner bottom surface 21 of the case 2 when the button portion 3 is positioned at the third position. It should be noted that the operation member 51 and the button case 32 are separated upward from the inner bottom surface 21 of the case 2 when the button portion 3 is positioned at the first position.
  • the operation member 51 moves downward together with the button case 32 as shown in FIGS. 7A and 7B. do. At this time, the operating member 51 does not rotate, and the relative position of the operating member 51 with respect to the button case 32 remains unchanged from that shown in FIGS. 6A and 6B. Further, since the operating member projecting portion 512 vertically overlaps the switch member 52 , the switch member 52 moves downward together with the operating member 51 . In the state shown in FIGS. 7A and 7B, the state of contact 4 is "open", as in FIGS. 6A and 6B. In the state shown in FIGS. 7A and 7B , the operating member projecting portion 512 contacts the upper end of the temporary fixing portion 61 . As a result, the operating member 51 is temporarily fixed (that is, temporarily locked) to the case 2, and its downward movement is restricted.
  • the operation member 51 When the button portion 3 is pushed further downward, the operation member 51 does not move vertically because its downward movement is restricted by the temporary fixing portion 61, and the button cover 31 and the button case 32 move further downward. and move. That is, the button portion 3 moves further downward relative to the operation member 51 . Thereby, as shown in FIG. 9B, the operating elastic member 53 is further compressed in the vertical direction.
  • the operating member 51 moves from the position shown in FIG. 9B to the position shown in FIG. move downwards at once. Further, as shown in FIG. 10A , the operation member projecting portion 512 overlaps the switch member 52 in the vertical direction and is in contact with the switch member 52 from above. A force is applied, and the switch member 52 moves downward together with the operation member 51 at once. Then, the contact moving mechanism 43 is operated by the switch member 52 pushed down by the operating member projecting portion 512 , and the moving contact 42 moves downward to contact the lower fixed contact 41 . That is, the downward displacement of the switch member 52 changes the state of the contact 4 from "open" to "close.”
  • the operation member 51 is lowered from the position shown in FIG. 9B to the position shown in FIG.
  • Lowering and lowering of the switch member 52 on the (+X) side of the operating member 51 are also performed in an extremely short time. Therefore, the timing of the state transition from "open” to "closed” of the contact 4 located on the (-X) side of the operating member 51 and the timing from "open” of the contact 4 located on the (+X) side of the operating member 51 It is possible to suppress deviation from the timing of state transition to "closed”. In other words, the state transitions of the two contacts 4 can be performed substantially simultaneously.
  • the operating member 51 does not rotate in the circumferential direction when the operating member 51 descends from the position shown in FIG. 9B to the position shown in FIG. 10B.
  • the lower end surface 513 of the operation member main body 511 that contacts the inner bottom surface 21 of the case 2 is a convex surface that projects downward. Friction between the main body 511 and the inner bottom surface 21 of the case 2 can be reduced. Therefore, the force required to rotate the operating member 51 can be reduced.
  • the operation member 51 does not rotate in the circumferential direction while the switch member 52 moves upward.
  • the operating member projecting portion 512 faces the side surface of the switch member 52 on the (-Y) side in the Y direction.
  • the operation member projecting portion 512 may be in contact with the side surface of the switch member 52 on the (-Y) side, or may be close to it with a slight gap.
  • the restoring force of the restoring elastic member causes the button cover 31 and the button case 32 to move as shown in FIG. 14B. from the position shown in Fig. 15B upwards to the position shown in Fig. 15B.
  • the position of the button portion 3 shown in FIG. 15B is substantially the same as the second position shown in FIG. 11B.
  • the button case 32 moves upward relative to the operation member 51 , and the inclined surface (that is, the lower cam portion) of the lower end surface 342 of the groove portion 34 of the button case 32 moves the operation member 51 .
  • the member projecting portion 512 is contacted from below. Then, a circumferential force acts on the operation member projecting portion 512 from the lower cam portion, and the operation member 51 rotates clockwise from the position shown in FIG. 14A to the position shown in FIG. 15A.
  • the rotation direction (counterclockwise in the above example) of the operation member 51 when the button portion 3 is lowered, and the rotation in that rotation direction are referred to as the "first direction” and the “first direction.” Also called “movement of Further, the rotation direction (clockwise in the above example) of the operation member 51 when the button portion 3 is raised, and the rotation in that rotation direction are also referred to as “second direction” and “movement in the second direction", respectively. call.
  • the second direction is opposite to the first direction. The same applies to other embodiments.
  • the operating member projecting portion 512 contacts the side surface of the switch member 52 on the (-Y) side. Therefore, the operating member 51 does not rotate clockwise any more. That is, the clockwise rotation of the operating member 51 is restricted by the switch member 52 . While the button portion 3 is raised from the third position and returned to the second position, the switch member 52 does not move (that is, the position of the switch member 52 is maintained), and the contact 4 is in the "open" state. maintained as is.
  • the enable switch 1 includes the case 2, the first movable member (that is, the button portion 3), the contact 4, and the contact mechanism 5.
  • the button part 3 is pushed downward toward the case 2 .
  • the contact mechanism 5 shifts the state of the contact 4 from one of “open” and “closed” to the other as the button portion 3 is pushed toward the case 2 (in the present embodiment, the state of the contact 4 is changed from “open” to "closed”). closed”), and then from the other to the one.
  • the position of the button part 3 with respect to the case 2 when the button part 3 is not pushed is the first position. Further, the position of the button portion 3 with respect to the case 2 when the button portion 3 is pushed to the bottom is referred to as the third position. Further, a predetermined position of the button portion 3 with respect to the case 2 between the first position and the third position is defined as a second position.
  • the state of the contact 4 shifts from the one to the other between the first position and the second position, and the state of the contact 4 changes between the second position and the third position. The state transitions from the other to the one.
  • the button portion 3 returns from the third position to the first position, the state of the contact 4 is maintained in the one state.
  • the contact mechanism 5 includes a second movable member (that is, an operating member 51) and a switch member 52.
  • the operation member 51 is held by the button portion 3 and is relatively movable with respect to the button portion 3 .
  • the switch member 52 changes the state of the contact 4 by being in direct contact with the operating member 51 and being displaced as the operating member 51 moves.
  • the button portion 3 includes an upper cam portion (the upper end surface 341 of the groove portion 34 in the above example) that contacts the operation member 51 from above, and a lower cam portion (the upper end surface 341 of the groove portion 34 in the above example) that contacts the operation member 51 from below. and a lower end surface 342).
  • the enable switch 1 when the button portion 3 is pushed from the first position to the second position, force is applied to the switch member 52 by the operation member 51 that moves downward together with the button portion 3. 52 is displaced to change the state of the contact 4 from the one to the other. Further, when the button portion 3 is pushed from the second position to the third position, the upper cam portion contacts the operation member 51 from above while the downward movement of the operation member 51 is restricted. 3 is lowered, the operation member 51 is moved relative to the button portion 3 in a predetermined first direction (in the above example, rotated counterclockwise). As a result, the downward force applied from the operating member 51 to the switch member 52 is lost, the switch member 52 returns to its original position, and the state of the contact 4 shifts from the other to the one.
  • a predetermined first direction in the above example, rotated counterclockwise
  • the operation member 51 when the button portion 3 returns from the third position to the first position, the operation member 51 is operated while the position of the switch member 52 (that is, the position relative to the button portion 3) is maintained. It moves upward together with the button part 3 .
  • the lower cam portion contacts the operating member 51 from below, and the operating member 51 moves above the button portion 3 as the button portion 3 rises. Relatively move in a second direction opposite to the first direction (rotate clockwise in the above example).
  • the operation member 51 held by the button portion 3 is brought into direct contact with the switch member 52, and the switch member 52 is displaced as the operation member 51 is moved, whereby the switch member 52 is moved to the first position. , the switching of the state of the contact 4 in the second position and the third position. As a result, the number of parts of the enable switch 1 can be reduced and the size of the enable switch 1 can be reduced.
  • the length of the enable switch 1 in the X direction (that is, the longitudinal direction) can be reduced.
  • the enable switch 1 can be further miniaturized in the X direction (that is, in the longitudinal direction) as compared with the case where the switch member 52 is displaced in the X direction.
  • the button portion 3 preferably further includes the upper surface portion 311 and the tubular second movable member holding portion (that is, the button case 32).
  • the upper surface portion 311 is a portion that the operator touches when pressing the button portion 3 .
  • the button case 32 extends downward from the upper surface portion 311 and holds the operating member 51 inside.
  • the above-mentioned upper cam portion is the upper end surface 341 of the groove portion 34 extending in the side surface of the button case 32 in a direction inclined with respect to the vertical direction
  • the lower cam portion is the lower end surface 342 of the groove portion 34 .
  • the operating member 51 includes a second movable member main body (that is, the operating member main body 511) that extends in the vertical direction, and a second movable member protruding portion (that is, the operating member main body 511) that protrudes laterally from the operating member main body 511.
  • a protrusion 512 is provided.
  • the button portion 3 returns from the third position to the first position, the lower cam portion comes into contact with the operating member projecting portion 512 from below.
  • the structure of the contact mechanism 5 can be simplified by sharing the portion that contacts the switch member 52 and the portion that contacts the upper cam portion and the lower cam portion in the operating member 51 . As a result, further miniaturization of the enable switch 1 can be achieved.
  • the operating member 51 preferably has a tubular or columnar shape centered on the vertically extending central axis J1. Further, the relative movement of the operation member 51 with respect to the button portion 3 in the first direction is rotation in the circumferential direction about the central axis J1 (counterclockwise direction in the above example). The relative movement of 51 with respect to button portion 3 in the second direction is preferably rotation in the other circumferential direction (clockwise direction in the above example) around central axis J1. As a result, the enable switch 1 can be made smaller than when the relative movement in the first direction and the second direction is linear movement in the vertical direction or the like.
  • the downward movement of the operating member 51 is limited by the contact of the lower end surface 513 of the operating member 51 with the case 2 .
  • the lower end surface 513 of the operation member 51 is a convex surface curved so that the central portion is convex downward.
  • the frictional force at the contact portion between the operation member 51 and the case 2 can be reduced.
  • the force required to move the operating member 51 in the first direction and the second direction can be reduced.
  • the force required to rotate the operating member 51 counterclockwise and clockwise can be reduced. Therefore, the force required to press the button portion 3 can be reduced, and the operability of the enable switch 1 can be improved.
  • the enable switch 1 preferably further includes the operating elastic member 53 arranged between the operating member 51 and the button portion 3 .
  • the operating elastic member 53 is vertically compressed by the downward movement of the button portion 3 relative to the operating member 51 .
  • the operation member 51 is provided on the case 2 before the state of the contact 4 shifts from the one to the other.
  • the downward movement of the operation member 51 is restricted by coming into contact with the stop portion 61 .
  • the enable switch 1 when the button portion 3 moves downward while the downward movement of the operating member 51 is restricted, the operating elastic member 53 is vertically compressed, and the upper cam portion is moved by the operating member 51 .
  • the operation member 51 is brought into contact from above and moved in the first direction as the button portion 3 is lowered. As a result, the operating member 51 is displaced from the temporary fixing portion 61, and the restoring force of the operating elastic member 53 causes the operating member 51 to move downward. Then, the state of the contact 4 shifts from the one to the other.
  • the operating member 51 is temporarily fixed while the button portion 3 is being lowered to the second position, and the operating member 51 is moved downward at once by the restoring force of the compressed operating elastic member 53.
  • the state of the contact 4 can be rapidly and reliably changed from "open” to “closed”.
  • the enable switch 1 includes a plurality of contacts 4 , it is possible to prevent the contact 4 from shifting the state of the contacts 4 from “open” to “closed”. As a result, the operational stability of the enable switch 1 can be improved.
  • the enable switch 1 further includes another contact 4 arranged on the opposite side of the contact 4 with the operation member 51 interposed therebetween.
  • the transition is synchronous with the state.
  • the contact mechanism 5 further includes another switch member 52 arranged on the opposite side of the switch member 52 with the operation member 51 interposed therebetween and held by the case 2 .
  • the other switch member 52 is in direct contact with the operation member 51 in the same manner as the switch member 52 described above, and is displaced in synchronization with the displacement of the switch member 52 as the operation member 51 is moved.
  • the state of the other contact 4 is changed. Thereby, the state transition of the plurality of contacts 4 (that is, the opening and closing of the plurality of contacts 4) can be suitably realized with a simple structure.
  • the force required to push the button portion 3 may be partially increased while the button portion 3 is moving from the first position to the third position.
  • the force required to push the button portion 3 from the second position to the third position may be increased.
  • FIG. 17A and 17B are diagrams showing an example of a structure for realizing the change in pushing force.
  • FIG. 17A is a side view showing the vicinity of the lower end surface 513 of the operating member 51 when the button portion is positioned at the second position.
  • 17B is a plan view showing the inner bottom surface 21 of the case 2 with which the lower end surface 513 of the operating member 51 contacts in the state shown in FIG. 17A.
  • the lower end surface 513 of the operating member 51 is indicated by broken lines.
  • a substantially hemispherical protrusion 514 protruding downward is provided on the outer peripheral portion of the lower end surface 513 of the operating member 51 .
  • the inner bottom surface 21 of the case 2 is provided with a convex portion 211 extending radially about the central axis J1 at a position overlapping the outer peripheral portion of the operation member 51 in plan view.
  • the convex portion 514 of the operation member 51 is adjacent to the convex portion 211 of the case 2 on the clockwise side in plan view when the button portion 3 is positioned at the second position.
  • the convex portion 514 of the operation member 51 When pushing the button portion 3 from the second position to the third position, the convex portion 514 of the operation member 51 needs to climb over the convex portion 211 of the case 2 and move to the counterclockwise side of the convex portion 211 in plan view. There is In order to move the convex portion 514, it is necessary to compress the operation elastic member 53 (see FIG. 3) in the vertical direction. The force required to push in 3 increases. As a result, it is possible to prevent the operator from erroneously pushing the button portion 3 maintained at the second position to the third position.
  • the relative movement of the operation member 51 with respect to the button case 32 in the first direction and the second direction does not necessarily have to be rotation in one direction and the other direction in the circumferential direction about the central axis J1.
  • the above-described relative movements in the first direction and the second direction may be movements in the (+Y) direction and movements in the ( ⁇ Y) direction.
  • grooves 34 of substantially the same shape extending in the same direction are formed on the (-X) side and the (+X) side of the button case 32.
  • Two operating member projecting portions 512 of the operating member 51 may be arranged in one groove portion 34 .
  • Each groove 34 extends in the (+Y) direction and the (+Z) direction from the central portion of the side surface of the button case 32 (that is, the central portion in the Y and Z directions).
  • the operation member 51 moves downward from the position shown in FIG. relative movement in the (+Y) direction. Further, by moving the button case 32 upward while the upward movement of the operating member 51 is restricted, the operating member 51 moves relative to the button case 32 in the (-Y) direction.
  • the number of contacts 4 provided on the enable switch 1 is not limited to two, and may be one or three or more.
  • the portion that contacts the switch member 52 may be different from the portion that contacts the upper cam portion and the lower cam portion.
  • the upper cam portion and the lower cam portion do not necessarily need to contact the operating member projecting portion 512 to move the operating member 51 , and may contact other portions of the operating member 51 .
  • the portion of the operating member 51 that contacts the switch member 52 is not necessarily limited to the operating member projecting portion 512 , and may be a portion of the operating member 51 other than the operating member projecting portion 512 .
  • the upper cam portion and the lower cam portion do not necessarily have to be provided in the groove portion 34 of the button case 32, and may have other structures. Further, the upper cam portion and the lower cam portion do not necessarily have to be provided on the (+X) side and ( ⁇ X) side of the button case 32, and the button case 32 or the button portion 3 It may be provided in a part other than the button case 32 of.
  • the operating member 51 is temporarily fixed by the operating member projecting portion 512 coming into contact with the temporary fixing portion 61, but the temporary fixing portion 61 is provided at another position, and the operating member main body 511 The operating member 51 may be temporarily fixed by contacting the 61 .
  • the temporary fixing of the operation member 51 is not necessarily performed, and the temporary fixing portion 61 and the operation elastic member 53 may be omitted.
  • the shape of the operation member 51 is not limited to the above example, and may be changed in various ways.
  • the lower end surface 513 of the operation member 51 does not necessarily have to be a convex surface, and may be a flat surface substantially parallel to the inner bottom surface 21 of the case 2 .
  • the operation member main body 511 does not necessarily have a cylindrical or columnar shape centered on the central axis J1, and may have another shape.
  • the operation member 51 does not necessarily have the operation member main body 511 and the operation member projecting portion 512, and may have other structures.
  • the shape and moving direction of the switch member 52 are not necessarily limited to the above examples, and may be changed in various ways.
  • the state of the contact 4 may be changed by displacing the switch member 52 in a direction inclined with respect to the Z direction.
  • the structure of the contact 4 is not limited to the above example, and may be variously changed.
  • FIG. 19 is a front view showing the enable switch 1a.
  • FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective view of the enable switch 1a.
  • 21 and 22 are side views of the enable switch 1a with part of the configuration omitted.
  • the case 2a is indicated by broken lines.
  • the case 2a and the button cover 31a are indicated by dashed lines.
  • FIGS. 19, 21 and 22 show the enable switch 1a in a state in which the button portion 3a is not pushed (that is, in the initial state). The same applies to FIGS. 25 and 26, which will be described later.
  • the enable switch 1a is a substantially cylindrical switch centered on a central axis J2 extending in the Z direction (that is, in the vertical direction).
  • the enable switch 1a is a three-position enable switch like the enable switch 1 described above.
  • the enable switch 1a includes a case 2a, a button portion 3a, a contact 4a, and a contact mechanism 5a.
  • the case 2a is a substantially cylindrical member centered on the central axis J2, and supports the button portion 3a, the contact 4a, and the contact mechanism 5a.
  • the button part 3a is a substantially cylindrical member with a lid centered on the central axis J2.
  • the button portion 3a is inserted into an upper opening of the case 2a.
  • the upper portion of the button portion 3a protrudes upward from the upper end of the case 2a.
  • the button portion 3a is pushed downward toward the case 2a when the operator of the enable switch 1a pushes the upper surface downward (ie, in the (-Z) direction).
  • the button portion 3a includes a button cover 31a, a button case 32a, and a return elastic member 33a.
  • the button cover 31a is a substantially cylindrical member with a lid centered on the central axis J2, and opens downward.
  • the canopy portion of the button cover 31a (that is, the end face portion on the (+Z) side, hereinafter also referred to as "upper surface portion 311a") is a portion that the operator touches when pushing the button portion 3a.
  • FIG. 23 is a perspective view of the button cover 31a as viewed obliquely from below.
  • Two protrusions 312a are provided on the lower surface of the upper surface portion 311a of the button cover 31a.
  • the two projections 312a are of substantially the same shape, and one projection 312a rotates the other projection 312a by 180° in the circumferential direction centered on the central axis J2 (hereinafter also simply referred to as the “circumferential direction”). placed in a rotated position.
  • Each protrusion 312a is arranged in the vicinity of the side wall of the button cover 31a at a position spaced radially inward from the side wall.
  • Each protrusion 312a is a substantially arcuate portion extending in the circumferential direction in plan view.
  • the lower end surface of each protrusion 312a is an inclined surface that slopes toward the (+Z) side as it goes counterclockwise in plan view (that is, when viewed along the Z direction from the (+Z) side).
  • FIG. 24 is a perspective view of the button case 32a as viewed obliquely from above.
  • the button case 32a is a substantially tubular member (in the example shown in FIG. 24, a substantially cylindrical shape centered on the central axis J2).
  • the button case 32a is inserted from the lower opening of the button cover 31a and attached to the button cover 31a.
  • the lower portion of the button case 32a protrudes downward from the lower end of the button cover 31a.
  • the button case 32a extends downward from the upper surface portion 311a of the button cover 31a.
  • the button portion 3a moves vertically, the button case 32a moves vertically together with the button cover 31a.
  • the button portion 3a is also called a "first movable member".
  • An operation member 51a which will be described later, is held inside the button case 32a in the radial direction (that is, in the radial direction about the central axis J2).
  • Two recesses 34a are provided on the side surface of the button case 32a.
  • the two recessed portions 34a are of substantially the same shape, and one recessed portion 34a is arranged at a position obtained by rotating the other recessed portion 34a by 180° in the circumferential direction.
  • Each recess 34a is recessed downward from the upper end of the button case 32a.
  • a projecting portion 312a of the button cover 31a and an operating member projecting portion 512a, which will be described later, are arranged in each recess 34a.
  • the operating member projecting portion 512a is sandwiched from above and below by the projecting portion 312a of the button cover 31a and the lower end surface of the recessed portion 34a of the button case 32a.
  • the lower end surface of each recess 34a includes a first end surface 341a and a second end surface 342a.
  • the first end surface 341a is a substantially horizontal surface extending substantially perpendicular to the central axis J2.
  • the second end face 342a spreads counterclockwise from the counterclockwise end of the first end face 341a in plan view.
  • the second end surface 342a is an inclined surface directed toward the (+Z) side in the counterclockwise direction in plan view.
  • a return elastic member 33a shown in FIGS. 20 to 22 is a member that can be elastically compressed in the vertical direction.
  • the return elastic member 33a is, for example, a spiral spring that extends substantially parallel to the vertical direction.
  • the restoring elastic member 33a is drawn in a substantially cylindrical shape for the sake of convenience.
  • the two return elastic members 33a are arranged radially inside the button case 32a at positions that are circumferentially shifted by 180°. A lower portion of each return elastic member 33a protrudes downward from the button case 32a and is supported from below by the case 2a.
  • the button portion 3a is pushed downward by the operator, and the button cover 31a and the button case 32a move downward from their initial positions, thereby elastically compressing the return elastic member 33a in the vertical direction. be.
  • the restoring force of the restoring elastic member 33a pushes the button cover 31a and the button case 32a upward to return to their initial positions.
  • the arrangement, shape and structure of the return elastic member 33a may be changed in various ways.
  • the return elastic member 33a may be an elastic member (for example, a plate spring or the like) other than the coiled spring.
  • the enable switch 1a comprises two microswitches 40a each having a contact 4a.
  • the enable switch 1a comprises two contacts 4a, each contact 4a being part of a microswitch 40a.
  • Each microswitch 40a is also provided with a connection terminal or the like for electrically connecting the enable switch 1a to another device.
  • the structure of the two contacts 4a is substantially the same, and one contact 4a is arranged at a position obtained by rotating the other contact 4a by 180° in the circumferential direction.
  • FIG. 25 is a front view showing the configuration of one contact 4a and part of the vicinity of the contact 4a.
  • the contact 4a includes two fixed contacts 41a, one moving contact 42a, and a contact moving mechanism 43a.
  • the two fixed contacts 41a are arranged side by side in the vertical direction.
  • the moving contact 42a is arranged between the two fixed contacts 41a and vertically faces the two fixed contacts 41a.
  • the contact moving mechanism 43a vertically moves the moving contact 42a.
  • the contact moving mechanism 43a is a known mechanism including a lever that holds the moving contact 42a, a rotating shaft that rotatably supports the lever, a spring that is connected to the lever, and the like.
  • the structure of the contact moving mechanism 43a may be changed variously. Also, the two fixed contacts 41a do not necessarily have to be arranged in the vertical direction, and the arrangement of the two fixed contacts 41a and the one moving contact 42a may be changed in various ways. Furthermore, the structure of the contact 4a does not necessarily have two fixed contacts 41a and one moving contact 42a, and may be modified in various ways.
  • the state in which the moving contact 42a is in contact with the upper fixed contact 41a is the "open” state (that is, the OFF state) of the contact 4a.
  • the state in which the moving contact 42a is in contact with the lower fixed contact 41a is the "closed” state (that is, the ON state) of the contact 4a.
  • the enable switch 1a the state in which the moving contact 42a is in contact with the upper fixed contact 41 is the "closed” state of the contact 4a, and the moving contact 42a is in contact with the lower fixed contact 41a.
  • the contact 4a may be in the "open” state.
  • the contact mechanism 5a shifts the state of the contact 4a from “open” to “closed” and then from “closed” to “open” as the button portion 3a is pushed toward the case 2a.
  • the open/close state that is, the ON-OFF state
  • the contact mechanism 5a shifts the state of the contact 4a from one of "open” and “closed” to the other, and further shifts from the other to the one.
  • FIG. 26 is a perspective view showing the contact mechanism 5a and some members in the vicinity of the contact mechanism 5a.
  • the contact mechanism 5a includes the above-described operation member 51a, two switch members 52a, and an operation elastic member 53a.
  • the operation member 51a is held by the button case 32a of the button portion 3a so as to be relatively movable with respect to the button case 32a.
  • the operation member 51a is arranged radially inward of the button case 32a, and is held by the button case 32a so as to be rotatable in the circumferential direction about the central axis J2. Note that the button case 32a does not rotate in the circumferential direction.
  • the operation member 51a is a "second movable member" held by the button portion 3a, which is the first movable member.
  • the button case 32a is a second movable member holding portion that holds the second movable member.
  • the operation member 51a is a substantially cylindrical member that extends vertically around the central axis J2.
  • the operation member 51a has substantially the same shape as the operation member 51 (see FIG. 5) described above, and includes an operation member main body 511a and two operation member projecting portions 512a.
  • the operating member main body 511a is a substantially cylindrical member that extends vertically. In the example shown in FIG. 20, the operation member main body 511a is a substantially cylindrical member with a bottom centered on the central axis J2.
  • FIG. 27 is a bottom view of the operating member 51a.
  • a lower end surface 513a of the operation member main body 511a is provided with a convex portion 514a projecting downward from the bottom surface.
  • four projections 514a extending substantially linearly in the radial direction are arranged at substantially equal angular intervals in the circumferential direction on the outer peripheral portion of the lower end surface 513a of the operation member main body 511a.
  • FIG. 28 is a plan view of the case 2a.
  • a substantially flat partition plate 21a substantially perpendicular to the central axis J2 is provided inside the case 2a.
  • the partition plate 21a is provided substantially in the vertical center of the case 2a.
  • the aforementioned microswitch 40a (see FIG. 22) is arranged below the partition plate 21a inside the case 2a.
  • the lower portion of the operation member main body 511a (see FIG. 27) is arranged above the partition plate 21a inside the case 2a.
  • the upper surface of the partition plate 21a vertically faces the lower end surface 513a of the operation member main body 511a.
  • the upper surface of the partition plate 21a is provided with a convex portion 211a that protrudes upward from the upper surface.
  • FIG. 22 The aforementioned microswitch 40a
  • the lower portion of the operation member main body 511a (see FIG. 27) is arranged above the partition plate 21a inside the case 2a.
  • four convex portions 211a extending substantially linearly in the radial direction are arranged at substantially equal angular intervals in the circumferential direction.
  • the four projections 211a of the partition plate 21a are located at substantially the same positions as the four projections 514a of the operation member main body 511a in the radial direction about the central axis J2. Also, the four projections 211a of the partition plate 21a are positioned circumferentially displaced from the four projections 514a of the operation member main body 511a.
  • the two operating member projecting portions 512a are portions that protrude sideways from the upper end portion of the outer surface of the operating member main body 511a.
  • Each operation member projecting portion 512a is, for example, a substantially rectangular parallelepiped portion extending in the radial direction.
  • the two operating member projecting portions 512a have substantially the same shape, and one operating member projecting portion 512a is arranged at a position obtained by rotating the other operating member projecting portion 512a by 180° in the circumferential direction.
  • the operating member main body 511a is located radially inside the button case 32a, and the two operating member projecting portions 512a are located within the two concave portions 34a of the button case 32a.
  • the operating member protrusion 512a protrudes radially outward from the button case 32a through the recess 34a.
  • the operating member projecting portion 512a is positioned above the first end surface 341a (see FIG. 24) of the lower end surface of the recess 34a.
  • the operating member 51a is held by the button case 32a so as to be rotatable about the central axis J2. When the operating member 51a rotates, the operating member projecting portion 512a moves within the recess 34a.
  • the operating member 51a is called the "second movable member"
  • the operating member main body 511a and the operating member protrusion 512a are respectively the “second movable member main body” and the “second movable member protrusion”.
  • the above-described projecting portion 312a (see FIG. 23) of the button cover 31a is an upper cam portion that comes into contact with the operating member projecting portion 512a located inside the recessed portion 34a from above.
  • the projection 312a of the button cover 31a directly contacts the operation member protrusion 512a and pushes it downward while the downward movement of the operation member 51a is restricted, the operation member protrusion 512a is pushed downward.
  • a force acts, and the operation member 51a rotates counterclockwise in plan view.
  • a second end surface 342a of the lower end surface of the concave portion 34a of the button case 32a is a lower cam portion that contacts the operating member projecting portion 512a from below.
  • the lower end surface of the recess 34a includes the lower cam portion.
  • the second end surface 342a of the recess 34a directly contacts the operating member protruding portion 512a and pushes it upward while the upward movement of the operating member 51a is restricted, the operating member protruding portion 512a is pushed upward in the circumferential direction. A force acts, and the operation member 51a rotates clockwise in plan view.
  • the operation elastic member 53a shown in FIG. 25 is arranged inside the operation member 51a (that is, radially inside the operation member main body 511a).
  • the operating elastic member 53a is inserted from above into the inner space of the bottomed substantially cylindrical operating member main body 511a, and the upper portion of the operating elastic member 53a protrudes upward from the upper end of the operating member main body 511a.
  • the operation elastic member 53a is a member that can be elastically compressed in the vertical direction.
  • the operation elastic member 53a is, for example, a spiral spring that extends substantially parallel in the vertical direction about the central axis J2.
  • the operation elastic member 53a is drawn in a substantially cylindrical shape for the sake of convenience. The same applies to other drawings.
  • the lower end of the operating elastic member 53a contacts the bottom of the operating member main body 511a.
  • the operating elastic member 53a is held from below by the operating member 51a.
  • the upper end of the operating elastic member 53a contacts the lower surface of the upper surface portion 311a of the button cover 31a. That is, the operating elastic member 53a is arranged between the button portion 3a and the operating member 51a.
  • the operating member 51a is an elastic member holder that holds the operating elastic member 53a from below.
  • the operating elastic member 53a is vertically compressed inside the operating member 51a by the button portion 3a moving downward relative to the operating elastic member 53a.
  • the shape and structure of the operation elastic member 53a may be changed in various ways.
  • the operation elastic member 53a may be an elastic member other than the coiled spring.
  • the operation member 51a may be, for example, a substantially columnar member centered on the central axis J2.
  • the two switch members 52a are substantially rectangular band-shaped members extending in the vertical direction.
  • the two switch members 52a have substantially the same shape, and one switch member 52a is arranged at a position obtained by rotating the other switch member 52a by 180 degrees in the circumferential direction.
  • the switch member 52a is held by the case 2a while passing vertically through the partition plate 21a (see FIG. 28) of the case 2a, and is vertically movable relative to the case 2a.
  • the switch member 52a is a substantially flat plate-shaped single member that is substantially perpendicular to the radial direction.
  • a projecting portion 521a projecting radially inward is provided on the lower portion of the inner surface of the switch member 52a.
  • the two switch members 52a are positioned below the two operating member projecting portions 512a and directly contact the lower end surfaces of the two operating member projecting portions 512a.
  • the switch member 52a is close to the lower end surface of the operating member projecting portion 512a with a slight gap therebetween.
  • the state of the contact 4a is changed between "open” and “closed” by displacing the switch member 52a.
  • the forces applied from the two operating member projecting portions 512a of the operating member 51a to the two switch members 52a change substantially simultaneously.
  • the two switch members 52a are displaced in synchronization with each other, and the states of the two contacts 4a are changed substantially simultaneously. Therefore, the states of the two contacts 4a are changed in synchronism with each other.
  • 29A to 31A are front views of the enable switch 1a.
  • 29A to 31A the button portion 3a and the case 2a are indicated by dashed lines.
  • 29B to 31B are plan views showing the configuration of part of the enable switch 1a.
  • 29B to 31B show button case 32a, operating member 51a and two switch members 52a.
  • Figures 29A and 29B show enable switch 1a in the first position described above.
  • Figures 30A and 30B show the enable switch 1a in the second position described above.
  • Figures 31A and 31B show enable switch 1a in the third position described above.
  • FIG. 32A is a graph showing the relationship between the stroke (mm) of the button portion 3a when the button portion 3a moves from the first position to the third position and the operation load (N) required to press down the button portion 3a.
  • FIG. 32B is a graph showing the relationship between the stroke (mm) of the button portion 3a and the stroke (mm) of the microswitch 40a.
  • the horizontal axis of FIGS. 32A and 32B indicates the stroke of the button portion 3a, and also indicates positions corresponding to the first, second and third positions on the horizontal axis.
  • the vertical axes in FIGS. 32A and 32B indicate the operation load of the button portion 3a and the stroke of the microswitch 40a, respectively.
  • the state of the contact 4a shifts from “open” to “closed” between the first position and the second position.
  • the state of the contact 4a changes from “closed” to “open” between the position and the third position.
  • the button portion 3a returns from the third position to the first position, the contact 4a is maintained in the "open” state.
  • the states of the two contacts 4a are changed approximately synchronously, similar to the enable switch 1 described above.
  • the switch member 52a moves downward together with the operating member 51a. This increases the stroke of the microswitch 40a.
  • the operating member 51a contacts a temporary fixing portion (not shown) provided on the case 2a in substantially the same manner as the operating member 51 of the enable switch 1 described above. As a result, the operating member 51a is temporarily fixed (that is, temporarily locked) to the case 2a, and its downward movement is restricted. At this time, the state of the contact 4a remains "open".
  • the button portion 3a When the button portion 3a is pushed further downward, the operation member 51a does not move vertically because its downward movement is restricted, and the switch member 52a does not move vertically either.
  • the button cover 31a and the button case 32a move downward while vertically compressing the operating elastic member 53a. Therefore, the stroke of the button portion 3a increases, but the stroke of the microswitch 40a does not change. Moreover, the operation load of the button part 3a increases. Then, the projecting portion 312a (see FIG. 23) of the button cover 31a comes into contact with the operating member projecting portion 512a of the operating member 51a from above.
  • the operation member 51a When the button portion 3a is pushed further downward, the operation member 51a does not move vertically because its downward movement is restricted, and the button cover 31a and the button case 32a move further downward. That is, the button portion 3a is moved further downward relative to the operating member 51a, and the operating elastic member 53a is further compressed in the vertical direction. Further, due to the downward relative movement of the button portion 3a with respect to the operation member 51a, the protrusion 312a (that is, the upper cam portion) of the button cover 31a that contacts the operation member protrusion 512a from above moves toward the operation member protrusion 512a. 29B to the position shown in FIG. 30B. As a result, the operating member 51a is released from the temporary fixing portion, and the temporary fixing of the operating member 51a is released.
  • the operating member 51a moves downward at once due to the restoring force of the operating elastic member 53a that is vertically compressed inside the operating member 51a.
  • the operation member projecting portion 512a overlaps the switch member 52a in the vertical direction and is in contact with the switch member 52a from above, a downward force is applied from the operation member projecting portion 512a to the switch member 52a.
  • 52a moves downward at once together with the operation member 51a.
  • the moving contact 42a moves downward at once and comes into contact with the lower fixed contact 41a.
  • the stroke of the microswitch 40a quickly passes through the OP point stroke line 91, and the state of the contact 4a changes from "open” to "closed.”
  • the operation load of the button portion 3a is rapidly reduced as the operation elastic member 53a restores (that is, elastically returns).
  • the operation member 51a is lowered in an extremely short time, and the contact 4a is switched from "open” to "closed” in an extremely short time. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the timing of the state transition from "open” to "closed” of one contact 4a and the timing of the state transition from "open” to "closed” of the other contact 4a. . In other words, the state transition of the two contacts 4a can be performed substantially simultaneously. In addition, since the operation load of the button portion 3a is reduced at once, it becomes difficult to interrupt the pressing of the button portion 3a immediately before or during switching of the contact 4a, so that erroneous operation of the enable switch 1a can be suppressed. .
  • the button portion 3a is pushed further downward and positioned at the second position shown in FIGS. 30A and 30B.
  • the button portion 3a is positioned at the second position, the lower end of the operating member 51a is in contact with the upper surface of the partition plate 21a of the case 2a, thereby restricting the downward movement of the operating member 51a.
  • the button case 32a is spaced upward from the partition plate 21a.
  • the operation member 51a When the button portion 3a is further pushed downward from the second position, the operation member 51a does not move vertically because its downward movement is restricted by the partition plate 21a of the case 2a.
  • the button case 32a moves further downward. That is, the button portion 3a moves further downward relative to the operation member 51a.
  • the operating elastic member 53a is vertically compressed.
  • the return elastic member 33a is also compressed vertically.
  • the protrusion 312a (see FIG. 23) of the button cover 31a that contacts the operation member protrusion 512a from above moves away from the operation member protrusion 512a.
  • a directional force acts, and the operation member 51a rotates counterclockwise as the button portion 3a descends.
  • the operation member projecting portion 512a is displaced in the circumferential direction from the position where it overlaps the switch member 52a in the vertical direction.
  • the operation member projecting portion 512a retreats from above the switch member 52a to the side, and the overlap in the vertical direction between the operation member projecting portion 512a and the switch member 52a is eliminated.
  • the operation member 51a is temporarily fixed between the first position and the second position, so the OP point stroke line 91 shown in FIG. Separate.
  • the hysteresis can be increased.
  • the enable switch 1a before the operation member 51a is rotated and the operation member projecting portion 512a is retracted from above the switch member 52a, the projection 514a (see FIG. 27) and the convex portion 211a (see FIG. 28) provided on the partition plate 21a of the case 2a are in contact with each other in the circumferential direction.
  • the convex portion 514a needs to climb over the convex portion 211a.
  • the force required to rotate the operating member 51a that is, the operating load of the button portion 3a
  • the button cover 31a and the button case 32a move further downward to the third position shown in FIG. 31A.
  • the operating member 51a is in contact with the partition plate 21a of the case 2a and is restricted from moving downward, so that it does not move vertically. That is, the button portion 3a moves further downward relative to the operating member 51a, and the operating elastic member 53a is further compressed in the vertical direction.
  • a circumferential force acts on the operation member protrusion 512a from the protrusion 312a (see FIG. 23) of the button cover 31a that contacts the operation member protrusion 512a from above, and the operation member 51a rotates counterclockwise. to move to the position shown in FIG. 31B.
  • the button portion 3a when the button portion 3a is positioned at the third position, the lower end of the operating member 51a and the lower end of the button case 32a are in contact with the upper surface of the partition plate 21a. This prevents the button portion 3a from moving below the third position.
  • the button cover 31a and the button case 32a are pushed back by the restoring force of the return elastic member 33a (see FIGS. 29A and 30A). , moves up to the first position shown in FIG. 29A.
  • the button portion 3a moves upward from the third position, the operating elastic member 53a vertically compressed between the button portion 3a and the operating member 51a applies a downward force to the operating member 51a. The upward movement of the operating member 51a is restricted.
  • the button case 32a moves upward relative to the operation member 51a, and the second end surface 342a (that is, the lower cam portion) of the concave portion 34a of the button case 32a moves toward the operation member projecting portion of the operation member 51a.
  • 512a is contacted from below.
  • a circumferential force acts from the second end face 342a to the operation member projecting portion 512a, and the operation member 51a rotates clockwise from the position shown in FIG. 31B to the position shown in FIG. 29B.
  • the button portion 3a is raised from the third position and returned to the first position, no downward force is applied to the switch member 52a, and the contact 4a remains in the "open" state.
  • the contact mechanism 5a includes the second movable member (that is, the operating member 51a) and the switch member 52a, in substantially the same manner as the enable switch 1 described above.
  • the operating member 51a is held by the first movable member (that is, the button portion 3a) and is relatively movable with respect to the button portion 3a.
  • the switch member 52a is in direct contact with the operating member 51a, and changes the state of the contact 4a by being displaced as the operating member 51a moves.
  • the button portion 3a includes an upper cam portion (the protrusion 312a of the button cover 31a in the above example) that contacts the operation member 51a from above, and a lower cam portion (the recess portion 34a in the above example) that contacts the operation member 51a from below. and a second end surface 342a) of
  • the operation member 51a when the button portion 3a returns from the third position to the first position, the operation member 51a is operated while the position of the switch member 52a (that is, the position relative to the button portion 3a) is maintained. It moves upward together with the button portion 3a.
  • the lower cam portion contacts the operating member 51a from below, and the operating member 51a moves above the button portion 3a as the button portion 3a rises. Relatively move in a second direction opposite to the first direction (rotate clockwise in the above example).
  • the operation member 51a held by the button portion 3a is brought into direct contact with the switch member 52a, and the switch member 52a is displaced as the operation member 51a moves, whereby the switch member 52a is moved to the first position. , the switching of the state of the contact 4a between the second position and the third position.
  • the number of parts of the enable switch 1a can be reduced, and the size of the enable switch 1a can be reduced in the vertical direction.
  • the button portion 3a preferably includes the upper surface portion 311a and the tubular second movable member holding portion (that is, the button case 32a).
  • the upper surface portion 311a is a portion that the operator touches when pushing the button portion 3a.
  • the button case 32a extends downward from the upper surface portion 311a and holds the operation member 51a inside.
  • the upper cam portion is provided on the lower surface of the upper surface portion 311a.
  • the lower cam portion is the lower end surface of the recess 34a provided on the side surface of the button case 32a.
  • FIG. 33 is a front view showing the enable switch 1b.
  • FIG. 33 shows the enable switch 1b in the initial state.
  • FIG. 34 is an exploded perspective view of the enable switch 1b.
  • the enable switch 1b is a substantially cylindrical switch centered on a central axis J3 extending in the Z direction (that is, in the vertical direction).
  • the enable switch 1b is a three-position enable switch like the enable switch 1a described above.
  • the enable switch 1b has substantially the same structure as the enable switch 1a shown in FIGS. 19 and 20 except that it has a contact 4b and a contact mechanism 5b having different structures from the contact 4a and the contact mechanism 5a described above. That is, the case 2b and the button portion 3b of the enable switch 1b have substantially the same structure as the case 2a and the button portion 3a of the enable switch 1a.
  • the enable switch 1b is provided with two tactile switches 40b instead of the two microswitches 40a of the enable switch 1a.
  • Each tactile switch 40b comprises a push button 44b in which the contact 4b is provided.
  • Each tactile switch 40b is arranged with the push button 44b facing sideways (that is, radially outward about the central axis J3).
  • the pressing surface of the push button 44b is substantially perpendicular to the radial direction
  • the pushing direction of the push button 44b is substantially parallel to the radial direction.
  • the push button 44b (and the contact 4b within the push button 44b) is oriented in the X direction.
  • the contact mechanism 5b includes an operation member 51b, two first switch members 52b, an operation elastic member 53b, two second switch members 54b, two switch elastic members 55b, and a switch support portion 56b.
  • the operating member 51b and the operating elastic member 53b have substantially the same structure as the operating member 51a and the operating elastic member 53a of the enable switch 1a, and are arranged at substantially the same positions as the operating member 51a and the operating elastic member 53a.
  • the operating member 51b includes a substantially cylindrical operating member main body 511b and two operating member projecting portions 512b projecting radially outward from the operating member main body 511b.
  • the first switch member 52b has substantially the same structure as the switch member 52a of the enable switch 1a, and is arranged at substantially the same position as the switch member 52a. Like the switch member 52a, the first switch member 52b is provided with a protrusion 521b that protrudes radially inward.
  • the switch support portion 56b is a substantially cylindrical member centered on the central axis J3.
  • the switch support portion 56b is inserted into the case 2b through an opening on the lower side of the case 2b and attached to the case 2b.
  • the switch support portion 56b supports two second switch members 54b, two switch elastic members 55b, and two tactile switches 40b in the case 2b.
  • the two second switch members 54b, the two switch elastic members 55b, and the two tactile switches 40b are indirectly held by the case 2b via the switch support portions 56b.
  • the second switch member 54b is a substantially flat plate-shaped member located below the first switch member 52b.
  • the second switch member 54b is made of resin, for example.
  • the second switch member 54b may be made of other material such as metal. Part of the second switch member 54b is in contact with the protrusion 521b of the first switch member 52b from below.
  • the second switch member 54b includes a shaft portion 541b, a frame portion 542b, and a pressing portion 543b.
  • the shaft portion 541b is a substantially cylindrical portion that extends substantially parallel in the vertical direction, and both ends in the vertical direction are rotatably held by the switch support portion 56b and/or the case 2b.
  • the shaft portion 541b is arranged at a position apart from the first switch member 52b in the circumferential direction about the central axis J3.
  • the frame portion 542b is a substantially rectangular frame-shaped portion connected to the shaft portion 541b at one side.
  • a pair of sides of the frame portion 542b extends substantially parallel to the vertical direction, and the other pair of sides extends substantially perpendicular to the vertical direction.
  • the frame portion 542b extends along the circumferential direction from the shaft portion 541b toward the first switch member 52b.
  • the frame portion 542b is curved so as to protrude radially outward in plan view.
  • the end portion of the frame portion 542b opposite to the shaft portion 541b is positioned radially inside the first switch member 52b and is in direct contact with the projecting portion 521b of the first switch member 52b from below.
  • the pressing portion 543b is a substantially rectangular plate-like portion located inside the substantially rectangular frame-shaped frame portion 542b.
  • the pressing portion 543b is continuous with one side of the frame portion 542b that is connected to the shaft portion 541b, and is separated from the other three sides without being directly continuous.
  • the pressing portion 543b extends along the circumferential direction from the one side.
  • the end of the pressing portion 543b opposite to the shaft portion 541b radially faces the push button 44b (and the contact 4b within the push button 44b) of the tactile switch 40b.
  • the end of the pressing portion 543b protrudes radially inward toward the push button 44b.
  • the end of the pressing portion 543b may be slightly spaced radially outward from the push button 44b of the tactile switch 40b and may be in contact with the push button 44b.
  • the switch elastic member 55b is arranged below the first switch member 52b and contacts the first switch member 52b from below.
  • the switch elastic member 55b is elastically deformable in the vertical direction.
  • the switch elastic member 55b is, for example, a spiral spring that extends substantially parallel to the vertical direction. In FIG. 35, the switch elastic member 55b is drawn in a substantially cylindrical shape for the sake of convenience.
  • the state of the contact 4b shifts from “open” to “closed” between the first position and the second position, The state of the contact 4b changes from “closed” to “open” between the position and the third position. Then, when the button portion 3b returns from the third position to the first position, the state of the contact 4b remains “open”. Also, the states of the two contacts 4b are changed approximately synchronously, similar to the enable switch 1a described above.
  • the enable switch 1b when the button portion 3b is pushed from the first position to the second position, when pushed from the second position to the third position, and when returning from the third position to the first position,
  • the operations of the operating member 51b and the first switch member 52b are substantially the same as those of the operating member 51a and the switch member 52a of the enable switch 1a.
  • the operating member protruding portion 512b of the operating member 51b is directed downward to the first switch member 52b in substantially the same manner as the enable switch 1a.
  • a force is applied and the first switch member 52b is displaced downward.
  • the free end of the frame portion 542b which is in contact with the protrusion 521b of the first switch member 52b, is pushed downward and radially inward, and the second switch member 54b is moved around the shaft portion 541b. 36 in the counterclockwise direction.
  • the pressing portion 543b of the second switch member 54b is urged against the push button 44b of the tactile switch 40b, the push button 44b is pushed in, and the state of the contact 4b shifts from "open” to "close.” .
  • the switch elastic member 55b positioned below the first switch member 52b is vertically compressed.
  • the first switch member 52b, the second switch member 54b, and the like make direct contact with the switch member (that is, the operation member 51b, which is the second movable member), and move as the operation member 51b moves.
  • a switch member that changes the state of the contact 4b by being displaced is configured.
  • the switch member comprises a first switch member 52b and a second switch member 54b.
  • the operating member 51b is temporarily fixed to restrict downward movement. After the button portion 3b is pushed in, the operation member 51b rotates slightly to release the temporary fixing. When the temporary fixation is released, the operating member 51b and the first switch member 52b move downward at once due to the restoring force of the operating elastic member 53b that is vertically compressed inside the operating member 51b, thereby turning the tactile switch into a tactile switch. The push button 44b of 40b is pushed forcefully. As a result, the state of the contact 4b is rapidly changed from "open” to "closed”.
  • the enable switch 1b even after the pressing portion 543b of the second switch member 54b is urged against the push button 44b of the tactile switch 40b and the state of the contact 4b is changed from "open” to "closed.”
  • the downward force applied from the operating member 51b continues the downward displacement of the first switch member 52b. Therefore, the counterclockwise rotation of the second switch member 54b is also continued, and the frame portion 542b is relatively displaced radially inward with respect to the pressing portion 543b around the pressing portion 543b. .
  • the second switch member 54b is elastically deformed between the first switch member 52b and the push button 44b so that the pressing portion 543b protrudes radially outward from the frame portion 542b.
  • the second switch member 54b is an elastically deformable resin spring, and serves as an overstroke absorbing member that absorbs the difference between the stroke of the button portion 3b and the stroke of the push button 44b of the tactile switch 40b (i.e., stroke difference). Function.
  • the stroke of the button portion 3b when pushing the push button 44b of the tactile switch 40b can be increased by a desired amount.
  • the button portion 3b When the button portion 3b is pushed from the second position to the third position, the button portion 3b moves downward relative to the operating member 51b, substantially similar to the enable switch 1a.
  • a circumferential force acts on the operating member projecting portion 512b from the projecting portion 312b (that is, the upper cam portion) of the button cover 31b that contacts the operating member projecting portion 512b from above, and the operating member 51b rotates counterclockwise. rotate around.
  • the operation member projecting portion 512b is displaced in the circumferential direction from the position vertically overlapping the first switch member 52b. In other words, the operating member projecting portion 512b retreats from above the first switch member 52b to the side, and the overlap in the vertical direction between the operating member projecting portion 512b and the first switch member 52b is eliminated.
  • the restoring force of the return elastic member 33b causes the button cover 31b and the button case 32b to move upward to the first position. move to a position.
  • the button portion 3b moves upward from the third position, a downward force is applied to the operating member 51b by the operating elastic member 53b, which is vertically compressed between the button portion 3b and the operating member 51b.
  • the upward movement of the operating member 51b is restricted. Therefore, the button case 32b moves upward relative to the operation member 51b, and the second end surface 342b (that is, the lower cam portion) of the concave portion 34b of the button case 32b moves toward the operation member projecting portion of the operation member 51b.
  • the contact mechanism 5b includes the second movable member (that is, the operation member 51b) and the switch member (in the above example, the first switch a member 52b and a second switch member 54b).
  • the operating member 51b is held by the first movable member (that is, the button portion 3b) and is relatively movable with respect to the button portion 3b.
  • the switch member changes the state of the contact 4b by being in direct contact with the operating member 51b and being displaced as the operating member 51b moves.
  • the button portion 3b includes an upper cam portion (the protrusion 312b of the button cover 31b in the above example) that contacts the operation member 51b from above, and a lower cam portion (the recess portion 34b in the above example) that contacts the operation member 51b from below. and a second end face 342b) of the
  • the enable switch 1b when the button portion 3b is pushed from the first position to the second position, force is applied to the switch member by the operation member 51b that moves downward together with the button portion 3b.
  • the state of the contact 4b is changed from one to the other (for example, from “open” to “closed”).
  • the upper cam contacts the operating member 51b from above, and the operating member 51b moves relative to the button 3b in the predetermined first direction as the button 3b descends.
  • the operation member 51b when the button portion 3b returns from the third position to the first position, the operation member 51b is moved to the button while the position of the switch member (that is, the position relative to the button portion 3b) is maintained. It moves upward together with the part 3b.
  • the lower cam portion contacts the operating member 51b from below, and the operating member 51b is moved above the button portion 3b as the button portion 3b rises. Relatively move in a second direction opposite to the first direction (rotate clockwise in the above example).
  • the operation member 51b held by the button portion 3b is brought into direct contact with the switch member, and the switch member is displaced as the operation member 51b is moved, whereby the first position and the second position are selected. Switching of the state of the contact 4b between the 2nd position and the 3rd position is realized. As a result, substantially the same as the enable switch 1a, the number of parts of the enable switch 1b can be reduced, and the size of the enable switch 1b can be reduced in the vertical direction.
  • the contact 4b is preferably arranged inside the push button 44b of the tactile switch 40b arranged with the push button 44b facing sideways.
  • the switch member includes a first switch member 52b that directly contacts the operation member 51b and a second switch member 54b that is arranged between the first switch member 52b and the push button 44b of the tactile switch 40b. and preferably.
  • the button portion 3b is pushed from the first position to the second position, the first switch member 52b displaced by the force applied from the operation member 51b causes the second switch member 54b to push the tactile switch 40b.
  • the button 44b is urged to change the state of the contact 4b from the one to the other. In this way, by making part of the stroke when pushing the push button 44b by the button portion 3b substantially perpendicular to the vertical direction, the enable switch 1b can be further miniaturized in the vertical direction.
  • the pressure applied from the operating member 51b is preferably The applied force continues to displace the first switch member 52b, and the second switch member 54b is elastically deformed between the first switch member 52b and the push button 44b.
  • the second switch member 54b functions as an overstroke absorbing member that absorbs the stroke difference, thereby increasing the stroke of the operating member 51b.
  • FIG. 37 is a front view showing the enable switch 1c.
  • FIG. 37 shows the enable switch 1c in the initial state.
  • FIG. 38 is an exploded perspective view of the enable switch 1c.
  • the enable switch 1c is a substantially cylindrical switch centered on a central axis J4 extending in the Z direction (that is, in the vertical direction).
  • the enable switch 1c is a three-position enable switch like the enable switch 1a described above.
  • the enable switch 1c has substantially the same structure as the enable switch 1a shown in FIGS. 19 and 20 except that it has a contact 4c and a contact mechanism 5c having different structures from the contact 4a and the contact mechanism 5a described above. That is, the case 2c and the button portion 3c of the enable switch 1c have substantially the same structure as the case 2a and the button portion 3a of the enable switch 1a.
  • the enable switch 1c is provided with two contacts 4c instead of the two microswitches 40a of the enable switch 1a.
  • the structure of the two contacts 4c is substantially the same, and one contact 4c is arranged at a position obtained by rotating the other contact 4c by 180° in the circumferential direction.
  • FIG. 39 is a side view showing one contact 4c and some members in the vicinity of the contact 4c.
  • the button portion 3c and the case 2c are indicated by dashed lines.
  • FIG. 40 is a perspective view showing the configuration of the contact 4c and part of the vicinity of the contact 4c.
  • Each contact 4c has a fixed terminal 45c and a conductive elastic member 46c.
  • each contact 4c is composed of a pair of fixed terminals 45c and one conductive elastic member 46c.
  • the conductive elastic member 46c and the fixed terminal 45c are conductive members, and are made of metal, for example.
  • the fixed terminal 45c is a plate-like member substantially perpendicular to the Y direction.
  • the fixed terminal 45c is a substantially rectangular band-shaped member extending along the vertical direction (that is, the Z direction).
  • a slit 451c extending downward from the upper edge of the fixed terminal 45c is provided in the upper portion of the fixed terminal 45c.
  • a pair of fixed terminals 45c of each contact 4c are arranged in the Y direction while being spaced apart from each other, and attached to the terminal support portion 56c.
  • the pair of fixed terminals 45c are arranged substantially parallel, and the distance between the pair of fixed terminals 45c in the Y direction (that is, the distance between the pair of fixed terminals 45c) is substantially constant over substantially the entire length in the Z direction.
  • the terminal support portion 56c is a substantially cylindrical member with a bottom centered on the central axis J4. The terminal support portion 56c is inserted into the case 2c through an opening on the lower side of the case 2c and attached to the case 2c.
  • each contact 4c is indirectly fixed to the case 2c via the terminal support portion 56c.
  • a lower end portion of each fixed terminal 45c protrudes downward from the lower end of the case 2c.
  • the fixed terminal 45c may be directly fixed to the case 2c.
  • the terminal support portion 56c may be regarded as part of the case 2c.
  • the conductive elastic member 46c is a torsion coil spring, which is a type of wire spring formed of conductive linear members.
  • the conductive elastic member 46c includes a coil portion 461c and a pair of arm portions 462c.
  • the coil portion 461c is a portion in which the linear member is wound in a coil shape or a circumferential shape.
  • the central axis of the coil portion 461c is substantially parallel to the X direction.
  • the diameter of the coil portion 461c in the Y direction is smaller than the interval between the pair of fixed terminals 45c.
  • the thickness of each arm portion 462c (that is, the diameter of the linear member) is larger than the width in the X direction of the slit 451c of the fixed terminal 45c.
  • the pair of arm portions 462c are continuous with the coil portion 461c and extend upward from the coil portion 461c so as to separate from each other.
  • Each arm 462c comprises a first arm 463c, a second arm 464c and a third arm 465c.
  • the first arm portion 463c extends obliquely outward upward from the coil portion 461c.
  • the second arm portion 464c is continuous with the upper end portion of the first arm portion 463c and extends obliquely inward upward from the upper end portion of the first arm portion 463c.
  • the second arm portion 464c extends obliquely inward from the end of the first arm portion 463c opposite to the coil portion 461c toward the opposite side to the coil portion 461c.
  • the arm portion 462c is bent at the connecting portion between the first arm portion 463c and the second arm portion 464c.
  • the connecting portion between the first arm portion 463c and the second arm portion 464c will also be referred to as the "flexion portion 466c".
  • the Y-direction distance between the bent portions 466c of the pair of arm portions 462c is greater than the Y-direction diameter of the coil portion 461c.
  • the third arm portion 465c is continuous with the upper end portion of the second arm portion 464c and extends upward from the upper end portion of the second arm portion 464c.
  • the distance in the Y direction between the connection portion between the second arm portion 464c and the third arm portion 465c in the pair of arm portions 462c (that is, the upper end portion of the second arm portion 464c) is, for example, larger than the diameter.
  • the first arm portion 463c extends in the (+Y) direction and the (+Z) direction from the vicinity of the (+Y) side end of the coil portion 461c. Above the upper end, it continues to the second arm portion 464c.
  • the second arm portion 464c extends from the (+Z) side end of the first arm portion 463c in the ( ⁇ Y) direction and the (+Z) direction
  • the third arm portion 465c extends from the (+Z) side end of the second arm portion 464c. ) side end in the (+Z) direction.
  • the first arm portion 463c extends in the (-Y) direction and the (+Z) direction from the vicinity of the (-Y) side end of the coil portion 461c, and extends from the upper end of the coil portion 461c. It is continuous with the second arm portion 464c above.
  • the second arm portion 464c extends from the (+Z) side end of the first arm portion 463c in the (+Y) direction and the (+Z) direction
  • the third arm portion 465c extends from the (+Z) side of the second arm portion 464c. It extends in the (+Z) direction from the side end.
  • the contact mechanism 5c includes an operating member 51c, two switch members 52c, an operating elastic member 53c, and two switch elastic members 55c.
  • the operating member 51c and the operating elastic member 53c have substantially the same structure as the operating member 51a and the operating elastic member 53a of the enable switch 1a, and are arranged at substantially the same positions as the operating member 51a and the operating elastic member 53a.
  • the operating member 51c includes a substantially cylindrical operating member main body 511c and two operating member projecting portions 512c projecting radially outward from the operating member main body 511c.
  • the two switch members 52c are substantially rectangular band-shaped members extending in the vertical direction.
  • the two switch members 52c have substantially the same shape, and one switch member 52c is arranged at a position obtained by rotating the other switch member 52c by 180 degrees in the circumferential direction.
  • the switch member 52c is held by the case 2c while penetrating vertically through the partition plate (see the partition plate 21a shown in FIG. 28) of the case 2c, and is vertically movable relative to the case 2c.
  • the upper portion of the switch member 52c is arranged radially inside the substantially cylindrical button case 32c and positioned between the inner surface of the button case 32c and the outer surface of the operation member main body 511c.
  • the upper end of the switch member 52c is positioned below the operating member projecting portion 512c and directly contacts the lower end face of the operating member projecting portion 512c.
  • the switch member 52c is close to the lower end surface of the operating member projecting portion 512c with a slight gap therebetween.
  • the switch member 52c is a substantially flat single member that is substantially perpendicular to the radial direction centered on the central axis J4.
  • a stepped portion is provided in the vertical central portion of the switch member 52a, and the lower portion of the switch member 52a is located radially inside the upper portion of the switch member 52a.
  • a substantially cylindrical protrusion 521c protruding radially outward is provided on the outer surface of the lower portion of the switch member 52c.
  • the coil portion 461c of the conductive elastic member 46c is fitted to the projecting portion 521c.
  • the third arm portion 465c of the conductive elastic member 46c is fixed to the stepped portion by passing through the stepped portion from below.
  • the conductive elastic member 46c is attached to the switch member 52c in a state in which the pair of arm portions 462c are slightly elastically deformed (that is, in a compressed state) so that they are closer to each other in the Y direction than in the natural state. This can prevent the conductive elastic member 46c from coming off the switch member 52c.
  • a switch elastic member 55c is arranged radially inside the lower portion of the switch member 52c.
  • the switch elastic member 55c is a member that is elastically deformable in the vertical direction.
  • the switch elastic member 55c is, for example, a spiral spring extending in the vertical direction.
  • the upper end of the switch elastic member 55c is fixed to the switch member 52c, and the lower end of the switch elastic member 55c is supported by the terminal support portion 56c. Therefore, when the switch member 52c moves downward, the switch elastic member 55c is vertically compressed.
  • the coil portion 461c of the conductive elastic member 46c attached to the switch member 52c is positioned below the upper ends of the pair of fixed terminals 45c and is located between the pair of fixed terminals 45c in the Y direction.
  • the bent portions 466c of the pair of arm portions 462c are positioned above the pair of fixed terminals 45c and spaced upward from the upper ends of the pair of fixed terminals 45c. The distance in the Y direction between the bent portions 466c of the pair of arm portions 462c is greater than the distance between the pair of fixed terminals 45c (that is, the distance between the main surfaces of the pair of fixed terminals 45c facing each other in the Y direction).
  • the pair of fixed terminals 45c are not electrically connected, and the state of the contact 4c is "open". Further, when the switch member 52c moves downward together with the conductive elastic member 46c from the state shown in FIG. ) is inserted from above between the pair of fixed terminals 45c in the Y direction. The pair of fixed terminals 45c are electrically connected via the conductive elastic member 46c by bringing the portions of the pair of arms 462c in the vicinity of the bent portions 466c into contact with the pair of fixed terminals 45c. The state transitions from "open” to "closed”.
  • the pair of arm portions 462c are elastically deformed so as to approach each other (that is, the distance between the pair of arm portions 462c is changed), and the conductive elastic member 46c is compressed in the Y direction.
  • a portion near the bent portion 466c of each arm portion 462c is, for example, fitted in the slit 451c of the fixed terminal 45c, and contacts the inner surface of the slit 451c at two or more terminal contact portions spaced apart from each other.
  • the state of the contact 4c shifts from “open” to “closed” between the first position and the second position.
  • the state of the contact 4c changes from “closed” to “open” between the position and the third position.
  • the button portion 3c returns from the third position to the first position, the contact 4c is maintained in the "open” state.
  • the states of the two contacts 4c are changed approximately synchronously, similar to the enable switch 1a described above.
  • the enable switch 1c when the button portion 3c is pushed from the first position to the second position, when pushed from the second position to the third position, and when returning from the third position to the first position,
  • the operations of the operating member 51c and the switch member 52c are substantially the same as those of the operating member 51a and the switch member 52a of the enable switch 1a.
  • the button portion 3c that is, the button cover 31c and the button case 32c
  • a downward force is applied to the switch member 52c from the operating member projecting portion 512c of the operating member 51c, and the switch member 52c is displaced downward together with the button portion 3c.
  • the conductive elastic member 46c fixed to the switch member 52c also moves downward together with the switch member 52c.
  • portions of the pair of arm portions 462c near the bent portion 466c directly contact the pair of fixed terminals 45c.
  • the contact state between the pair of arm portions 462c and the pair of fixed terminals 45c is switched from “non-contact” to "contact.”
  • the pair of fixed terminals 45c are electrically connected via the conductive elastic member 46c, and the state of the contact 4c is changed from “open” to "closed”.
  • the operation elastic member 53c and the switch elastic member 55c are compressed in the vertical direction.
  • the button portion 3c When the button portion 3c is pushed from the second position to the third position shown in FIG. 42, the button portion 3c moves downward relative to the operating member 51c in substantially the same manner as the enable switch 1a.
  • a force in the circumferential direction acts on the operating member projecting portion 512c from the projecting portion 312c (that is, the upper cam portion) of the button cover 31c that contacts the operating member projecting portion 512c from above, and the operating member 51c rotates counterclockwise. rotate around.
  • the operating member projecting portion 512c is displaced in the circumferential direction from the position where it overlaps the switch member 52c in the vertical direction. In other words, the operation member projecting portion 512c retreats from above the switch member 52c to the side, and the vertical overlap between the operation member projecting portion 512c and the switch member 52c is eliminated.
  • the electrical connection between the pair of fixed terminals 45c is released, and the state of the contact 4c shifts from "closed” to "open.”
  • the above-described upward movement of the switch member 52c may be performed using not only the restoring force of the switch elastic member 55c but also the restoring force of the conductive elastic member 46c.
  • the switch elastic member 55c may be omitted and the switch member 52c may be moved upward by the restoring force of the conductive elastic member 46c.
  • the restoring force of the return elastic member 33c causes the button cover 31c and the button case 32c to move upward to the first position. move to a position.
  • the button portion 3c moves upward from the third position
  • the operating elastic member 53c vertically compressed between the button portion 3c and the operating member 51c applies downward force to the operating member 51c.
  • the upward movement of the operating member 51c is restricted. Therefore, the button case 32c moves upward relative to the operation member 51c, and the second end surface 342c (that is, the lower cam portion) of the concave portion 34c of the button case 32c moves toward the operation member projecting portion of the operation member 51c.
  • 512c is contacted from below.
  • the contact mechanism 5c includes the second movable member (that is, the operating member 51c) and the switch member 52c, in substantially the same manner as the enable switch 1a described above.
  • the operating member 51c is held by the first movable member (that is, the button portion 3c) and is relatively movable with respect to the button portion 3c.
  • the switch member 52c is in direct contact with the operating member 51c and displaces along with the movement of the operating member 51c to change the state of the contact 4c.
  • the button portion 3c includes an upper cam portion (the protrusion 312c of the button cover 31c in the above example) that contacts the operating member 51c from above, and a lower cam portion (the concave portion 34c in the above example) that contacts the operating member 51c from below. a second end face 342c) of the
  • the operation member 51c when the button portion 3c returns from the third position to the first position, the operation member 51c is operated while the position of the switch member 52c (that is, the position relative to the button portion 3c) is maintained. It moves upward together with the button portion 3c.
  • the lower cam portion contacts the operating member 51c from below, and the operating member 51c moves above the button portion 3c as the button portion 3c rises. Relatively move in a second direction opposite to the first direction (rotate clockwise in the above example).
  • the operation member 51c held by the button portion 3c is brought into direct contact with the switch member 52c, and the switch member 52c is displaced as the operation member 51c moves, whereby the switch member 52c is moved to the first position. , the switching of the state of the contact 4c between the second position and the third position.
  • the enable switch 1a substantially the same as the enable switch 1a, the number of parts of the enable switch 1c can be reduced, and the size of the enable switch 1c can be reduced in the vertical direction.
  • the contact 4c preferably includes the fixed terminal 45c and the conductive elastic member 46c. Moreover, it is preferable that the conductive elastic member 46c is attached to the switch member 52c and elastically deformed as the switch member 52c is displaced. Then, when the button portion 3c is pushed from the first position to the second position, the conductive elastic member 46c is elastically deformed, and the contact state between the fixed terminal 45c and the conductive elastic member 46c is switched to the contact 4c. state changes from the one to the other.
  • the switch member 52c returns to the original position together with the conductive elastic member 46c, and the contact state between the fixed terminal 45c and the conductive elastic member 46c is maintained. is switched, and the state of the contact 4c shifts from the other to the one.
  • the enable switch 1c a part of the contact 4c (that is, the conductive elastic member 46c) is attached to the switch member 52c and displaced together with the switch member 52c, thereby realizing the state transition of the contact 4c.
  • the number of parts of the enable switch 1c can be further reduced, and the size of the enable switch 1c can be further reduced in the vertical direction.
  • the contact 4c can be miniaturized by configuring the contact 4c with the fixed terminal 45c and the conductive elastic member 46c without using the microswitch 40a or the tactile switch 40b. As a result, it is possible to further reduce the size of the enable switch 1c in the vertical and radial directions.
  • the number of contacts 4a provided in the enable switch 1a is not limited to two, and may be one, or may be three or more. The same applies to the enable switches 1b and 1c.
  • the portion that contacts the switch member 52a may be different from the portion that contacts the upper cam portion and the lower cam portion.
  • the upper cam portion and the lower cam portion do not necessarily need to contact the operating member projecting portion 512a to move the operating member 51a, and may contact other portions of the operating member 51a.
  • the portion of the operating member 51a that contacts the switch member 52a is not necessarily limited to the operating member projecting portion 512a, and may be a portion of the operating member 51a other than the operating member projecting portion 512a. The same applies to the enable switches 1b and 1c.
  • the upper cam portion does not necessarily have to be the protrusion 312a provided on the button cover 31a, and may have another structure.
  • the lower cam portion does not necessarily have to be the second end face 342a of the recess 34a provided in the button case 32a, and may have another structure. The same applies to the enable switches 1b and 1c.
  • the lower cam portion (the second end surface 342a of the recessed portion 34a) contacts the operating member 51a from below, thereby returning the button portion 3a from the third position to the first position.
  • the restoring force thereof may be used to return the button portion 3a from the third position to the first position. The same applies to the enable switches 1b and 1c.
  • the relative movement of the operation member 51a with respect to the button case 32a in the first direction and the second direction is necessarily the rotation in one side and the other side in the circumferential direction about the central axis J2. It is not required and may be varied.
  • the above-described relative movements in the first direction and the second direction may be movements in the (+Y) direction and movements in the ( ⁇ Y) direction. The same applies to the enable switches 1b and 1c.
  • the operation member 51a does not necessarily have to be temporarily fixed when the button portion 3a moves from the first position to the second position.
  • the operation member 51c may be temporarily fixed when the button portion 3c moves from the first position to the second position.
  • the shape of the operation member 51a is not limited to the above example, and may be changed in various ways.
  • the convex portion 514a of the lower end surface 513a of the operating member 51a may be omitted.
  • the operation member main body 511a does not necessarily have a cylindrical or columnar shape centered on the central axis J2, and may have another shape.
  • the operation member 51a does not necessarily have the operation member main body 511a and the operation member projecting portion 512a, and may have other structures. The same applies to the enable switches 1b and 1c.
  • the shape and moving direction of the switch member 52a are not necessarily limited to the above example, and may be changed in various ways.
  • the state of the contact 4a may be changed by displacing the switch member 52a in a direction inclined with respect to the Z direction.
  • the structures of the contacts 4a to 4c are not limited to the above examples, and may be changed in various ways.
  • the coil portion 461c of the conductive elastic member 46c is attached to the substantially central portion of the switch member 52c in the vertical direction, and the pair of arm portions 462c are separated from each other obliquely downward from the coil portion 461c. may extend to
  • the shape of the conductive elastic member 46c may be changed in various ways. Specifically, for example, the third arm portion 465c may be omitted from the pair of arm portions 462c of the conductive elastic member 46c, or the third arm portion 465c and the second arm portion 464c may be omitted.
  • the conductive elastic member 46c is not limited to a torsion coil spring, and may be an elastic member having various structures.
  • the conductive elastic member 46c may be a V-shaped or U-shaped wire spring that does not have a coil portion, or may be an elastic member (for example, a plate spring) other than the wire spring.
  • the enable switch 1a contrary to the above example, when the button portion 3a is pushed, the state of the contact 4a changes from “closed” to "open” between the first position and the second position. , the state of the contact 4a is changed from “open” to “closed” between the second position and the third position, and when the button portion 3a returns from the third position to the first position, the contact 4a may be maintained as "closed”.
  • the enable switches 1b and 1c contrary to the above example, when the button portion 3a is pushed, the state of the contact 4a changes from “closed” to "open” between the first position and the second position. , the state of the contact 4a is changed from “open” to "closed” between the second position and the third position, and when the button portion 3a returns from the third position to the first position, the contact 4a may be maintained as "closed”.
  • the enable switches 1b and 1c contrary to the above example, when the button portion 3a is pushed, the state of the contact 4a changes from “closed”

Landscapes

  • Push-Button Switches (AREA)
  • Slide Switches (AREA)

Abstract

In the present invention, in a contact mechanism (5) of an enabling switch (1), an operation member (51) is retained by a button (3) and can move relative to the button (3). A switch member (52) makes direct contact with the operation member (51) and changes the state of a contact (4) by changing position as a result of a movement of the operation member (51). In the enabling switch (1), by placing the operation member (51) retained by the button (3) in direct contact with the switch member (52) and changing the position of the switch member (52) as a result of a movement of the operation member (51), the state of the contact (4) is switched in a first position, a second position and a third position. As a result, it is possible to reduce the size of the enabling switch (1).

Description

イネーブルスイッチenable switch
 本発明は、イネーブルスイッチに関する。
[関連出願の参照]
 本願は、2021年8月30日に出願された日本国特許出願JP2021-140083からの優先権の利益を主張し、当該出願の全ての開示は、本願に組み込まれる。
The present invention relates to enable switches.
[Reference to related application]
This application claims the benefit of priority from Japanese Patent Application JP2021-140083 filed on August 30, 2021, the entire disclosure of which is incorporated herein.
 従来、スイッチのボタン部を押し込むに従って、スイッチの状態がOFFからONに移行し、さらにONからOFFに移行するイネーブルスイッチが知られている。イネーブルスイッチは、ロボットや機械を操作する際に操作者が入力を行う端末である操作部に設けられる。操作者は、入力を行う間、スイッチをON状態に維持する。スイッチがOFF状態になると、操作者による入力は遮断され、ロボット等の操作対象には伝わらない。これにより、操作者が操作部から手を離した場合や、驚く等して力強く操作部を握ってボタン部を押し込んだ場合、操作部への入力は操作対象には伝わらず、操作者の安全が確保される。このようなイネーブルスイッチの例として、特開2001-35300号公報、特開2002-42606号公報、国際公開第2002/061779号および特開2005-56635号公報に開示されたものを挙げることができる。 Conventionally, there has been known an enable switch in which the state of the switch shifts from OFF to ON and then from ON to OFF as the button portion of the switch is pushed. The enable switch is provided in an operation unit, which is a terminal for an operator to input when operating a robot or machine. The operator keeps the switch in the ON state while performing the input. When the switch is in the OFF state, the input by the operator is cut off and is not transmitted to the operation target such as the robot. As a result, even if the operator takes his/her hand off the operation unit, or if he/she is surprised and grips the operation unit forcefully and presses the button, the input to the operation unit will not be transmitted to the operation target, thereby ensuring the safety of the operator. is ensured. Examples of such an enable switch include those disclosed in JP-A-2001-35300, JP-A-2002-42606, WO-2002/061779 and JP-A-2005-56635. .
 ところで、イネーブルスイッチでは、スイッチの状態をOFF-ON-OFFに切り替えるための構造が複雑化し、部品点数も多くなる。このため、イネーブルスイッチの小型化が困難であった。 By the way, with the enable switch, the structure for switching the state of the switch to OFF-ON-OFF becomes complicated, and the number of parts increases. Therefore, it has been difficult to miniaturize the enable switch.
 本発明は、イネーブルスイッチに向けられており、イネーブルスイッチを小型化することを目的としている。 The present invention is directed to an enable switch, and aims to miniaturize the enable switch.
 本発明の態様1は、イネーブルスイッチであって、ケースと、前記ケースに向かって下方に押し込まれる第1可動部材と、接点と、前記第1可動部材が前記ケースに向かって押し込まれるに従って、前記接点の状態を、開および閉の一方から他方に移行し、さらに前記他方から前記一方へと移行する接点機構と、を備える。前記第1可動部材が押し込まれていない状態における前記ケースに対する前記第1可動部材の位置を第1ポジションとする。前記第1可動部材が最も下側に押し込まれた状態における前記ケースに対する前記第1可動部材の位置を第3ポジションとする。前記第1ポジションと前記第3ポジションとの間における前記ケースに対する前記第1可動部材の所定の位置を第2ポジションとする。前記第1可動部材が押し込まれる際に、前記第1ポジションと前記第2ポジションとの間にて前記接点の状態が前記一方から前記他方に移行し、前記第2ポジションと前記第3ポジションとの間にて前記接点の状態が前記他方から前記一方に移行する。前記第1可動部材が前記第3ポジションから前記第1ポジションへと戻る際に、前記接点の状態が前記一方のままで維持される。前記接点機構は、前記第1可動部材により保持され、前記第1可動部材に対して相対的に移動可能な第2可動部材と、前記第2可動部材と直接的に接触し、前記第2可動部材の移動に伴って変位することにより前記接点の状態を変更するスイッチ部材と、を備える。前記第1可動部材は、前記第2可動部材に上側から接触する上カム部と、前記第2可動部材に下側から接触する下カム部と、を備える。前記第1可動部材が前記第1ポジションから前記第2ポジションへと押し込まれる際に、前記第1可動部材と共に下方へと移動する前記第2可動部材によって前記スイッチ部材に力が付与されることにより、前記スイッチ部材が変位して前記接点の状態が前記一方から前記他方に移行する。前記第1可動部材が前記第2ポジションから前記第3ポジションへと押し込まれる際に、前記第2可動部材の下方への移動が制限された状態で、前記上カム部が前記第2可動部材に上側から接触し、前記第1可動部材の下降に伴って前記第2可動部材を前記第1可動部材に対して所定の第1方向へと相対移動させることより、前記第2可動部材から前記スイッチ部材に付与される下向きの力が失われて前記スイッチ部材が元の位置へと戻り、前記接点の状態が前記他方から前記一方に移行する。前記第1可動部材が前記第3ポジションから前記第1ポジションへと戻る際に、前記スイッチ部材の位置が維持された状態で、前記第2可動部材が前記第1可動部材と共に上方へと移動し、また、前記第2可動部材の上方への移動が制限された状態で、前記下カム部が前記第2可動部材に下側から接触し、前記第1可動部材の上昇に伴って前記第2可動部材を前記第1可動部材に対して前記第1方向とは反対向きの第2方向へと相対移動させる。 A first aspect of the present invention is an enable switch, comprising: a case; a first movable member pushed downward toward the case; a contact; a contact mechanism that shifts the state of the contact from one of open and closed to the other, and further shifts from the other to the one. A position of the first movable member with respect to the case when the first movable member is not pushed in is defined as a first position. The position of the first movable member with respect to the case when the first movable member is pushed to the bottom is defined as a third position. A predetermined position of the first movable member with respect to the case between the first position and the third position is defined as a second position. When the first movable member is pushed in, the state of the contact changes from the one to the other between the first position and the second position, and between the second position and the third position. In between, the state of the contact transitions from the other to the one. When the first movable member returns from the third position to the first position, the one state of the contact is maintained. The contact mechanism includes: a second movable member held by the first movable member and movable relative to the first movable member; a switch member that changes the state of the contact by being displaced as the member moves. The first movable member includes an upper cam portion that contacts the second movable member from above, and a lower cam portion that contacts the second movable member from below. When the first movable member is pushed from the first position to the second position, force is applied to the switch member by the second movable member that moves downward together with the first movable member. , the switch member is displaced to change the state of the contact from the one to the other. When the first movable member is pushed from the second position to the third position, the upper cam portion is moved to the second movable member while the downward movement of the second movable member is restricted. By contacting from above and moving the second movable member relative to the first movable member in a predetermined first direction as the first movable member descends, the switch is moved from the second movable member to the switch. Upon loss of the downward force applied to the member, the switch member returns to its original position and the state of the contacts transitions from the other to the one. When the first movable member returns from the third position to the first position, the second movable member moves upward together with the first movable member while the position of the switch member is maintained. Also, in a state in which the upward movement of the second movable member is restricted, the lower cam portion contacts the second movable member from below, and the second movable member moves upward as the first movable member rises. The movable member is moved relative to the first movable member in a second direction opposite to the first direction.
 本発明によれば、イネーブルスイッチを小型化することができる。 According to the present invention, the enable switch can be miniaturized.
 本発明の態様2は、態様1のイネーブルスイッチであって、前記第1可動部材が前記第1ポジションから前記第2ポジションへと押し込まれる際に、前記第2可動部材は前記スイッチ部材に上側から接触し、前記第1可動部材と共に下方へと移動する前記第2可動部材によって前記スイッチ部材が押し下げられる。 Aspect 2 of the present invention is the enable switch according to aspect 1, wherein when the first movable member is pushed from the first position to the second position, the second movable member pushes the switch member from above. The switch member is pushed down by the second movable member that contacts and moves downward together with the first movable member.
 本発明の態様3は、態様1または2のイネーブルスイッチであって、前記第1可動部材は、操作者が前記第1可動部材を押し込む際に触れる上面部と、前記上面部から下方に延びるとともに内側に前記第2可動部材を保持する筒状の第2可動部材保持部と、をさらに備える。前記上カム部は、前記第2可動部材保持部の側面において上下方向に対して傾斜する方向に延びる溝部の上端面であり、前記下カム部は、前記溝部の下端面である。 Aspect 3 of the present invention is the enable switch according to aspect 1 or 2, wherein the first movable member includes an upper surface portion that an operator touches when pushing the first movable member, and extends downward from the upper surface portion. A cylindrical second movable member holding portion that holds the second movable member inside is further provided. The upper cam portion is the upper end surface of a groove portion extending in a direction inclined with respect to the vertical direction on the side surface of the second movable member holding portion, and the lower cam portion is the lower end surface of the groove portion.
 本発明の態様4は、態様1または2のイネーブルスイッチであって、前記第1可動部材は、操作者が前記第1可動部材を押し込む際に触れる上面部と、前記上面部から下方に延びるとともに内側に前記第2可動部材を保持する筒状の第2可動部材保持部と、さらにを備える。前記上カム部は、前記上面部の下面に設けられる。前記下カム部は、前記第2可動部材保持部の側面に設けられた凹部の下端面である。 Aspect 4 of the present invention is the enable switch according to aspect 1 or 2, wherein the first movable member includes an upper surface portion that an operator touches when pushing the first movable member, and extends downward from the upper surface portion. A tubular second movable member holding portion for holding the second movable member inside thereof is further provided. The upper cam portion is provided on the lower surface of the upper surface portion. The lower cam portion is a lower end surface of a recess provided on the side surface of the second movable member holding portion.
 本発明の態様5は、態様1または2(態様1ないし4のいずれか1つ、であってもよい。)のイネーブルスイッチであって、前記第2可動部材は、上下方向に延びる第2可動部材本体と、前記第2可動部材本体から側方に突出する第2可動部材突出部と、を備える。前記第1可動部材が前記第1ポジションから前記第2ポジションへと押し込まれる際に、前記第2可動部材突出部は前記スイッチ部材に上側から接触して力を付与する。前記第1可動部材が前記第2ポジションから前記第3ポジションへと押し込まれる際に、前記上カム部は前記第2可動部材突出部に上側から接触する。前記第1可動部材が前記第3ポジションから前記第1ポジションへと戻る際に、前記下カム部は前記第2可動部材突出部に下側から接触する。 Aspect 5 of the present invention is the enable switch of aspect 1 or 2 (may be any one of aspects 1 to 4), wherein the second movable member is a second movable member extending in the vertical direction. A member main body and a second movable member projecting portion that protrudes laterally from the second movable member main body. When the first movable member is pushed from the first position to the second position, the second movable member projecting portion contacts the switch member from above to apply force. When the first movable member is pushed from the second position to the third position, the upper cam portion contacts the second movable member projecting portion from above. When the first movable member returns from the third position to the first position, the lower cam portion contacts the second movable member projecting portion from below.
 本発明の態様6は、態様1または2(態様1ないし5のいずれか1つ、であってもよい。)のイネーブルスイッチであって、前記第2可動部材は、上下方向に延びる中心軸を中心とする筒状または柱状である。前記第2可動部材の前記第1可動部材に対する前記第1方向への相対移動は、前記中心軸を中心とする周方向の一方側への回転である。前記第2可動部材の前記第1可動部材に対する前記第2方向への相対移動は、前記中心軸を中心とする周方向の他方側への回転である。 Aspect 6 of the present invention is the enable switch of aspect 1 or 2 (may be any one of aspects 1 to 5), wherein the second movable member has a central axis extending in the vertical direction. It is cylindrical or columnar with a center. The relative movement of the second movable member in the first direction with respect to the first movable member is rotation to one side in the circumferential direction about the central axis. The relative movement of the second movable member in the second direction with respect to the first movable member is rotation to the other side in the circumferential direction about the central axis.
 本発明の態様7は、態様1または2(態様1ないし6のいずれか1つ、であってもよい。)のイネーブルスイッチであって、前記第1可動部材が前記第2ポジションから前記第3ポジションへと押し込まれる際に、前記第2可動部材の下方への移動の制限が、前記第2可動部材の下端面が前記ケースに接触することより実現される。前記第2可動部材の前記下端面は、中央部が下方に凸となるように湾曲する凸面である。 Mode 7 of the present invention is the enable switch of Mode 1 or 2 (which may be any one of Modes 1 to 6), wherein the first movable member moves from the second position to the third position. When pushed into the position, the downward movement of the second movable member is restricted by contacting the lower end surface of the second movable member with the case. The lower end surface of the second movable member is a convex surface curved so that the central portion thereof is downwardly convex.
 本発明の態様8は、態様1または2(態様1ないし7のいずれか1つ、であってもよい。)のイネーブルスイッチであって、前記接点は、押しボタンを側方に向けて配置されるタクティルスイッチの前記押しボタンの内部に配置される。前記スイッチ部材は、前記第2可動部材に直接的に接触する第1スイッチ部材と、前記第1スイッチ部材と前記タクティルスイッチの前記押しボタンとの間に配置される第2スイッチ部材と、を備える。前記第1可動部材が前記第1ポジションから前記第2ポジションへと押し込まれる際に、前記第2可動部材から付与される力により変位する前記第1スイッチ部材によって、前記第2スイッチ部材が前記タクティルスイッチの前記押しボタンに対して付勢され、前記接点の状態が前記一方から前記他方に移行する。 Aspect 8 of the present invention is the enable switch of aspect 1 or 2 (which may be any one of aspects 1 to 7), wherein the contact is arranged with the push button facing laterally. located inside said push button of a tactile switch. The switch member includes a first switch member that directly contacts the second movable member, and a second switch member that is arranged between the first switch member and the push button of the tactile switch. Prepare. When the first movable member is pushed from the first position to the second position, the first switch member displaced by the force applied from the second movable member causes the second switch member to move to the tactility. biased against the push button of the switch to transition the state of the contacts from the one to the other.
 本発明の態様9は、態様8のイネーブルスイッチであって、前記第1可動部材が前記第1ポジションから前記第2ポジションへと押し込まれる際に、前記第2スイッチ部材が前記押しボタンに対して付勢された後も、前記第2可動部材から付与される力による前記第1スイッチ部材の変位が継続され、前記第2スイッチ部材が前記第1スイッチ部材と前記押しボタンとの間にて弾性変形する。 A ninth aspect of the present invention is the enable switch according to Aspect 8, wherein the second switch member is pressed against the push button when the first movable member is pushed from the first position to the second position. Even after being biased, the first switch member continues to be displaced by the force applied from the second movable member, and the second switch member is elastic between the first switch member and the push button. transform.
 本発明の態様10は、態様1または2(態様1ないし7のいずれか1つ、であってもよい。)のイネーブルスイッチであって、前記接点は、固定端子と、前記スイッチ部材に取り付けられて前記スイッチ部材の変位に伴って弾性変形する導電性弾性部材と、を備える。前記第1可動部材が前記第1ポジションから前記第2ポジションへと押し込まれる際に、前記導電性弾性部材が弾性変形するとともに、前記固定端子と前記導電性弾性部材との接触状態が切り替えられて前記接点の状態が前記一方から前記他方に移行する。前記第1可動部材が前記第2ポジションから前記第3ポジションへと押し込まれる際に、前記スイッチ部材が前記導電性弾性部材と共に元の位置へと戻り、前記固定端子と前記導電性弾性部材との接触状態が切り替えられて前記接点の状態が前記他方から前記一方に移行する。 Mode 10 of the present invention is the enable switch of mode 1 or 2 (any one of modes 1 to 7 may be used), wherein the contact is attached to a fixed terminal and the switch member. and a conductive elastic member that elastically deforms as the switch member is displaced. When the first movable member is pushed from the first position to the second position, the conductive elastic member is elastically deformed and the state of contact between the fixed terminal and the conductive elastic member is switched. The state of the contact transitions from the one to the other. When the first movable member is pushed from the second position to the third position, the switch member returns to its original position together with the conductive elastic member, and the fixed terminal and the conductive elastic member are separated from each other. The contact state is switched and the state of the contact shifts from the other to the one.
 本発明の態様11は、態様1または2(態様1ないし10のいずれか1つ、であってもよい。)のイネーブルスイッチであって、前記第2可動部材と前記第1可動部材との間に配置され、前記第1可動部材が前記第2可動部材に対して相対的に下方に移動することにより上下方向に圧縮される操作弾性部材をさらに備える。前記第1可動部材が前記第1ポジションから前記第2ポジションへと押し込まれる際に、前記接点の状態が前記一方から前記他方に移行するよりも前に、前記第2可動部材が前記ケースに設けられた仮止め部に接触して前記第2可動部材の下方への移動が制限される。前記第2可動部材の下方への移動が制限された状態で前記第1可動部材が下方へと移動することにより、前記操作弾性部材が上下方向に圧縮され、前記上カム部が前記第2可動部材に上側から接触し、前記第1可動部材の下降に伴って前記第2可動部材を前記第1方向へと移動させる。これによって、前記第2可動部材が前記仮止め部からずれ、前記操作弾性部材の復元力によって前記第2可動部材が下方へと移動して前記スイッチ部材に力が付与されることにより、前記スイッチ部材が変位して前記接点の状態が前記一方から前記他方に移行する。 Aspect 11 of the present invention is the enable switch of aspect 1 or 2 (which may be any one of aspects 1 to 10), wherein the switch between the second movable member and the first movable member and is vertically compressed by the first movable member moving downward relative to the second movable member. When the first movable member is pushed from the first position to the second position, the second movable member is provided in the case before the state of the contact changes from the one to the other. The downward movement of the second movable member is restricted by coming into contact with the temporarily fixed portion. When the first movable member moves downward while the downward movement of the second movable member is restricted, the operating elastic member is vertically compressed, and the upper cam portion moves toward the second movable member. The member is contacted from above to move the second movable member in the first direction as the first movable member descends. As a result, the second movable member is displaced from the temporary fixing portion, and the restoring force of the operating elastic member moves the second movable member downward to apply force to the switch member, thereby causing the switch to move. A member is displaced to change the state of the contact from the one to the other.
 本発明の態様12は、態様1または2(態様1ないし11のいずれか1つ、であってもよい。)のイネーブルスイッチであって、前記第2可動部材を挟んで前記接点の反対側に配置される他の接点をさらに備える。前記他の接点の状態は、前記接点機構により前記接点の状態と同期して移行される。前記接点機構は、前記第2可動部材を挟んで前記スイッチ部材の反対側に配置されて前記ケースにより保持される他のスイッチ部材をさらに備える。前記他のスイッチ部材は、前記スイッチ部材と同様に、前記第2可動部材と直接的に接触し、前記第2可動部材の移動に伴って前記スイッチ部材の変位と同期して変位することにより、前記他の接点の状態を変更する。 Aspect 12 of the present invention is the enable switch of aspect 1 or 2 (may be any one of aspects 1 to 11), wherein the switch is provided on the opposite side of the contact across the second movable member. It further comprises other contacts arranged. The state of the other contact is shifted by the contact mechanism in synchronization with the state of the contact. The contact mechanism further includes another switch member arranged on the opposite side of the switch member with the second movable member interposed therebetween and held by the case. The other switch member, like the switch member, is in direct contact with the second movable member and is displaced in synchronism with the displacement of the switch member as the second movable member moves, Changing the state of said other contact.
 上述の目的および他の目的、特徴、態様および利点は、添付した図面を参照して以下に行うこの発明の詳細な説明により明らかにされる。 The above-mentioned and other objects, features, aspects and advantages will become apparent from the detailed description of the present invention given below with reference to the accompanying drawings.
第1の実施の形態に係るイネーブルスイッチの斜視図である。1 is a perspective view of an enable switch according to a first embodiment; FIG. イネーブルスイッチの平面図である。It is a top view of an enable switch. イネーブルスイッチの縦断面図である。It is a vertical cross-sectional view of an enable switch. ボタンケースの斜視図である。It is a perspective view of a button case. 操作部材の斜視図である。It is a perspective view of an operating member. イネーブルスイッチの一部を示す平面図である。It is a top view which shows a part of enable switch. イネーブルスイッチの一部を示す縦断面図である。It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view showing a part of an enable switch. イネーブルスイッチの一部を示す平面図である。It is a top view which shows a part of enable switch. イネーブルスイッチの一部を示す縦断面図である。It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view showing a part of an enable switch. イネーブルスイッチの一部を示す平面図である。It is a top view which shows a part of enable switch. イネーブルスイッチの一部を示す縦断面図である。It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view showing a part of an enable switch. イネーブルスイッチの一部を示す平面図である。It is a top view which shows a part of enable switch. イネーブルスイッチの一部を示す縦断面図である。It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view showing a part of an enable switch. イネーブルスイッチの一部を示す平面図である。It is a top view which shows a part of enable switch. イネーブルスイッチの一部を示す縦断面図である。It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view showing a part of an enable switch. イネーブルスイッチの一部を示す平面図である。It is a top view which shows a part of enable switch. イネーブルスイッチの一部を示す縦断面図である。It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view showing a part of an enable switch. イネーブルスイッチの一部を示す平面図である。It is a top view which shows a part of enable switch. イネーブルスイッチの一部を示す縦断面図である。It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view showing a part of an enable switch. イネーブルスイッチの一部を示す平面図である。It is a top view which shows a part of enable switch. イネーブルスイッチの一部を示す縦断面図である。It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view showing a part of an enable switch. イネーブルスイッチの一部を示す平面図である。It is a top view which shows a part of enable switch. イネーブルスイッチの一部を示す縦断面図である。It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view showing a part of an enable switch. イネーブルスイッチの一部を示す平面図である。It is a top view which shows a part of enable switch. イネーブルスイッチの一部を示す縦断面図である。It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view showing a part of an enable switch. イネーブルスイッチの一部を示す平面図である。It is a top view which shows a part of enable switch. イネーブルスイッチの一部を示す縦断面図である。It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view showing a part of an enable switch. 操作部材の下端面近傍を示す側面図である。FIG. 4 is a side view showing the vicinity of the lower end surface of the operating member; ケースの内底面を示す平面図である。It is a top view which shows the inner bottom face of a case. ボタンケースおよび操作部材の他の例を示す斜視図である。FIG. 10 is a perspective view showing another example of the button case and the operation member; 第2の実施の形態に係るイネーブルスイッチの正面図である。It is a front view of an enable switch according to a second embodiment. イネーブルスイッチの分解斜視図である。4 is an exploded perspective view of an enable switch; FIG. イネーブルスイッチの一部の構成を省略して示す側面図である。FIG. 3 is a side view showing the configuration of a part of an enable switch, with the configuration omitted; イネーブルスイッチの一部の構成を省略して示す側面図である。FIG. 3 is a side view showing the configuration of a part of an enable switch, with the configuration omitted; ボタンカバーの斜視図である。It is a perspective view of a button cover. ボタンケースの斜視図である。It is a perspective view of a button case. 接点近傍の一部の構成を示す正面図である。It is a front view which shows the structure of a part of contact vicinity. 接点機構近傍の一部の部材を示す斜視図である。It is a perspective view which shows some members near a contact mechanism. 操作部材の底面図である。It is a bottom view of an operation member. ケースの平面図である。It is a top view of a case. イネーブルスイッチの正面図である。It is a front view of an enable switch. イネーブルスイッチの一部の構成を示す平面図である。It is a top view which shows the structure of a part of enable switch. イネーブルスイッチの正面図である。It is a front view of an enable switch. イネーブルスイッチの一部の構成を示す平面図である。It is a top view which shows the structure of a part of enable switch. イネーブルスイッチの正面図である。It is a front view of an enable switch. イネーブルスイッチの一部の構成を示す平面図である。It is a top view which shows the structure of a part of enable switch. ボタン部のストロークと操作荷重との関係を示すグラフである。It is a graph which shows the relationship between the stroke of a button part, and an operation load. ボタン部のストロークとマイクロスイッチのストロークとの関係を示すグラフである。4 is a graph showing the relationship between the stroke of the button portion and the stroke of the microswitch; 第3の実施の形態に係るイネーブルスイッチの正面図である。It is a front view of an enable switch according to a third embodiment. イネーブルスイッチの分解斜視図である。4 is an exploded perspective view of an enable switch; FIG. 第1スイッチ部材近傍を示す平面図である。It is a top view which shows the 1st switch member vicinity. 第1スイッチ部材近傍を示す斜視図である。It is a perspective view which shows the 1st switch member vicinity. 第4の実施の形態に係るイネーブルスイッチの正面図である。It is a front view of an enable switch according to a fourth embodiment. イネーブルスイッチの分解斜視図である。4 is an exploded perspective view of an enable switch; FIG. 接点近傍の一部の構成を示す側面図である。It is a side view which shows the structure of a part of contact vicinity. 接点近傍の一部の構成を示す斜視図である。It is a perspective view which shows the structure of a part of contact vicinity. 接点近傍の一部の構成を示す側面図である。It is a side view which shows the structure of a part of contact vicinity. 接点近傍の一部の構成を示す側面図である。It is a side view which shows the structure of a part of contact vicinity.
 図1は、本発明の第1の実施の形態に係るイネーブルスイッチ1を示す斜視図である。図2は、イネーブルスイッチ1を示す平面図である。図3は、イネーブルスイッチ1を図2中のIII-IIIの位置にて切断した縦断面図である。図1では、図の理解を容易にするために、後述するボタンカバー31を二点鎖線にて描き、ボタンカバー31の内部の構成を実線にて描いている。また、図2では、ボタンカバー31の図示を省略している。 FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing an enable switch 1 according to the first embodiment of the invention. FIG. 2 is a plan view showing the enable switch 1. FIG. FIG. 3 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the enable switch 1 taken along line III--III in FIG. In FIG. 1, in order to facilitate understanding of the drawing, a button cover 31, which will be described later, is drawn with a two-dot chain line, and the internal configuration of the button cover 31 is drawn with a solid line. 2, illustration of the button cover 31 is omitted.
 図1では、互いに垂直な3つの方向をX方向、Y方向およびZ方向と呼ぶ。また、Z方向を上下方向とも呼ぶ。なお、Z方向は、イネーブルスイッチ1が実際に使用される際の上下方向とは一致していてもよく、一致していなくてもよい。他の図においても同様である。 In FIG. 1, the three directions perpendicular to each other are called the X direction, Y direction and Z direction. Also, the Z direction is also referred to as the vertical direction. The Z direction may or may not match the vertical direction when the enable switch 1 is actually used. The same applies to other drawings.
 イネーブルスイッチ1は、ロボットの教示ペンダントや作業機械のコントローラ等の操作部に設けられる。ロボットや作業機械等は操作部の操作対象である。イネーブルスイッチ1は、操作部からの操作対象の操作を許可する。具体的には、イネーブルスイッチ1がON状態の間、操作対象の操作が許可され、操作者が操作部に入力を行うと、入力に従った操作部からの信号が操作対象に伝わる。イネーブルスイッチ1がOFF状態の場合は、操作対象の操作が許可されず、操作者の入力は操作対象に伝わらない。 The enable switch 1 is provided in an operation unit such as a teaching pendant of a robot or a controller of a work machine. Robots, work machines, and the like are objects to be operated by the operation unit. The enable switch 1 permits operation of an operation target from the operation unit. Specifically, while the enable switch 1 is in the ON state, the operation of the operation target is permitted, and when the operator makes an input to the operation unit, a signal from the operation unit according to the input is transmitted to the operation target. When the enable switch 1 is in the OFF state, the operation of the operation target is not permitted, and the operator's input is not transmitted to the operation target.
 イネーブルスイッチ1は、いわゆる、3ポジション・イネーブルスイッチである。以下に説明する例では、イネーブルスイッチ1は、後述するボタン部3が押し込まれていない状態(すなわち、初期状態)ではOFF状態であり、ボタン部3がある程度押し込まれた状態ではON状態となり、ボタン部3がさらに押し込まれた状態ではOFF状態となる。なお、ボタン部3の状態とイネーブルスイッチ1のON-OFF状態との関係は、上述のものとは逆であってもよい。すなわち、初期状態ではイネーブルスイッチ1はON状態であり、ボタン部3がある程度押し込まれた状態ではOFF状態となり、ボタン部3がさらに押し込まれた状態ではON状態となってもよい。 The enable switch 1 is a so-called 3-position enable switch. In the example described below, the enable switch 1 is OFF when the button portion 3 is not pressed (that is, the initial state), and is ON when the button portion 3 is pressed to some extent. When the portion 3 is further pushed in, it is in the OFF state. Note that the relationship between the state of the button portion 3 and the ON-OFF state of the enable switch 1 may be reversed to that described above. That is, the enable switch 1 may be in the ON state in the initial state, may be in the OFF state when the button portion 3 is pushed to some extent, and may be in the ON state when the button portion 3 is further pushed.
 図1に示す例では、イネーブルスイッチ1は、X方向に長く、Y方向に短い略直方体状の部材である。以下の説明では、X方向およびY方向をそれぞれ、「長手方向」および「幅方向」とも呼ぶ。イネーブルスイッチ1は、ケース2と、ボタン部3と、接点4と、接点機構5とを備える。ケース2は、ボタン部3、接点4および接点機構5等を支持する。ケース2には、イネーブルスイッチ1を他の装置と電気的に接続するための接続端子等も設けられる。図1に示す例では、ケース2は、X方向に長く、Y方向に短い略直方体状の部材である。 In the example shown in FIG. 1, the enable switch 1 is a substantially rectangular parallelepiped member that is long in the X direction and short in the Y direction. In the following description, the X direction and Y direction are also referred to as "longitudinal direction" and "width direction", respectively. The enable switch 1 includes a case 2 , a button portion 3 , a contact 4 and a contact mechanism 5 . Case 2 supports button portion 3, contact 4, contact mechanism 5, and the like. The case 2 is also provided with connection terminals and the like for electrically connecting the enable switch 1 to other devices. In the example shown in FIG. 1, the case 2 is a substantially rectangular parallelepiped member that is long in the X direction and short in the Y direction.
 ボタン部3は、ケース2の上側に位置する。ボタン部3は、ケース2の上面から上側に向かって突出する。図1に示す例では、ボタン部3は略直方体状の部材である。ボタン部3は、イネーブルスイッチ1の操作者により上面を下方(すなわち、(-Z)方向)に向かって押されることにより、ケース2に向かって下方に押し込まれる。 The button part 3 is located on the upper side of the case 2. The button portion 3 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the case 2 . In the example shown in FIG. 1, the button portion 3 is a substantially rectangular parallelepiped member. The button portion 3 is pushed downward toward the case 2 when the operator of the enable switch 1 pushes the upper surface downward (that is, in the (-Z) direction).
 ボタン部3は、ボタンカバー31と、ボタンケース32と、図示省略の復帰弾性部材とを備える。ボタンカバー31は、ボタン部3の外殻を構成する略直方体の箱状の部材であり、下方に向かって開口する。ボタンカバー31の天蓋部(すなわち、(+Z)側の端面部であり、以下、「上面部311」とも呼ぶ。)は、操作者がボタン部3を押し込む際に触れる部位である。 The button portion 3 includes a button cover 31, a button case 32, and a return elastic member (not shown). The button cover 31 is a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box-shaped member that constitutes the outer shell of the button portion 3 and opens downward. The canopy portion of the button cover 31 (that is, the (+Z) side end surface portion, hereinafter also referred to as “upper surface portion 311”) is a portion that the operator touches when pressing the button portion 3 .
 ボタンケース32は、ボタンカバー31の内部空間に収容される略直方体状の外形を有する部材である。ボタンケース32は、ボタンカバー31のX方向における略中央部において、ボタンカバー31の上面部311の内面(すなわち、(-Z)側の面)に下側から接触する。ボタンケース32は、ボタンカバー31の上面部311の内面に固定され、上面部311から下方へと延びる。ボタン部3の上下方向への移動の際には、ボタンケース32はボタンカバー31と共に上下方向に移動する。以下の説明では、ボタン部3を「第1可動部材」とも呼ぶ。 The button case 32 is a member that is housed in the internal space of the button cover 31 and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The button case 32 contacts the inner surface of the upper surface portion 311 of the button cover 31 (that is, the surface on the (−Z) side) from below at the substantially central portion of the button cover 31 in the X direction. The button case 32 is fixed to the inner surface of the upper surface portion 311 of the button cover 31 and extends downward from the upper surface portion 311 . When the button portion 3 moves vertically, the button case 32 moves vertically together with the button cover 31 . In the following description, the button portion 3 is also called a "first movable member".
 図4は、ボタンケース32を拡大して示す斜視図である。ボタンケース32には、Z方向に延びる中心軸J1を中心とする略円柱状の貫通孔35が設けられる。貫通孔35は、平面視において(すなわち、(+Z)側からZ方向に平行に見た状態で)略円形であり、ボタンケース32の略中央部に位置する。すなわち、ボタンケース32は、中央部に貫通孔35を有する筒状の部材である。貫通孔35の内部(すなわち、ボタンケース32の内側)には、後述する操作部材51が保持される。 4 is an enlarged perspective view of the button case 32. FIG. The button case 32 is provided with a substantially cylindrical through hole 35 centered on the central axis J1 extending in the Z direction. The through-hole 35 has a substantially circular shape in plan view (that is, when viewed parallel to the Z direction from the (+Z) side), and is positioned substantially in the center of the button case 32 . That is, the button case 32 is a cylindrical member having a through hole 35 in the center. Inside the through hole 35 (that is, inside the button case 32), an operation member 51, which will be described later, is held.
 ボタンケース32の(-X)側の側面および(+X)側の側面には、ボタンケース32の上面まで延びる溝部34がそれぞれ設けられる。換言すれば、2つの溝部34は、ボタンケース32の上面に開口している。 A groove portion 34 extending to the upper surface of the button case 32 is provided on the (-X) side surface and the (+X) side surface of the button case 32 . In other words, the two grooves 34 are open on the upper surface of the button case 32 .
 ボタンケース32の(-X)側の側面では、溝部34は、当該側面の略中央部(すなわち、Y方向およびZ方向の略中央部)から(-Y)方向かつ(+Z)方向へと延びる。換言すれば、溝部34は上下方向および水平面(すなわち、XY平面)に対して傾斜する方向に延びる。また、溝部34は、ボタンケース32の(-Y)側の側面近傍にて(+Z)方向へと折れ曲がってボタンケース32の上面へと至る。 On the (−X) side surface of the button case 32, the groove portion 34 extends in the (−Y) direction and the (+Z) direction from approximately the center portion of the side surface (that is, approximately the center portion in the Y and Z directions). . In other words, the groove 34 extends in the vertical direction and in the direction inclined with respect to the horizontal plane (that is, the XY plane). Further, the groove portion 34 is bent in the (+Z) direction near the (-Y) side surface of the button case 32 and reaches the upper surface of the button case 32 .
 当該溝部34の上端面341は、当該側面の略中央部から(-Y)方向かつ(+Z)方向へと延びる。すなわち、溝部34の上端面341は、上下方向および水平面に対して傾斜する傾斜面である。溝部34の下端面342は、当該側面の略中央部から(-Y)方向へと延び、途中で折れ曲がって(-Y)方向かつ(+Z)方向へと延びる。すなわち、溝部34の下端面342は、略水平に延びる面と、上下方向および水平面に対して傾斜する傾斜面とが連続する面である。ボタンケース32の(+X)側の側面に設けられる溝部34の形状は、(-X)側の側面に設けられる溝部34の形状と略同じである。ボタンケース32の(+X)側の側面に設けられる溝部34は、(-X)側の側面に設けられる溝部34を、中心軸J1を中心とする周方向(以下、単に「周方向」とも呼ぶ。)に180°回転させた位置に配置される。 The upper end surface 341 of the groove 34 extends in the (-Y) direction and the (+Z) direction from the approximate center of the side surface. That is, the upper end surface 341 of the groove portion 34 is an inclined surface that is inclined with respect to the vertical direction and the horizontal plane. A lower end surface 342 of the groove portion 34 extends in the (-Y) direction from approximately the center of the side surface, bends in the middle, and extends in the (-Y) direction and the (+Z) direction. That is, the lower end surface 342 of the groove portion 34 is a surface in which a surface extending substantially horizontally and an inclined surface inclined with respect to the vertical direction and the horizontal surface are continuous. The shape of the groove portion 34 provided on the (+X) side surface of the button case 32 is substantially the same as the shape of the groove portion 34 provided on the (−X) side surface. The grooves 34 provided on the (+X) side surface of the button case 32 extend in the circumferential direction centered on the central axis J1 (hereinafter also simply referred to as the “circumferential direction”). ) is rotated 180°.
 図示省略の復帰弾性部材は、上下方向に弾性的に圧縮可能な部材であり、例えば、図1および図3に示すボタンカバー31のX方向の両端部において、ボタンカバー31とケース2との間に配置される。復帰弾性部材は、例えば、上下方向に略平行に延びる弦巻バネである。イネーブルスイッチ1では、操作者によりボタン部3が下方へと押し込まれ、ボタンカバー31およびボタンケース32が初期位置から下方へと移動することにより、復帰弾性部材が上下方向に弾性的に圧縮される。そして、操作者によるボタン部3の押圧が解除されると、復帰弾性部材の復元力により、ボタンカバー31およびボタンケース32が上方へと押し上げられて初期位置へと戻る。なお、復帰弾性部材の配置、形状および構造は様々に変更されてよい。また、復帰弾性部材は、弦巻バネ以外の弾性部材(例えば、板バネ等)であってもよい。 A return elastic member (not shown) is a member that can be elastically compressed in the vertical direction. placed in The return elastic member is, for example, a helical spring extending substantially parallel to the vertical direction. In the enable switch 1, the button portion 3 is pushed downward by the operator, and the button cover 31 and the button case 32 move downward from their initial positions, thereby elastically compressing the return elastic member in the vertical direction. . When the operator releases the button portion 3 from pressing, the restoring force of the restoring elastic member pushes the button cover 31 and the button case 32 upward to return to their initial positions. The arrangement, shape and structure of the return elastic member may be changed in various ways. Also, the return elastic member may be an elastic member (for example, a plate spring or the like) other than the coiled spring.
 イネーブルスイッチ1は、2つの接点4を備える。2つの接点4は、ボタンケース32および操作部材51の(+X)側および(-X)側に配置される。換言すれば、2つの接点4のうち一の接点4は、X方向において、ボタンケース32および操作部材51の一方側に位置し、他の接点4は、X方向において、ボタンケース32および操作部材51を挟んで当該一の接点4の反対側に配置される。 The enable switch 1 has two contacts 4 . The two contacts 4 are arranged on the (+X) side and the (−X) side of the button case 32 and the operating member 51 . In other words, one of the two contacts 4 is located on one side of the button case 32 and the operation member 51 in the X direction, and the other contact 4 is located on the button case 32 and the operation member 51 in the X direction. 51 is placed on the opposite side of the one contact 4 .
 (-X)側の接点4は、2つの固定接点41と、1つの移動接点42と、接点移動機構43とを備える。2つの固定接点41は、上下方向に並んで配置される。移動接点42は、2つの固定接点41の間に配置され、2つの固定接点41と上下方向に対向する。接点移動機構43は、移動接点42を上下方向に移動させる。接点移動機構43は、移動接点42を保持するレバー、当該レバーを回転可能に支持する回転軸、レバーに接続されるバネ等を備える公知の機構である。接点移動機構43の構造は様々に変更されてよい。また、2つの固定接点41は、必ずしも上下方向に並ぶ必要はなく、2つの固定接点41および1つの移動接点42の配置は様々に変更されてよい。さらには、接点4の構造は、必ずしも2つの固定接点41および1つの移動接点42を有するものである必要はなく、様々に変更されてよい。 The (−X) side contact 4 includes two fixed contacts 41 , one moving contact 42 , and a contact moving mechanism 43 . The two fixed contacts 41 are arranged side by side in the vertical direction. The moving contact 42 is arranged between the two fixed contacts 41 and vertically faces the two fixed contacts 41 . The contact moving mechanism 43 moves the moving contact 42 vertically. The contact moving mechanism 43 is a known mechanism including a lever that holds the moving contact 42, a rotating shaft that rotatably supports the lever, a spring that is connected to the lever, and the like. The structure of the contact moving mechanism 43 may be changed variously. Also, the two fixed contacts 41 do not necessarily have to be arranged in the vertical direction, and the arrangement of the two fixed contacts 41 and the one moving contact 42 may be changed in various ways. Furthermore, the structure of the contact 4 does not necessarily have two fixed contacts 41 and one moving contact 42, and may be modified in various ways.
 本実施の形態では、図3に示すように、移動接点42が上側の固定接点41と接触している状態が、接点4が「開」の状態(すなわち、OFF状態)である。また、移動接点42が下側の固定接点41と接触している状態が、接点4が「閉」の状態(すなわち、ON状態)である。なお、イネーブルスイッチ1では、移動接点42が上側の固定接点41と接触している状態が、接点4が「閉」の状態であり、移動接点42が下側の固定接点41と接触している状態が、接点4が「開」の状態であってもよい。(+X)側の接点4の構造は、(-X)側の接点4の構造と略同じである。(+X)側の接点4は、(-X)側の接点4を、中心軸J1を中心とする周方向に180°回転させた位置に配置される。 In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, the state in which the moving contact 42 is in contact with the upper fixed contact 41 is the "open" state (that is, the OFF state) of the contact 4. A state in which the moving contact 42 is in contact with the lower fixed contact 41 is a state in which the contact 4 is "closed" (that is, in an ON state). In the enable switch 1, the contact 4 is closed when the moving contact 42 is in contact with the fixed contact 41 on the upper side, and the moving contact 42 is in contact with the fixed contact 41 on the lower side. The state may be that the contact 4 is "open". The structure of the contact 4 on the (+X) side is substantially the same as the structure of the contact 4 on the (-X) side. The (+X) side contact 4 is arranged at a position obtained by rotating the (−X) side contact 4 by 180° in the circumferential direction around the central axis J1.
 接点機構5は、ボタン部3がケース2に向かって押し込まれるに従って、接点4の状態を「開」から「閉」に移行し、さらに「閉」から「開」に移行させる。なお、上述のように、接点4の開閉状態(すなわち、ON-OFF状態)は逆であってもよい。すなわち、接点機構5は、ボタン部3がケース2に向かって押し込まれるに従って、接点4の状態を「開」および「閉」の一方から他方に移行し、さらに当該他方から当該一方に移行させる。 The contact mechanism 5 shifts the state of the contact 4 from "open" to "closed" and then from "closed" to "open" as the button portion 3 is pushed toward the case 2. Incidentally, as described above, the open/closed state (that is, the ON-OFF state) of the contact 4 may be reversed. That is, as the button portion 3 is pushed toward the case 2, the contact mechanism 5 shifts the state of the contact 4 from one of "open" and "closed" to the other, and further shifts from the other to the one.
 接点機構5は、上述の操作部材51と、2つのスイッチ部材52と、操作弾性部材53とを備える。操作部材51は、ボタン部3のボタンケース32により、ボタンケース32に対して相対移動可能に保持される。具体的には、操作部材51は、ボタンケース32の貫通孔35(図4参照)の内部に配置され、中心軸J1を中心とする周方向に回転可能な状態でボタンケース32により保持される。なお、ボタンケース32は周方向には回転しない。操作部材51は、第1可動部材であるボタン部3により保持される「第2可動部材」である。また、ボタンケース32は、第2可動部材を保持する第2可動部材保持部である。 The contact mechanism 5 includes the operation member 51 described above, two switch members 52, and an operation elastic member 53. The operation member 51 is held by the button case 32 of the button portion 3 so as to be relatively movable with respect to the button case 32 . Specifically, the operation member 51 is arranged inside the through hole 35 (see FIG. 4) of the button case 32, and held by the button case 32 so as to be rotatable in the circumferential direction about the central axis J1. . Note that the button case 32 does not rotate in the circumferential direction. The operating member 51 is a "second movable member" held by the button portion 3, which is the first movable member. Further, the button case 32 is a second movable member holding portion that holds the second movable member.
 図5は、操作部材51を拡大して示す斜視図である。操作部材51は、中心軸J1を中心として上下方向に延びる略筒状の部材である。操作部材51は、操作部材本体511と、2つの操作部材突出部512とを備える。操作部材本体511は、上下方向に延びる略筒状の部材である。図3および図5に示す例では、操作部材本体511は、中心軸J1を中心とする有底略円筒状の部材である。操作部材本体511の下端面513は、中央部が下方に凸となるように湾曲する凸面(例えば、球面の一部)である。 FIG. 5 is an enlarged perspective view of the operating member 51. FIG. The operation member 51 is a substantially cylindrical member that extends vertically around the central axis J1. The operating member 51 includes an operating member main body 511 and two operating member projecting portions 512 . The operation member main body 511 is a substantially cylindrical member that extends vertically. In the example shown in FIGS. 3 and 5, the operation member main body 511 is a substantially cylindrical member with a bottom centered on the central axis J1. A lower end surface 513 of the operation member main body 511 is a convex surface (for example, a portion of a spherical surface) curved so that the central portion is convex downward.
 2つの操作部材突出部512は、操作部材本体511の外側面の上端部から側方に突出する部位である。各操作部材突出部512は、例えば、中心軸J1を中心とする径方向(以下、単に「径方向」とも呼ぶ。)に延びる略直方体状である。図2に示す状態では、2つの操作部材突出部512は、中心軸J1の(+X)側および(-X)側に位置する。換言すれば、2つの操作部材突出部512のうち一の操作部材突出部512は、X方向において、中心軸J1の一方側に位置し、他の操作部材突出部512は、X方向において、中心軸J1を挟んで当該一の操作部材突出部512の反対側に位置する。2つの操作部材突出部512の形状は略同じであり、一方の操作部材突出部512は、他方の操作部材突出部512を周方向に180°回転させた位置に配置される。 The two operating member protrusions 512 are portions that protrude sideways from the upper end of the outer surface of the operating member main body 511 . Each operation member projecting portion 512 has, for example, a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape extending in a radial direction centered on the central axis J1 (hereinafter also simply referred to as “radial direction”). In the state shown in FIG. 2, the two operating member projecting portions 512 are positioned on the (+X) side and the (−X) side of the central axis J1. In other words, one operating member projecting portion 512 of the two operating member projecting portions 512 is located on one side of the central axis J1 in the X direction, and the other operating member projecting portion 512 is located at the center in the X direction. It is located on the opposite side of the one operating member projecting portion 512 across the axis J1. The two operating member projecting portions 512 have substantially the same shape, and one operating member projecting portion 512 is arranged at a position obtained by rotating the other operating member projecting portion 512 by 180° in the circumferential direction.
 図1ないし図3に示すように、操作部材本体511は、ボタンケース32の貫通孔35(図4参照)内に位置し、2つの操作部材突出部512は、ボタンケース32の2つの溝部34(図4参照)内にそれぞれ位置する。操作部材突出部512は、ボタンケース32の貫通孔35内から、溝部34にてボタンケース32の側壁を貫通して、ボタンケース32の外部へと延びる。上述のように、操作部材51は、中心軸J1を中心として回転可能にボタンケース32により保持されており、操作部材51が回転する際には、操作部材突出部512は溝部34内を移動する。上述のように、操作部材51を「第2可動部材」と呼ぶと、操作部材本体511および操作部材突出部512はそれぞれ、「第2可動部材本体」および「第2可動部材突出部」である。 As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the operating member main body 511 is positioned within the through hole 35 (see FIG. 4) of the button case 32, and the two operating member projecting portions 512 extend into the two groove portions 34 of the button case 32. (see FIG. 4), respectively. The operation member projecting portion 512 extends from the through hole 35 of the button case 32 through the side wall of the button case 32 at the groove portion 34 to the outside of the button case 32 . As described above, the operating member 51 is held by the button case 32 so as to be rotatable about the central axis J1, and when the operating member 51 rotates, the operating member projecting portion 512 moves within the groove portion 34. . As described above, when the operation member 51 is called the "second movable member", the operation member main body 511 and the operation member protrusion 512 are respectively the "second movable member main body" and the "second movable member protrusion". .
 ボタンケース32の溝部34の上端面341(図4参照)は、操作部材突出部512に上側から接触する上カム部である。操作部材51の下方への移動が制限されている状態で、溝部34の上端面341が操作部材突出部512に直接的に接触して下向きに押すと、操作部材突出部512に周方向の力が働き、操作部材51が図2中の反時計回り方向に回転する。ボタンケース32の溝部34の下端面342のうち上記傾斜面は、操作部材突出部512に下側から接触する下カム部である。操作部材51の上方への移動が制限されている状態で、溝部34の下端面342の当該傾斜面が操作部材突出部512に直接的に接触して上向きに押すと、操作部材突出部512に周方向の力が働き、操作部材51が図2中の時計回り方向に回転する。 An upper end surface 341 (see FIG. 4) of the groove 34 of the button case 32 is an upper cam portion that contacts the operating member projecting portion 512 from above. When the upper end face 341 of the groove portion 34 directly contacts the operating member projecting portion 512 and pushes it downward while the downward movement of the operating member 51 is restricted, a circumferential force is applied to the operating member projecting portion 512 . , and the operating member 51 rotates counterclockwise in FIG. The inclined surface of the lower end surface 342 of the groove portion 34 of the button case 32 is a lower cam portion that contacts the operating member projecting portion 512 from below. When the inclined surface of the lower end surface 342 of the groove portion 34 directly contacts the operating member protruding portion 512 and pushes it upward while the upward movement of the operating member 51 is restricted, the operating member protruding portion 512 is pushed upward. A circumferential force acts to rotate the operating member 51 clockwise in FIG.
 操作弾性部材53は、ボタンケース32の貫通孔35の内側において、操作部材51の内部(すなわち、操作部材本体511の内部)に配置される。図1および図3に示す状態では、操作弾性部材53は、有底略円筒状の操作部材本体511の内部空間に上方から挿入され、操作弾性部材53の上部は操作部材本体511の上端から上方へと突出している。操作弾性部材53は、上下方向に弾性的に圧縮可能な部材である。操作弾性部材53は、例えば、中心軸J1を略中心として上下方向に略平行に延びる弦巻バネである。図1および図3では、便宜上、操作弾性部材53を略円筒状に描いている。他の図においても同様である。 The operation elastic member 53 is arranged inside the operation member 51 (that is, inside the operation member main body 511) inside the through hole 35 of the button case 32. In the state shown in FIGS. 1 and 3, the operating elastic member 53 is inserted from above into the internal space of the bottomed substantially cylindrical operating member main body 511, and the upper portion of the operating elastic member 53 extends upward from the upper end of the operating member main body 511. protruding to. The operation elastic member 53 is a member that can be elastically compressed in the vertical direction. The operation elastic member 53 is, for example, a spiral spring that extends substantially parallel in the vertical direction about the central axis J1. 1 and 3, the operation elastic member 53 is drawn in a substantially cylindrical shape for the sake of convenience. The same applies to other drawings.
 操作弾性部材53の下端は、操作部材本体511の底部に接触する。操作弾性部材53は、操作部材51により下側から保持される。操作弾性部材53の上端は、ボタンカバー31の上面部311の内面に接触する。すなわち、操作弾性部材53は、ボタン部3と操作部材51との間に配置される。また、操作部材51は、操作弾性部材53を下側から保持する弾性部材ホルダである。操作弾性部材53は、ボタン部3が操作弾性部材53に対して相対的に下方に移動することにより、操作部材51の内側において上下方向に圧縮される。なお、操作弾性部材53の形状および構造は様々に変更されてよい。例えば、操作弾性部材53は、弦巻バネ以外の弾性部材であってもよい。また、操作部材51は、内部に操作弾性部材53を収容する必要が無い場合、例えば、中心軸J1を中心とする柱状の部材であってもよい。 The lower end of the operating elastic member 53 contacts the bottom of the operating member main body 511 . The operating elastic member 53 is held from below by the operating member 51 . The upper end of the operating elastic member 53 contacts the inner surface of the upper surface portion 311 of the button cover 31 . That is, the operation elastic member 53 is arranged between the button portion 3 and the operation member 51 . Further, the operating member 51 is an elastic member holder that holds the operating elastic member 53 from below. The operating elastic member 53 is vertically compressed inside the operating member 51 by the downward movement of the button portion 3 relative to the operating elastic member 53 . Note that the shape and structure of the operation elastic member 53 may be changed in various ways. For example, the operation elastic member 53 may be an elastic member other than the coiled spring. Further, if the operation member 51 does not need to accommodate the operation elastic member 53 inside, the operation member 51 may be, for example, a columnar member centered on the central axis J1.
 2つのスイッチ部材52は、ケース2により保持される。2つのスイッチ部材52は、ボタンケース32および操作部材51の(+X)側および(-X)側に配置される。換言すれば、2つのスイッチ部材52のうち一のスイッチ部材52は、X方向において、ボタンケース32および操作部材51の一方側に位置し、他のスイッチ部材52は、X方向において、ボタンケース32および操作部材51を挟んで当該一のスイッチ部材52の反対側に配置される。2つのスイッチ部材52の形状は略同じであり、一方のスイッチ部材52は、他方のスイッチ部材52を周方向に180°回転させた位置に配置される。 The two switch members 52 are held by the case 2. The two switch members 52 are arranged on the (+X) side and the (−X) side of the button case 32 and the operation member 51 . In other words, one switch member 52 of the two switch members 52 is located on one side of the button case 32 and the operation member 51 in the X direction, and the other switch member 52 is located on the button case 32 in the X direction. and the operation member 51 on the opposite side of the one switch member 52 . The two switch members 52 have substantially the same shape, and one switch member 52 is arranged at a position obtained by rotating the other switch member 52 by 180° in the circumferential direction.
 図2に示す例では、スイッチ部材52は、平面視において略矩形状の単一の部材である。図1ないし図3に示す状態では、2つのスイッチ部材52はそれぞれ、2つの操作部材突出部512の下方に位置し、2つの操作部材突出部512の下端面に直接的に接触する。あるいは、スイッチ部材52は、操作部材突出部512の下端面との間に僅かな間隙をあけて、当該下端面に近接する。 In the example shown in FIG. 2, the switch member 52 is a substantially rectangular single member in plan view. In the state shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the two switch members 52 are positioned below the two operating member projecting portions 512 and directly contact the lower end surfaces of the two operating member projecting portions 512 . Alternatively, the switch member 52 is close to the lower end surface of the operating member projecting portion 512 with a small gap therebetween.
 操作部材突出部512がスイッチ部材52に上側から直接的に接触した状態で操作部材51が下方へと移動すると、スイッチ部材52は、操作部材突出部512により初期位置から押し下げられる。換言すれば、スイッチ部材52は、操作部材突出部512の移動に伴って下方へと変位する。スイッチ部材52が図3に示す初期位置から下方へと変位すると、接点移動機構43の上記レバーの端部がスイッチ部材52によって押し下げられ、当該レバーが回転することにより移動接点42が下方へと移動して下側の固定接点41に接触する。これにより、接点4の状態が「開」から「閉」に移行し、イネーブルスイッチ1がON状態となる。 When the operating member 51 moves downward while the operating member protrusion 512 is in direct contact with the switch member 52 from above, the switch member 52 is pushed down from the initial position by the operating member protrusion 512 . In other words, the switch member 52 is displaced downward along with the movement of the operating member projecting portion 512 . When the switch member 52 is displaced downward from the initial position shown in FIG. 3, the end of the lever of the contact moving mechanism 43 is pushed down by the switch member 52, and the lever is rotated to move the movable contact 42 downward. and contact the fixed contact 41 on the lower side. As a result, the state of the contact 4 is changed from "open" to "closed", and the enable switch 1 is turned on.
 接点4の状態が「閉」のとき、接点移動機構43において上記バネが伸張状態となっている。このため、操作部材突出部512がスイッチ部材52の上方から退避し、スイッチ部材52を押し下げる力が除去されると、当該バネの復元力により、上記レバーが回転して移動接点42が上方へと移動する。移動接点42は上側の固定接点41と接触し、接点4の状態が「閉」から「開」に移行し、イネーブルスイッチ1がOFF状態となる。また、回転する当該レバーによりスイッチ部材52が押し上げられ、図3に示す初期位置へと戻る。 When the contact 4 is in the "closed" state, the spring in the contact moving mechanism 43 is in an expanded state. Therefore, when the operating member projecting portion 512 retreats from above the switch member 52 and the force pushing down the switch member 52 is removed, the restoring force of the spring rotates the lever and moves the moving contact 42 upward. Moving. The moving contact 42 comes into contact with the fixed contact 41 on the upper side, the state of the contact 4 shifts from "closed" to "open", and the enable switch 1 is turned off. Also, the switch member 52 is pushed up by the rotating lever and returns to the initial position shown in FIG.
 このように、イネーブルスイッチ1では、スイッチ部材52が変位することにより、接点4の状態が「開」と「閉」との間で変更される。また、イネーブルスイッチ1では、2つのスイッチ部材52に対して、操作部材51の2つの操作部材突出部512から付与される力が略同時に変化する。これにより、2つのスイッチ部材52は互いに同期して変位し、2つの接点4の状態を略同時に変更する。このため、2つの接点4の状態は、互いに同期して移行される。 Thus, in the enable switch 1, the state of the contact 4 is changed between "open" and "closed" by displacing the switch member 52. Further, in the enable switch 1, the forces applied to the two switch members 52 from the two operating member projecting portions 512 of the operating member 51 change substantially simultaneously. As a result, the two switch members 52 are displaced in synchronization with each other, and the states of the two contacts 4 are changed substantially simultaneously. Therefore, the states of the two contacts 4 are transferred synchronously with each other.
 図2および図3に示す例では、各スイッチ部材52の近傍において、ケース2に仮止め部61が設けられる。仮止め部61は、例えば、上下方向に延びる柱状の部位である。仮止め部61は、ケース2の一部であってもよく、ケース2に取り付けられる別部材であってもよい。図2および図3に示す状態では、仮止め部61は、操作部材突出部512よりも下側に位置し、操作部材突出部512から下方に離間している。仮止め部61は、操作部材突出部512と平面視において(すなわち、上下方向に)重なる。仮止め部61は、平面視において操作部材突出部512と部分的に重なっていてもよく、全体的に重なっていてもよい。操作部材51が図3に示す位置から下方へと移動すると、操作部材突出部512が仮止め部61に上側から接触することにより、操作部材51の下方への移動が制限される。 In the example shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the case 2 is provided with temporary fixing portions 61 in the vicinity of each switch member 52 . The temporary fixing portion 61 is, for example, a columnar portion extending in the vertical direction. The temporary fixing portion 61 may be a part of the case 2 or may be a separate member attached to the case 2 . In the state shown in FIGS. 2 and 3 , the temporary fixing portion 61 is positioned below the operating member projecting portion 512 and spaced downward from the operating member projecting portion 512 . The temporary fixing portion 61 overlaps the operation member projecting portion 512 in plan view (that is, in the vertical direction). The temporary fixing portion 61 may partially overlap the operation member protruding portion 512 in a plan view, or may overlap the operation member projecting portion 512 entirely. When the operating member 51 moves downward from the position shown in FIG. 3, the operating member projecting portion 512 comes into contact with the temporary fixing portion 61 from above, thereby restricting the downward movement of the operating member 51 .
 次に、図6A~図16Aおよび図6B~図16Bを参照しつつ、イネーブルスイッチ1が使用される際の各構成の動作について詳細に説明する。図6A~図16Aは、イネーブルスイッチ1の(-X)側の部位を示す平面図である。図6A~図16Aでは、図2と同様に、ボタンカバー31の図示を省略している。図6B~図16Bは、イネーブルスイッチ1の(-X)側の部位を示す縦断面図である。イネーブルスイッチ1の(+X)側の部位における各構成の動作は、以下で説明する(-X)側の部位の各構成の動作と同じである。 Next, the operation of each configuration when the enable switch 1 is used will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 6A to 16A and 6B to 16B. 6A to 16A are plan views showing the (-X) side portion of the enable switch 1. FIG. 6A to 16A, similarly to FIG. 2, the illustration of the button cover 31 is omitted. 6B to 16B are longitudinal sectional views showing the (-X) side portion of the enable switch 1. FIG. The operation of each component in the (+X) side portion of the enable switch 1 is the same as the operation of each component in the (-X) side portion described below.
 図6A~図14Aおよび図6B~図14Bでは、第1可動部材であるボタン部3が、図示省略の操作者によりケース2に向けて押し下げられる様子を示す。また、図14A~図16Aおよび図14B~図16Bでは、操作者がボタン部3から手を離し、ボタン部3が押し込まれた位置から元の位置へと戻る様子を示す。 6A to 14A and 6B to 14B show how the button portion 3, which is the first movable member, is pushed down toward the case 2 by an operator (not shown). 14A to 16A and 14B to 16B show how the operator releases the button portion 3 and the button portion 3 returns from the pushed position to the original position.
 以下の説明では、図6Aおよび図6Bに示すように、ボタン部3が押し込まれていない状態におけるボタン部3の位置(すなわち、ケース2に対するボタン部3の相対的な位置)を「第1ポジション」と呼ぶ。また、図14Aおよび図14Bに示すように、ボタン部3が最も下側に押し込まれた状態におけるボタン部3の位置を「第3ポジション」と呼ぶ。さらに、図11Aおよび図11Bに示すボタン部3の位置を「第2ポジション」と呼ぶ。第2ポジションは、第1ポジションと第3ポジションとの間におけるボタン部3の所定の位置である。 In the following description, as shown in FIGS. 6A and 6B, the position of the button portion 3 in a state in which the button portion 3 is not pushed (that is, the relative position of the button portion 3 with respect to the case 2) is referred to as the "first position." ”. Further, as shown in FIGS. 14A and 14B, the position of the button portion 3 in the state where the button portion 3 is pushed to the bottom is called the "third position". Further, the position of the button portion 3 shown in FIGS. 11A and 11B is called "second position". The second position is a predetermined position of the button portion 3 between the first position and the third position.
 ボタン部3が第2ポジションに位置している状態では、操作部材51の下端がケース2の内底面21に接触しており、ボタンケース32は、ケース2の内底面21から上方に離間している。ボタン部3が第3ポジションに位置している状態では、操作部材51の下端およびボタンケース32の下端がケース2の内底面21に接触している。なお、ボタン部3が第1ポジションに位置している状態では、操作部材51およびボタンケース32は、ケース2の内底面21から上方に離間している。 When the button portion 3 is positioned at the second position, the lower end of the operation member 51 is in contact with the inner bottom surface 21 of the case 2 , and the button case 32 is spaced upward from the inner bottom surface 21 of the case 2 . there is The lower end of the operating member 51 and the lower end of the button case 32 are in contact with the inner bottom surface 21 of the case 2 when the button portion 3 is positioned at the third position. It should be noted that the operation member 51 and the button case 32 are separated upward from the inner bottom surface 21 of the case 2 when the button portion 3 is positioned at the first position.
 本実施の形態では、イネーブルスイッチ1においてボタン部3が押し込まれる際に、第1ポジションと第2ポジションとの間にて、接点4の状態が「開」から「閉」に移行し、第2ポジションと第3ポジションとの間にて、接点4の状態が「閉」から「開」に移行する。そして、ボタン部3が第3ポジションから第1ポジションへと戻る際には、接点4の状態は「開」のままで維持される。 In this embodiment, when the button portion 3 of the enable switch 1 is pushed, the state of the contact 4 shifts from "open" to "closed" between the first position and the second position. The state of the contact 4 changes from "closed" to "open" between the position and the third position. Then, when the button portion 3 returns from the third position to the first position, the state of the contact 4 remains "open".
 イネーブルスイッチ1では、ボタン部3が、図6Aおよび図6Bに示す第1ポジションから下方へと押し込まれると、図7Aおよび図7Bに示すように、操作部材51がボタンケース32と共に下方へと移動する。このとき、操作部材51は回転せず、ボタンケース32に対する操作部材51の相対位置は、図6Aおよび図6Bに示すものから変化していない。また、操作部材突出部512はスイッチ部材52と上下方向に重なっているため、スイッチ部材52は操作部材51と共に下方へと移動する。図7Aおよび図7Bに示す状態では、図6Aおよび図6Bと同様に、接点4の状態は「開」である。図7Aおよび図7Bに示す状態では、操作部材突出部512が仮止め部61の上端に接触する。これにより、操作部材51がケース2に仮止めされ(すなわち、一旦係止され)、下方への移動が制限される。 In the enable switch 1, when the button portion 3 is pushed downward from the first position shown in FIGS. 6A and 6B, the operation member 51 moves downward together with the button case 32 as shown in FIGS. 7A and 7B. do. At this time, the operating member 51 does not rotate, and the relative position of the operating member 51 with respect to the button case 32 remains unchanged from that shown in FIGS. 6A and 6B. Further, since the operating member projecting portion 512 vertically overlaps the switch member 52 , the switch member 52 moves downward together with the operating member 51 . In the state shown in FIGS. 7A and 7B, the state of contact 4 is "open", as in FIGS. 6A and 6B. In the state shown in FIGS. 7A and 7B , the operating member projecting portion 512 contacts the upper end of the temporary fixing portion 61 . As a result, the operating member 51 is temporarily fixed (that is, temporarily locked) to the case 2, and its downward movement is restricted.
 ボタン部3がさらに下方へと押し込まれると、図8Aおよび図8Bに示すように、操作部材51は仮止め部61により下方への移動が制限されているため上下方向には移動せず、ボタンカバー31およびボタンケース32が下方へと移動する。すなわち、ボタン部3が操作部材51に対して相対的に下方へと移動する。これにより、ボタン部3と操作部材51との間に位置する操作弾性部材53が上下方向に圧縮される。また、ボタンケース32の溝部34の上端面341(すなわち、上カム部)が、操作部材51の操作部材突出部512に上側から接触する。このとき、操作部材51は回転しない。また、操作部材51が上下方向に移動しないため、スイッチ部材52も上下方向に移動しない。図8Aおよび図8Bに示す状態では、接点4の状態は「開」のままである。 When the button portion 3 is further pushed downward, as shown in FIGS. 8A and 8B, the operation member 51 does not move vertically because its downward movement is restricted by the temporary fixing portion 61, and the button is pressed. Cover 31 and button case 32 move downward. That is, the button portion 3 moves downward relative to the operation member 51 . As a result, the operating elastic member 53 positioned between the button portion 3 and the operating member 51 is vertically compressed. Further, the upper end surface 341 (that is, the upper cam portion) of the groove portion 34 of the button case 32 contacts the operating member projecting portion 512 of the operating member 51 from above. At this time, the operating member 51 does not rotate. Further, since the operating member 51 does not move vertically, the switch member 52 does not move vertically either. In the state shown in FIGS. 8A and 8B, the state of contact 4 remains "open".
 ボタン部3がさらに下方へと押し込まれると、操作部材51は仮止め部61により下方への移動が制限されているため上下方向には移動せず、ボタンカバー31およびボタンケース32がさらに下方へと移動する。すなわち、ボタン部3が操作部材51に対して相対的にさらに下方へと移動する。これにより、図9Bに示すように、操作弾性部材53が上下方向にさらに圧縮される。 When the button portion 3 is pushed further downward, the operation member 51 does not move vertically because its downward movement is restricted by the temporary fixing portion 61, and the button cover 31 and the button case 32 move further downward. and move. That is, the button portion 3 moves further downward relative to the operation member 51 . Thereby, as shown in FIG. 9B, the operating elastic member 53 is further compressed in the vertical direction.
 また、ボタン部3の操作部材51に対する下方への相対移動により、操作部材突出部512に上側から接触する溝部34の上端面341から、操作部材突出部512に対して周方向の力が働き、操作部材51が、ボタン部3の下降に伴って図8Aに示す位置から図9Aに示す位置へと反時計回りに回転する。これにより、操作部材突出部512が仮止め部61から(-Y)側へとずれ(すなわち、操作部材突出部512と仮止め部61との上下方向における重複が解消され)、仮止め部61による操作部材51の仮止めが解除される。 In addition, due to the downward relative movement of the button portion 3 with respect to the operating member 51, a circumferential force acts on the operating member projecting portion 512 from the upper end surface 341 of the groove portion 34 that contacts the operating member projecting portion 512 from above. As the button portion 3 descends, the operating member 51 rotates counterclockwise from the position shown in FIG. 8A to the position shown in FIG. 9A. As a result, the operating member projecting portion 512 is displaced from the temporary fixing portion 61 toward the (−Y) side (that is, the vertical overlap between the operating member projecting portion 512 and the temporary fixing portion 61 is eliminated), and the temporary fixing portion 61 The temporary fixing of the operation member 51 by is released.
 操作部材51の仮止めが解除されると、操作部材51の内部において上下方向に圧縮されている操作弾性部材53の復元力により、操作部材51が、図9Bに示す位置から図10Bに示す位置へと一気に下方に移動する。また、図10Aに示すように、操作部材突出部512はスイッチ部材52と上下方向に重なっており、スイッチ部材52に上側から接触しているため、操作部材突出部512からスイッチ部材52に下向きの力が付与され、スイッチ部材52が操作部材51と共に一気に下方へと移動する。そして、操作部材突出部512により押し下げられたスイッチ部材52により接点移動機構43が操作され、移動接点42が下方へと移動して下側の固定接点41に接触する。すなわち、スイッチ部材52の当該下向きの変位により、接点4の状態が「開」から「閉」へと移行する。 When the temporary fixing of the operating member 51 is released, the operating member 51 moves from the position shown in FIG. 9B to the position shown in FIG. move downwards at once. Further, as shown in FIG. 10A , the operation member projecting portion 512 overlaps the switch member 52 in the vertical direction and is in contact with the switch member 52 from above. A force is applied, and the switch member 52 moves downward together with the operation member 51 at once. Then, the contact moving mechanism 43 is operated by the switch member 52 pushed down by the operating member projecting portion 512 , and the moving contact 42 moves downward to contact the lower fixed contact 41 . That is, the downward displacement of the switch member 52 changes the state of the contact 4 from "open" to "close."
 イネーブルスイッチ1では、上述のように、操作部材51の図9Bに示す位置から図10Bに示す位置への下降が極短時間で行われ、操作部材51の(-X)側のスイッチ部材52の下降、および、操作部材51の(+X)側のスイッチ部材52の下降も極短時間で行われる。したがって、操作部材51の(-X)側に位置する接点4の「開」から「閉」への状態移行のタイミングと、操作部材51の(+X)側に位置する接点4の「開」から「閉」への状態移行のタイミングとがずれることを抑制することができる。換言すれば、2つの接点4の状態移行を略同時に行うことができる。なお、図9Aおよび図10Aに示すように、操作部材51が図9Bに示す位置から図10Bに示す位置まで下降する際に、操作部材51は周方向に回転しない。 In the enable switch 1, as described above, the operation member 51 is lowered from the position shown in FIG. 9B to the position shown in FIG. Lowering and lowering of the switch member 52 on the (+X) side of the operating member 51 are also performed in an extremely short time. Therefore, the timing of the state transition from "open" to "closed" of the contact 4 located on the (-X) side of the operating member 51 and the timing from "open" of the contact 4 located on the (+X) side of the operating member 51 It is possible to suppress deviation from the timing of state transition to "closed". In other words, the state transitions of the two contacts 4 can be performed substantially simultaneously. As shown in FIGS. 9A and 10A, the operating member 51 does not rotate in the circumferential direction when the operating member 51 descends from the position shown in FIG. 9B to the position shown in FIG. 10B.
 ボタン部3がさらに下方へと押し込まれると、図11Aおよび図11Bに示すように、操作部材51がボタンケース32と共に下方へと移動する。このとき、操作部材51は回転せず、ボタンケース32に対する操作部材51の相対位置は、図10Aおよび図10Bに示すものから変化していない。また、操作部材突出部512はスイッチ部材52と上下方向に重なっているため、スイッチ部材52は操作部材51と共に下方へと移動する。図11Aおよび図11Bに示す状態では、図10Aおよび図10Bと同様に、接点4の状態は「閉」である。図11Aおよび図11Bに示す状態では、操作部材51の操作部材本体511の下端面513が、ケース2の内底面21に接触する。これにより、操作部材51の下方への移動が制限される。上述のように、図11Aおよび図11Bに示すボタン部3の位置は、第2ポジションである。 When the button portion 3 is further pushed downward, the operating member 51 moves downward together with the button case 32 as shown in FIGS. 11A and 11B. At this time, the operating member 51 does not rotate, and the relative position of the operating member 51 with respect to the button case 32 remains unchanged from that shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B. Further, since the operating member projecting portion 512 vertically overlaps the switch member 52 , the switch member 52 moves downward together with the operating member 51 . In the state shown in FIGS. 11A and 11B, the state of the contact 4 is "closed" as in FIGS. 10A and 10B. 11A and 11B, the lower end surface 513 of the operation member main body 511 of the operation member 51 contacts the inner bottom surface 21 of the case 2. As shown in FIG. This restricts the downward movement of the operating member 51 . As described above, the position of the button portion 3 shown in FIGS. 11A and 11B is the second position.
 ボタン部3がさらに下方へと押し込まれると、図12Aおよび図12Bに示すように、操作部材51はケース2の内底面21により下方への移動が制限されているため上下方向には移動せず、ボタンカバー31およびボタンケース32がさらに下方へと移動する。すなわち、ボタン部3が操作部材51に対して相対的にさらに下方へと移動する。これにより、操作弾性部材53が上下方向にさらに圧縮される。 When the button portion 3 is pushed further downward, as shown in FIGS. 12A and 12B, the downward movement of the operating member 51 is restricted by the inner bottom surface 21 of the case 2, so that it does not move vertically. , the button cover 31 and the button case 32 move further downward. That is, the button portion 3 moves further downward relative to the operation member 51 . As a result, the operating elastic member 53 is further compressed in the vertical direction.
 また、ボタン部3の操作部材51に対する下方への相対移動により、操作部材突出部512に上側から接触する溝部34の上端面341から、操作部材突出部512に対して周方向の力が働き、操作部材51が、ボタン部3の下降に伴って図11Aに示す位置から図12Aに示す位置へと反時計回りに回転する。これにより、操作部材突出部512がスイッチ部材52と上下方向に重なる位置から(-Y)側へとずれる。換言すれば、操作部材突出部512がスイッチ部材52の上方から側方へと退避し、操作部材突出部512とスイッチ部材52との上下方向における重複が解消される。 In addition, due to the downward relative movement of the button portion 3 with respect to the operating member 51, a circumferential force acts on the operating member projecting portion 512 from the upper end surface 341 of the groove portion 34 that contacts the operating member projecting portion 512 from above. As the button portion 3 is lowered, the operation member 51 rotates counterclockwise from the position shown in FIG. 11A to the position shown in FIG. 12A. As a result, the operating member projecting portion 512 is displaced from the position overlapping the switch member 52 in the vertical direction to the (-Y) side. In other words, the operation member projecting portion 512 retreats from above the switch member 52 to the side, and the vertical overlap between the operation member projecting portion 512 and the switch member 52 is eliminated.
 イネーブルスイッチ1では、上述のように、ケース2の内底面21に接触する操作部材本体511の下端面513が、下方に凸となる凸面であるため、操作部材51が回転する際に、操作部材本体511とケース2の内底面21との間の摩擦を低減することができる。したがって、操作部材51の回転に要する力を低減することができる。 In the enable switch 1, as described above, the lower end surface 513 of the operation member main body 511 that contacts the inner bottom surface 21 of the case 2 is a convex surface that projects downward. Friction between the main body 511 and the inner bottom surface 21 of the case 2 can be reduced. Therefore, the force required to rotate the operating member 51 can be reduced.
 操作部材突出部512がスイッチ部材52の上方から退避すると、操作部材突出部512からスイッチ部材52に付与される下向きの力が失われ、接点移動機構43の上記バネの復元力により、スイッチ部材52が図12Bに示す位置から図13Bに示す元の位置(すなわち、図6Bに示す初期位置)へと上方に移動する。また、接点移動機構43により移動接点42が上方へと移動して上側の固定接点41に接触する。すなわち、スイッチ部材52の当該上向きの変位に伴って、接点4の状態が「閉」から「開」へと移行する。 When the operating member projecting portion 512 retreats from above the switch member 52 , the downward force applied from the operating member projecting portion 512 to the switch member 52 is lost, and the restoring force of the spring of the contact moving mechanism 43 causes the switch member 52 to move. moves upward from the position shown in FIG. 12B to the original position shown in FIG. 13B (ie, the initial position shown in FIG. 6B). Further, the moving contact 42 is moved upward by the contact moving mechanism 43 and comes into contact with the upper fixed contact 41 . That is, with the upward displacement of the switch member 52, the state of the contact 4 changes from "closed" to "open."
 なお、図12Aおよび図13Aに示すように、スイッチ部材52が上方へと移動する間、操作部材51は周方向に回転しない。スイッチ部材52が初期位置に戻った状態では、操作部材突出部512は、スイッチ部材52の(-Y)側の側面とY方向に対向する。操作部材突出部512は、スイッチ部材52の(-Y)側の側面と接触していてもよく、僅かな間隙をあけて近接していてもよい。 Note that, as shown in FIGS. 12A and 13A, the operation member 51 does not rotate in the circumferential direction while the switch member 52 moves upward. When the switch member 52 returns to the initial position, the operating member projecting portion 512 faces the side surface of the switch member 52 on the (-Y) side in the Y direction. The operation member projecting portion 512 may be in contact with the side surface of the switch member 52 on the (-Y) side, or may be close to it with a slight gap.
 ボタン部3がさらに下方へと押し込まれると、図14Aおよび図14Bに示すように、操作部材51はケース2の内底面21により下方への移動が制限されているため上下方向には移動せず、ボタンカバー31およびボタンケース32がさらに下方へと移動する。すなわち、ボタン部3が操作部材51に対して相対的にさらに下方へと移動する。これにより、操作弾性部材53が上下方向にさらに圧縮される。また、ボタン部3の操作部材51に対する下方への相対移動により、操作部材突出部512に上側から接触する溝部34の上端面341から、操作部材突出部512に対して周方向の力が働き、操作部材51が、ボタン部3の下降に伴って図13Aに示す位置から図14Aに示す位置へと反時計回りに回転する。上述のように、図14Aおよび図14Bに示すボタン部3の位置は、ボタン部3が最も下側に押し込まれた第3ポジションである。 When the button portion 3 is pushed further downward, as shown in FIGS. 14A and 14B, the downward movement of the operating member 51 is restricted by the inner bottom surface 21 of the case 2, so that it does not move vertically. , the button cover 31 and the button case 32 move further downward. That is, the button portion 3 moves further downward relative to the operation member 51 . As a result, the operating elastic member 53 is further compressed in the vertical direction. In addition, due to the downward relative movement of the button portion 3 with respect to the operating member 51, a circumferential force acts on the operating member projecting portion 512 from the upper end surface 341 of the groove portion 34 that contacts the operating member projecting portion 512 from above. As the button portion 3 is lowered, the operating member 51 rotates counterclockwise from the position shown in FIG. 13A to the position shown in FIG. 14A. As described above, the position of the button portion 3 shown in FIGS. 14A and 14B is the third position where the button portion 3 is pushed to the bottom.
 ボタン部3が第3ポジションに位置する状態で、操作者がボタン部3から手を離すと、上述の復帰弾性部材(図示省略)の復元力により、ボタンカバー31およびボタンケース32が、図14Bに示す位置から図15Bに示す位置へと上方に移動する。図15Bに示すボタン部3の位置は、図11Bに示す第2ポジションと略同じである。ボタン部3が第3ポジションから上方に移動する際には、ボタン部3と操作部材51との間において上下方向に圧縮されている操作弾性部材53により、操作部材51に下向きの力が加わり、操作部材51の上方への移動が制限される。このため、ボタンケース32が操作部材51に対して相対的に上方へと移動し、ボタンケース32の溝部34における下端面342の上記傾斜面(すなわち、下カム部)が、操作部材51の操作部材突出部512に下側から接触する。そして、下カム部から操作部材突出部512に対して周方向の力が働き、操作部材51は、図14Aに示す位置から図15Aに示す位置へと時計回りに回転する。 When the operator releases the button portion 3 while the button portion 3 is in the third position, the restoring force of the restoring elastic member (not shown) causes the button cover 31 and the button case 32 to move as shown in FIG. 14B. from the position shown in Fig. 15B upwards to the position shown in Fig. 15B. The position of the button portion 3 shown in FIG. 15B is substantially the same as the second position shown in FIG. 11B. When the button portion 3 moves upward from the third position, the operating elastic member 53 vertically compressed between the button portion 3 and the operating member 51 applies downward force to the operating member 51 . The upward movement of the operating member 51 is restricted. Therefore, the button case 32 moves upward relative to the operation member 51 , and the inclined surface (that is, the lower cam portion) of the lower end surface 342 of the groove portion 34 of the button case 32 moves the operation member 51 . The member projecting portion 512 is contacted from below. Then, a circumferential force acts on the operation member projecting portion 512 from the lower cam portion, and the operation member 51 rotates clockwise from the position shown in FIG. 14A to the position shown in FIG. 15A.
 以下の説明では、ボタン部3の下降時における操作部材51の回転方向(上記例では、反時計回り)、および、当該回転方向への回転をそれぞれ、「第1方向」および「第1方向への移動」とも呼ぶ。また、ボタン部3の上昇時における操作部材51の回転方向(上記例では、時計回り)、および、当該回転方向への回転をそれぞれ、「第2方向」および「第2方向への移動」とも呼ぶ。当該第2方向は、第1方向とは反対向きである。他の実施の形態においても同様である。 In the following description, the rotation direction (counterclockwise in the above example) of the operation member 51 when the button portion 3 is lowered, and the rotation in that rotation direction are referred to as the "first direction" and the "first direction." Also called "movement of Further, the rotation direction (clockwise in the above example) of the operation member 51 when the button portion 3 is raised, and the rotation in that rotation direction are also referred to as "second direction" and "movement in the second direction", respectively. call. The second direction is opposite to the first direction. The same applies to other embodiments.
 操作部材突出部512は、図15Aに示すように、スイッチ部材52の(-Y)側の側面に接触する。このため、操作部材51はこれ以上時計回りに回転しない。すなわち、操作部材51の時計回り方向の回転は、スイッチ部材52により制限される。なお、ボタン部3が第3ポジションから上昇して第2ポジションへと戻る間、スイッチ部材52は移動せず(すなわち、スイッチ部材52の位置は維持され)、接点4の状態は「開」のままで維持される。 As shown in FIG. 15A, the operating member projecting portion 512 contacts the side surface of the switch member 52 on the (-Y) side. Therefore, the operating member 51 does not rotate clockwise any more. That is, the clockwise rotation of the operating member 51 is restricted by the switch member 52 . While the button portion 3 is raised from the third position and returned to the second position, the switch member 52 does not move (that is, the position of the switch member 52 is maintained), and the contact 4 is in the "open" state. maintained as is.
 ボタン部3がさらに上方へと移動して第1ポジション近傍に至ると、図16Bに示すように、操作部材突出部512の下端がスイッチ部材52の上端よりも上側に位置し、操作部材突出部512がスイッチ部材52の(-Y)側の側面から外れる。そして、操作弾性部材53により操作部材51の上方への移動が制限された状態で、下カム部から操作部材突出部512に対して働く周方向の力により、操作部材51が、図15Aに示す位置から図16Aに示す位置へと時計回りに回転し、スイッチ部材52の上方に位置する。図16Aおよび図16Bに示すボタン部3は、第1ポジションに位置する。なお、ボタン部3が第2ポジションから上昇して第1ポジションへと戻る間、スイッチ部材52は移動せず(すなわち、スイッチ部材52の位置は維持され)、接点4の状態は「開」のままで維持される。 When the button portion 3 moves further upward and reaches the vicinity of the first position, as shown in FIG. 512 is removed from the side surface of the switch member 52 on the (-Y) side. Then, in a state in which the upward movement of the operating member 51 is restricted by the operating elastic member 53, the operating member 51 is moved as shown in FIG. 16A, above the switch member 52. As shown in FIG. The button portion 3 shown in FIGS. 16A and 16B is located at the first position. While the button portion 3 is raised from the second position and returned to the first position, the switch member 52 does not move (that is, the position of the switch member 52 is maintained), and the contact 4 is in the "open" state. maintained as is.
 以上に説明したように、イネーブルスイッチ1は、ケース2と、第1可動部材(すなわち、ボタン部3)と、接点4と、接点機構5とを備える。ボタン部3は、ケース2に向かって下方に押し込まれる。接点機構5は、ボタン部3がケース2に向かって押し込まれるに従って、接点4の状態を、「開」および「閉」の一方から他方に移行し(本実施の形態では、「開」から「閉」に移行し)、さらに当該他方から当該一方へと移行する。 As described above, the enable switch 1 includes the case 2, the first movable member (that is, the button portion 3), the contact 4, and the contact mechanism 5. The button part 3 is pushed downward toward the case 2 . The contact mechanism 5 shifts the state of the contact 4 from one of "open" and "closed" to the other as the button portion 3 is pushed toward the case 2 (in the present embodiment, the state of the contact 4 is changed from "open" to "closed"). closed"), and then from the other to the one.
 上述のように、ボタン部3が押し込まれていない状態におけるケース2に対するボタン部3の位置を第1ポジションとする。また、ボタン部3が最も下側に押し込まれた状態におけるケース2に対するボタン部3の位置を第3ポジションとする。さらに、第1ポジションと第3ポジションとの間におけるケース2に対するボタン部3の所定の位置を第2ポジションとする。ボタン部3が押し込まれる際に、第1ポジションと第2ポジションとの間にて接点4の状態が上記一方から上記他方に移行し、第2ポジションと第3ポジションとの間にて接点4の状態が当該他方から当該一方に移行する。ボタン部3が第3ポジションから第1ポジションへと戻る際に、接点4の状態は当該一方のままで維持される。 As described above, the position of the button part 3 with respect to the case 2 when the button part 3 is not pushed is the first position. Further, the position of the button portion 3 with respect to the case 2 when the button portion 3 is pushed to the bottom is referred to as the third position. Further, a predetermined position of the button portion 3 with respect to the case 2 between the first position and the third position is defined as a second position. When the button portion 3 is pushed, the state of the contact 4 shifts from the one to the other between the first position and the second position, and the state of the contact 4 changes between the second position and the third position. The state transitions from the other to the one. When the button portion 3 returns from the third position to the first position, the state of the contact 4 is maintained in the one state.
 接点機構5は、第2可動部材(すなわち、操作部材51)と、スイッチ部材52とを備える。操作部材51は、ボタン部3により保持され、ボタン部3に対して相対的に移動可能である。スイッチ部材52は、操作部材51と直接的に接触し、操作部材51の移動に伴って変位することにより接点4の状態を変更する。ボタン部3は、操作部材51に上側から接触する上カム部(上記例では、溝部34の上端面341)と、操作部材51に下側から接触する下カム部(上記例では、溝部34の下端面342)と、を備える。 The contact mechanism 5 includes a second movable member (that is, an operating member 51) and a switch member 52. The operation member 51 is held by the button portion 3 and is relatively movable with respect to the button portion 3 . The switch member 52 changes the state of the contact 4 by being in direct contact with the operating member 51 and being displaced as the operating member 51 moves. The button portion 3 includes an upper cam portion (the upper end surface 341 of the groove portion 34 in the above example) that contacts the operation member 51 from above, and a lower cam portion (the upper end surface 341 of the groove portion 34 in the above example) that contacts the operation member 51 from below. and a lower end surface 342).
 イネーブルスイッチ1では、ボタン部3が第1ポジションから第2ポジションへと押し込まれる際に、ボタン部3と共に下方へと移動する操作部材51によってスイッチ部材52に力が付与されることにより、スイッチ部材52が変位して接点4の状態が上記一方から上記他方に移行する。また、ボタン部3が第2ポジションから第3ポジションへと押し込まれる際に、操作部材51の下方への移動が制限された状態で、上カム部が操作部材51に上側から接触し、ボタン部3の下降に伴って操作部材51をボタン部3に対して所定の第1方向へと相対移動させる(上記例では、反時計回りに回転させる)。これにより、操作部材51からスイッチ部材52に付与される下向きの力が失われてスイッチ部材52が元の位置へと戻り、接点4の状態が上記他方から上記一方に移行する。 In the enable switch 1, when the button portion 3 is pushed from the first position to the second position, force is applied to the switch member 52 by the operation member 51 that moves downward together with the button portion 3. 52 is displaced to change the state of the contact 4 from the one to the other. Further, when the button portion 3 is pushed from the second position to the third position, the upper cam portion contacts the operation member 51 from above while the downward movement of the operation member 51 is restricted. 3 is lowered, the operation member 51 is moved relative to the button portion 3 in a predetermined first direction (in the above example, rotated counterclockwise). As a result, the downward force applied from the operating member 51 to the switch member 52 is lost, the switch member 52 returns to its original position, and the state of the contact 4 shifts from the other to the one.
 イネーブルスイッチ1では、さらに、ボタン部3が第3ポジションから第1ポジションへと戻る際に、スイッチ部材52の位置(すなわち、ボタン部3に対する相対位置)が維持された状態で、操作部材51がボタン部3と共に上方へと移動する。また、操作部材51の上方への移動が制限された状態で、下カム部が操作部材51に下側から接触し、ボタン部3の上昇に伴って操作部材51をボタン部3に対して上記第1方向とは反対向きの第2方向へと相対移動させる(上記例では、時計回りに回転させる)。 In the enable switch 1, when the button portion 3 returns from the third position to the first position, the operation member 51 is operated while the position of the switch member 52 (that is, the position relative to the button portion 3) is maintained. It moves upward together with the button part 3 . In addition, in a state in which the upward movement of the operating member 51 is restricted, the lower cam portion contacts the operating member 51 from below, and the operating member 51 moves above the button portion 3 as the button portion 3 rises. Relatively move in a second direction opposite to the first direction (rotate clockwise in the above example).
 このように、イネーブルスイッチ1では、ボタン部3に保持された操作部材51をスイッチ部材52に直接的に接触させ、操作部材51の移動に伴ってスイッチ部材52を変位させることにより、第1ポジション、第2ポジションおよび第3ポジションにおける接点4の状態の切り替えを実現している。これにより、イネーブルスイッチ1の部品点数を削減し、イネーブルスイッチ1を小型化することができる。具体的には、上述のように、接点4、スイッチ部材52および操作部材51がX方向に並ぶイネーブルスイッチ1では、操作部材51とスイッチ部材52との間に他の連動部材等が設けられる場合に比べて、イネーブルスイッチ1のX方向(すなわち、長手方向)の長さを小さくすることができる。 As described above, in the enable switch 1, the operation member 51 held by the button portion 3 is brought into direct contact with the switch member 52, and the switch member 52 is displaced as the operation member 51 is moved, whereby the switch member 52 is moved to the first position. , the switching of the state of the contact 4 in the second position and the third position. As a result, the number of parts of the enable switch 1 can be reduced and the size of the enable switch 1 can be reduced. Specifically, as described above, in the enable switch 1 in which the contact 4, the switch member 52, and the operation member 51 are arranged in the X direction, if another interlocking member or the like is provided between the operation member 51 and the switch member 52, , the length of the enable switch 1 in the X direction (that is, the longitudinal direction) can be reduced.
 上述のように、好ましくは、ボタン部3が第1ポジションから第2ポジションへと押し込まれる際に、操作部材51はスイッチ部材52に上側から接触し、ボタン部3と共に下方へと移動する操作部材51によってスイッチ部材52が押し下げられる。これにより、スイッチ部材52がX方向に変位する場合に比べて、イネーブルスイッチ1をX方向(すなわち、長手方向)においてさらに小型化することができる。 As described above, preferably, when the button portion 3 is pushed from the first position to the second position, the operating member 51 contacts the switch member 52 from above and moves downward together with the button portion 3. 51 pushes down the switch member 52 . Thereby, the enable switch 1 can be further miniaturized in the X direction (that is, in the longitudinal direction) as compared with the case where the switch member 52 is displaced in the X direction.
 上述のように、ボタン部3は、上面部311と、筒状の第2可動部材保持部(すなわち、ボタンケース32)とをさらに備えることが好ましい。上面部311は、操作者がボタン部3を押し込む際に触れる部位である。ボタンケース32は、上面部311から下方に延びるとともに、内側に操作部材51を保持する。上述の上カム部は、ボタンケース32の側面において上下方向に対して傾斜する方向に延びる溝部34の上端面341であり、下カム部は、溝部34の下端面342であることが好ましい。このように、ボタンケース32に、操作部材51を保持する機能と、上述の上カム部および下カム部の機能とを兼備させることにより、イネーブルスイッチ1の構造を簡素化することができる。その結果、イネーブルスイッチ1の更なる小型化を実現することができる。 As described above, the button portion 3 preferably further includes the upper surface portion 311 and the tubular second movable member holding portion (that is, the button case 32). The upper surface portion 311 is a portion that the operator touches when pressing the button portion 3 . The button case 32 extends downward from the upper surface portion 311 and holds the operating member 51 inside. Preferably, the above-mentioned upper cam portion is the upper end surface 341 of the groove portion 34 extending in the side surface of the button case 32 in a direction inclined with respect to the vertical direction, and the lower cam portion is the lower end surface 342 of the groove portion 34 . Thus, the structure of the enable switch 1 can be simplified by providing the button case 32 with the function of holding the operation member 51 and the functions of the upper cam portion and the lower cam portion described above. As a result, further miniaturization of the enable switch 1 can be achieved.
 上述のように、操作部材51は、上下方向に延びる第2可動部材本体(すなわち、操作部材本体511)と、操作部材本体511から側方に突出する第2可動部材突出部(すなわち、操作部材突出部512)と、を備えることが好ましい。この場合、ボタン部3が第1ポジションから第2ポジションへと押し込まれる際に、操作部材突出部512はスイッチ部材52に上側から接触して力を付与する。また、ボタン部3が第2ポジションから第3ポジションへと押し込まれる際に、上カム部は操作部材突出部512に上側から接触する。さらに、ボタン部3が第3ポジションから第1ポジションへと戻る際に、下カム部は操作部材突出部512に下側から接触する。このように、操作部材51において、スイッチ部材52に接触する部位と、上カム部および下カム部に接触する部位とを共通化することにより、接点機構5の構造を簡素化することができる。その結果、イネーブルスイッチ1の更なる小型化を実現することができる。 As described above, the operating member 51 includes a second movable member main body (that is, the operating member main body 511) that extends in the vertical direction, and a second movable member protruding portion (that is, the operating member main body 511) that protrudes laterally from the operating member main body 511. Preferably, a protrusion 512) is provided. In this case, when the button portion 3 is pushed from the first position to the second position, the operation member projecting portion 512 comes into contact with the switch member 52 from above and applies force. Further, when the button portion 3 is pushed from the second position to the third position, the upper cam portion contacts the operating member projecting portion 512 from above. Furthermore, when the button portion 3 returns from the third position to the first position, the lower cam portion comes into contact with the operating member projecting portion 512 from below. In this way, the structure of the contact mechanism 5 can be simplified by sharing the portion that contacts the switch member 52 and the portion that contacts the upper cam portion and the lower cam portion in the operating member 51 . As a result, further miniaturization of the enable switch 1 can be achieved.
 上述のように、操作部材51は、上下方向に延びる中心軸J1を中心とする筒状または柱状であることが好ましい。また、操作部材51のボタン部3に対する上記第1方向への相対移動は、中心軸J1を中心とする周方向の一方側(上記例では、反時計回り方向)への回転であり、操作部材51のボタン部3に対する上記第2方向への相対移動は、中心軸J1を中心とする周方向の他方側(上記例では、時計回り方向)への回転であることが好ましい。これにより、当該第1方向および第2方向の相対移動が上下方向等の直線的な移動である場合に比べて、イネーブルスイッチ1を小型化することができる。 As described above, the operating member 51 preferably has a tubular or columnar shape centered on the vertically extending central axis J1. Further, the relative movement of the operation member 51 with respect to the button portion 3 in the first direction is rotation in the circumferential direction about the central axis J1 (counterclockwise direction in the above example). The relative movement of 51 with respect to button portion 3 in the second direction is preferably rotation in the other circumferential direction (clockwise direction in the above example) around central axis J1. As a result, the enable switch 1 can be made smaller than when the relative movement in the first direction and the second direction is linear movement in the vertical direction or the like.
 上述のように、ボタン部3が第2ポジションから第3ポジションへと押し込まれる際に、操作部材51の下方への移動の制限は、操作部材51の下端面513がケース2に接触することより実現されることが好ましい。この場合、操作部材51の下端面513は、中央部が下方に凸となるように湾曲する凸面であることが好ましい。これにより、操作部材51とケース2との接触部における摩擦力を低減することができる。その結果、操作部材51の上記第1方向および第2方向への移動に要する力を低減することができる。上述の例では、操作部材51の反時計回り方向および時計回り方向への回転に要する力を低減することができる。したがって、ボタン部3の押し込みに要する力を低減することができ、イネーブルスイッチ1の操作性を向上することができる。 As described above, when the button portion 3 is pushed from the second position to the third position, the downward movement of the operating member 51 is limited by the contact of the lower end surface 513 of the operating member 51 with the case 2 . It is preferably implemented. In this case, it is preferable that the lower end surface 513 of the operation member 51 is a convex surface curved so that the central portion is convex downward. Thereby, the frictional force at the contact portion between the operation member 51 and the case 2 can be reduced. As a result, the force required to move the operating member 51 in the first direction and the second direction can be reduced. In the above example, the force required to rotate the operating member 51 counterclockwise and clockwise can be reduced. Therefore, the force required to press the button portion 3 can be reduced, and the operability of the enable switch 1 can be improved.
 上述のように、イネーブルスイッチ1は、操作部材51とボタン部3との間に配置される操作弾性部材53をさらに備えることが好ましい。操作弾性部材53は、ボタン部3が操作部材51に対して相対的に下方に移動することにより上下方向に圧縮される。この場合、ボタン部3が第1ポジションから第2ポジションへと押し込まれる際に、接点4の状態が上記一方から上記他方に移行するよりも前に、操作部材51がケース2に設けられた仮止め部61に接触して、操作部材51の下方への移動が制限される。イネーブルスイッチ1では、操作部材51の下方への移動が制限された状態でボタン部3が下方へと移動することにより、操作弾性部材53が上下方向に圧縮され、上カム部が操作部材51に上側から接触し、ボタン部3の下降に伴って操作部材51を上記第1方向へと移動させる。その結果、操作部材51が仮止め部61からずれ、操作弾性部材53の復元力によって操作部材51が下方へと移動してスイッチ部材52に力が付与されることにより、スイッチ部材52が変位して接点4の状態が上記一方から上記他方に移行する。 As described above, the enable switch 1 preferably further includes the operating elastic member 53 arranged between the operating member 51 and the button portion 3 . The operating elastic member 53 is vertically compressed by the downward movement of the button portion 3 relative to the operating member 51 . In this case, when the button portion 3 is pushed from the first position to the second position, the operation member 51 is provided on the case 2 before the state of the contact 4 shifts from the one to the other. The downward movement of the operation member 51 is restricted by coming into contact with the stop portion 61 . In the enable switch 1 , when the button portion 3 moves downward while the downward movement of the operating member 51 is restricted, the operating elastic member 53 is vertically compressed, and the upper cam portion is moved by the operating member 51 . The operation member 51 is brought into contact from above and moved in the first direction as the button portion 3 is lowered. As a result, the operating member 51 is displaced from the temporary fixing portion 61, and the restoring force of the operating elastic member 53 causes the operating member 51 to move downward. Then, the state of the contact 4 shifts from the one to the other.
 このように、イネーブルスイッチ1では、ボタン部3の第2ポジションへの下降中に操作部材51を仮止めし、圧縮された操作弾性部材53の復元力により操作部材51を一気に下方へと移動させることにより、接点4の状態を「開」から「閉」に迅速かつ確実に移行させることができる。また、イネーブルスイッチ1が複数の接点4を備える場合、接点4の状態が「開」から「閉」に移行するタイミングが、複数の接点4においてずれることを抑制することができる。その結果、イネーブルスイッチ1の動作の安定性を向上することができる。 Thus, in the enable switch 1, the operating member 51 is temporarily fixed while the button portion 3 is being lowered to the second position, and the operating member 51 is moved downward at once by the restoring force of the compressed operating elastic member 53. As a result, the state of the contact 4 can be rapidly and reliably changed from "open" to "closed". In addition, when the enable switch 1 includes a plurality of contacts 4 , it is possible to prevent the contact 4 from shifting the state of the contacts 4 from “open” to “closed”. As a result, the operational stability of the enable switch 1 can be improved.
 上述のように、イネーブルスイッチ1は、操作部材51を挟んで接点4の反対側に配置される他の接点4をさらに備え、当該他の接点4の状態は、接点機構5により上記接点4の状態と同期して移行されることが好ましい。この場合、接点機構5は、操作部材51を挟んでスイッチ部材52の反対側に配置されてケース2により保持される他のスイッチ部材52をさらに備える。また、当該他のスイッチ部材52は、上記スイッチ部材52と同様に、操作部材51と直接的に接触し、操作部材51の移動に伴ってスイッチ部材52の変位と同期して変位することにより、上記他の接点4の状態を変更する。これにより、複数の接点4の状態移行(すなわち、複数の接点4の開閉)を、簡素な構造で好適に実現することができる。 As described above, the enable switch 1 further includes another contact 4 arranged on the opposite side of the contact 4 with the operation member 51 interposed therebetween. Preferably, the transition is synchronous with the state. In this case, the contact mechanism 5 further includes another switch member 52 arranged on the opposite side of the switch member 52 with the operation member 51 interposed therebetween and held by the case 2 . In addition, the other switch member 52 is in direct contact with the operation member 51 in the same manner as the switch member 52 described above, and is displaced in synchronization with the displacement of the switch member 52 as the operation member 51 is moved. The state of the other contact 4 is changed. Thereby, the state transition of the plurality of contacts 4 (that is, the opening and closing of the plurality of contacts 4) can be suitably realized with a simple structure.
 上述のイネーブルスイッチ1では、様々な変更が可能である。 Various modifications are possible for the enable switch 1 described above.
 例えば、イネーブルスイッチ1の操作性を向上するために、ボタン部3の第1ポジションから第3ポジションへの移動の途中で、ボタン部3の押し込みに要する力が部分的に大きくされてもよい。具体的には、例えば、ボタン部3を第2ポジションから第3ポジションへと押し込む際に必要な力が大きくされてもよい。 For example, in order to improve the operability of the enable switch 1, the force required to push the button portion 3 may be partially increased while the button portion 3 is moving from the first position to the third position. Specifically, for example, the force required to push the button portion 3 from the second position to the third position may be increased.
 図17Aおよび図17Bは、当該押し込み力の変化を実現するための構造の一例を示す図である。図17Aは、ボタン部が第2ポジションに位置する状態における操作部材51の下端面513近傍を示す側面図である。図17Bは、図17Aの状態における操作部材51の下端面513が接触するケース2の内底面21を示す平面図である。図17Bでは、操作部材51の下端面513を破線にて示す。 17A and 17B are diagrams showing an example of a structure for realizing the change in pushing force. FIG. 17A is a side view showing the vicinity of the lower end surface 513 of the operating member 51 when the button portion is positioned at the second position. 17B is a plan view showing the inner bottom surface 21 of the case 2 with which the lower end surface 513 of the operating member 51 contacts in the state shown in FIG. 17A. In FIG. 17B, the lower end surface 513 of the operating member 51 is indicated by broken lines.
 図17Aおよび図17Bに示す例では、操作部材51の下端面513の外周部に、下方に向けて突出する略半球状の凸部514が設けられる。また、ケース2の内底面21には、操作部材51の外周部と平面視において重なる位置に、中心軸J1を中心とする径方向に延びる凸部211が設けられる。操作部材51の凸部514は、ボタン部3が第2ポジションに位置する状態で、平面視におけるケース2の凸部211の時計回り側にて凸部211に隣接する。 In the example shown in FIGS. 17A and 17B, a substantially hemispherical protrusion 514 protruding downward is provided on the outer peripheral portion of the lower end surface 513 of the operating member 51 . Further, the inner bottom surface 21 of the case 2 is provided with a convex portion 211 extending radially about the central axis J1 at a position overlapping the outer peripheral portion of the operation member 51 in plan view. The convex portion 514 of the operation member 51 is adjacent to the convex portion 211 of the case 2 on the clockwise side in plan view when the button portion 3 is positioned at the second position.
 ボタン部3を第2ポジションから第3ポジションまで押し込む際には、操作部材51の凸部514が、ケース2の凸部211を乗り越えて平面視における凸部211の反時計回り側に移動する必要がある。凸部514の当該移動を行うためには、操作弾性部材53(図3参照)を上下方向に圧縮する必要があるため、凸部514および凸部211が設けられない場合に比べて、ボタン部3を押し込むために必要な力が大きくなる。これにより、第2ポジションで維持されているボタン部3を、操作者が誤って第3ポジションへと押し込むことを抑制することができる。 When pushing the button portion 3 from the second position to the third position, the convex portion 514 of the operation member 51 needs to climb over the convex portion 211 of the case 2 and move to the counterclockwise side of the convex portion 211 in plan view. There is In order to move the convex portion 514, it is necessary to compress the operation elastic member 53 (see FIG. 3) in the vertical direction. The force required to push in 3 increases. As a result, it is possible to prevent the operator from erroneously pushing the button portion 3 maintained at the second position to the third position.
 操作部材51のボタンケース32に対する上記第1方向および第2方向への相対移動は、必ずしも、中心軸J1を中心とする周方向への一方側および他方側への回転である必要はなく、様々に変更されてよい。例えば、上述の第1方向および第2方向への相対移動は、(+Y)方向への移動および(-Y)方向への移動であってもよい。具体的には、図18に示すように、ボタンケース32の(-X)側の側面および(+X)側の側面に、同じ方向に向いて延びる略同形状の溝部34が形成され、当該2つの溝部34内に操作部材51の2つの操作部材突出部512が配置されてもよい。各溝部34は、ボタンケース32の側面の中央部(すなわち、Y方向およびZ方向の中央部)から(+Y)方向かつ(+Z)方向へと延びる。図18に示す例では、操作部材51の下方への移動が制限された状態でボタンケース32が下方へと移動されることにより、操作部材51が、図18に示す位置からボタンケース32に対して(+Y)方向へと相対移動する。また、操作部材51の上方への移動が制限された状態でボタンケース32が上方へと移動されることにより、操作部材51がボタンケース32に対して(-Y)方向へと相対移動する。 The relative movement of the operation member 51 with respect to the button case 32 in the first direction and the second direction does not necessarily have to be rotation in one direction and the other direction in the circumferential direction about the central axis J1. may be changed to For example, the above-described relative movements in the first direction and the second direction may be movements in the (+Y) direction and movements in the (−Y) direction. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 18, grooves 34 of substantially the same shape extending in the same direction are formed on the (-X) side and the (+X) side of the button case 32. Two operating member projecting portions 512 of the operating member 51 may be arranged in one groove portion 34 . Each groove 34 extends in the (+Y) direction and the (+Z) direction from the central portion of the side surface of the button case 32 (that is, the central portion in the Y and Z directions). In the example shown in FIG. 18, the operation member 51 moves downward from the position shown in FIG. relative movement in the (+Y) direction. Further, by moving the button case 32 upward while the upward movement of the operating member 51 is restricted, the operating member 51 moves relative to the button case 32 in the (-Y) direction.
 イネーブルスイッチ1に設けられる接点4の数は、2つには限定されず、1つであってもよく、3つ以上であってもよい。 The number of contacts 4 provided on the enable switch 1 is not limited to two, and may be one or three or more.
 操作部材51では、スイッチ部材52に接触する部位と、上カム部および下カム部に接触する部位とは異なっていてもよい。例えば、上カム部および下カム部は、必ずしも操作部材突出部512に接触して操作部材51を移動させる必要はなく、操作部材51の他の部位に接触してもよい。また、スイッチ部材52に接触する操作部材51の部位は、必ずしも操作部材突出部512には限定されず、操作部材51における操作部材突出部512以外の部位であってもよい。 In the operating member 51, the portion that contacts the switch member 52 may be different from the portion that contacts the upper cam portion and the lower cam portion. For example, the upper cam portion and the lower cam portion do not necessarily need to contact the operating member projecting portion 512 to move the operating member 51 , and may contact other portions of the operating member 51 . Also, the portion of the operating member 51 that contacts the switch member 52 is not necessarily limited to the operating member projecting portion 512 , and may be a portion of the operating member 51 other than the operating member projecting portion 512 .
 上カム部および下カム部は、必ずしもボタンケース32の溝部34に設けられる必要はなく、他の構造であってもよい。また、上カム部および下カム部は、必ずしもボタンケース32の(+X)側の側面および(-X)側の側面に設けられる必要はなく、ボタンケース32の他の部位、または、ボタン部3のボタンケース32以外の部位に設けられてもよい。 The upper cam portion and the lower cam portion do not necessarily have to be provided in the groove portion 34 of the button case 32, and may have other structures. Further, the upper cam portion and the lower cam portion do not necessarily have to be provided on the (+X) side and (−X) side of the button case 32, and the button case 32 or the button portion 3 It may be provided in a part other than the button case 32 of.
 上述の例では、操作部材突出部512が仮止め部61に接触することにより操作部材51が仮止めされるが、仮止め部61が他の位置に設けられ、操作部材本体511が仮止め部61に接触することにより操作部材51が仮止めされてもよい。また、操作部材51の仮止めは必ずしも行われる必要はなく、仮止め部61および操作弾性部材53は省略されてもよい。 In the above example, the operating member 51 is temporarily fixed by the operating member projecting portion 512 coming into contact with the temporary fixing portion 61, but the temporary fixing portion 61 is provided at another position, and the operating member main body 511 The operating member 51 may be temporarily fixed by contacting the 61 . Moreover, the temporary fixing of the operation member 51 is not necessarily performed, and the temporary fixing portion 61 and the operation elastic member 53 may be omitted.
 操作部材51の形状は、上述の例には限定されず、様々に変更されてよい。例えば、操作部材51の下端面513は、必ずしも凸面である必要はなく、ケース2の内底面21に略平行な平面であってもよい。操作部材本体511は、必ずしも中心軸J1を中心とする筒状または柱状である必要はなく、他の形状を有していてもよい。操作部材51は、必ずしも操作部材本体511および操作部材突出部512を備える必要はなく、他の構造を有していてもよい。 The shape of the operation member 51 is not limited to the above example, and may be changed in various ways. For example, the lower end surface 513 of the operation member 51 does not necessarily have to be a convex surface, and may be a flat surface substantially parallel to the inner bottom surface 21 of the case 2 . The operation member main body 511 does not necessarily have a cylindrical or columnar shape centered on the central axis J1, and may have another shape. The operation member 51 does not necessarily have the operation member main body 511 and the operation member projecting portion 512, and may have other structures.
 スイッチ部材52の形状および移動方向は、必ずしも上記例には限定されず、様々に変更されてよい。例えば、スイッチ部材52がZ方向に対して傾斜した方向に変位することにより、接点4の状態が変更されてもよい。また、接点4の構造も上記例には限定されず、様々に変更されてよい。 The shape and moving direction of the switch member 52 are not necessarily limited to the above examples, and may be changed in various ways. For example, the state of the contact 4 may be changed by displacing the switch member 52 in a direction inclined with respect to the Z direction. Also, the structure of the contact 4 is not limited to the above example, and may be variously changed.
 次に、本発明の第2の実施の形態に係るイネーブルスイッチ1aについて説明する。図19は、イネーブルスイッチ1aを示す正面図である。図20は、イネーブルスイッチ1aの分解斜視図である。図21および図22は、一部の構成の図示を省略したイネーブルスイッチ1aの側面図である。図21では、ケース2aを破線にて示している。図22では、ケース2aおよびボタンカバー31aを破線にて示している。図19、図21および図22では、ボタン部3aが押し込まれていない状態(すなわち、初期状態)のイネーブルスイッチ1aを示す。後述する図25および図26においても同様である。 Next, an enable switch 1a according to a second embodiment of the present invention will be described. FIG. 19 is a front view showing the enable switch 1a. FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective view of the enable switch 1a. 21 and 22 are side views of the enable switch 1a with part of the configuration omitted. In FIG. 21, the case 2a is indicated by broken lines. In FIG. 22, the case 2a and the button cover 31a are indicated by dashed lines. FIGS. 19, 21 and 22 show the enable switch 1a in a state in which the button portion 3a is not pushed (that is, in the initial state). The same applies to FIGS. 25 and 26, which will be described later.
 イネーブルスイッチ1aは、Z方向(すなわち、上下方向)に延びる中心軸J2を中心とする略円柱状のスイッチである。イネーブルスイッチ1aは、上述のイネーブルスイッチ1と同様、3ポジション・イネーブルスイッチである。イネーブルスイッチ1aは、ケース2aと、ボタン部3aと、接点4aと、接点機構5aとを備える。ケース2aは、中心軸J2を中心とする略円筒状の部材であり、ボタン部3a、接点4aおよび接点機構5aを支持する。 The enable switch 1a is a substantially cylindrical switch centered on a central axis J2 extending in the Z direction (that is, in the vertical direction). The enable switch 1a is a three-position enable switch like the enable switch 1 described above. The enable switch 1a includes a case 2a, a button portion 3a, a contact 4a, and a contact mechanism 5a. The case 2a is a substantially cylindrical member centered on the central axis J2, and supports the button portion 3a, the contact 4a, and the contact mechanism 5a.
 ボタン部3aは、中心軸J2を中心とする有蓋略円筒状の部材である。ボタン部3aは、ケース2aの上部開口に挿入されている。ボタン部3aの上部は、ケース2aの上端から上側に向かって突出する。ボタン部3aは、イネーブルスイッチ1aの操作者により上面を下方(すなわち、(-Z)方向)に向かって押されることにより、ケース2aに向かって下方に押し込まれる。 The button part 3a is a substantially cylindrical member with a lid centered on the central axis J2. The button portion 3a is inserted into an upper opening of the case 2a. The upper portion of the button portion 3a protrudes upward from the upper end of the case 2a. The button portion 3a is pushed downward toward the case 2a when the operator of the enable switch 1a pushes the upper surface downward (ie, in the (-Z) direction).
 ボタン部3aは、ボタンカバー31aと、ボタンケース32aと、復帰弾性部材33aとを備える。ボタンカバー31aは、中心軸J2を中心とする有蓋略円筒状の部材であり、下方に向かって開口する。ボタンカバー31aの天蓋部(すなわち、(+Z)側の端面部であり、以下、「上面部311a」とも呼ぶ。)は、操作者がボタン部3aを押し込む際に触れる部位である。 The button portion 3a includes a button cover 31a, a button case 32a, and a return elastic member 33a. The button cover 31a is a substantially cylindrical member with a lid centered on the central axis J2, and opens downward. The canopy portion of the button cover 31a (that is, the end face portion on the (+Z) side, hereinafter also referred to as "upper surface portion 311a") is a portion that the operator touches when pushing the button portion 3a.
 図23は、ボタンカバー31aを斜め下方から見た斜視図である。ボタンカバー31aの上面部311aの下面には、2つの突起部312aが設けられる。2つの突起部312aは略同型状であり、一方の突起部312aは、他方の突起部312aを、中心軸J2を中心とする周方向(以下、単に「周方向」とも呼ぶ。)に180°回転させた位置に配置される。各突起部312aは、ボタンカバー31aの側壁部近傍において、当該側壁部から径方向内方へと離間した位置に配置される。各突起部312aは、平面視において周方向に延びる略円弧状の部位である。各突起部312aの下端面は、平面視における(すなわち、(+Z)側からZ方向に沿って見た場合の)反時計回り方向に向かうに従って(+Z)側へと向かう傾斜面である。 FIG. 23 is a perspective view of the button cover 31a as viewed obliquely from below. Two protrusions 312a are provided on the lower surface of the upper surface portion 311a of the button cover 31a. The two projections 312a are of substantially the same shape, and one projection 312a rotates the other projection 312a by 180° in the circumferential direction centered on the central axis J2 (hereinafter also simply referred to as the “circumferential direction”). placed in a rotated position. Each protrusion 312a is arranged in the vicinity of the side wall of the button cover 31a at a position spaced radially inward from the side wall. Each protrusion 312a is a substantially arcuate portion extending in the circumferential direction in plan view. The lower end surface of each protrusion 312a is an inclined surface that slopes toward the (+Z) side as it goes counterclockwise in plan view (that is, when viewed along the Z direction from the (+Z) side).
 図24は、ボタンケース32aを斜め上方から見た斜視図である。ボタンケース32aは、略筒状(図24に示す例では、中心軸J2を中心とする略円筒状)の部材である。ボタンケース32aは、ボタンカバー31aの下部開口から挿入され、ボタンカバー31aに取り付けられる。ボタンケース32aの下部は、ボタンカバー31aの下端から下側に向かって突出する。換言すれば、ボタンケース32aは、ボタンカバー31aの上面部311aから下方に延びる。ボタン部3aの上下方向への移動の際には、ボタンケース32aはボタンカバー31aと共に上下方向に移動する。以下の説明では、ボタン部3aを「第1可動部材」とも呼ぶ。 FIG. 24 is a perspective view of the button case 32a as viewed obliquely from above. The button case 32a is a substantially tubular member (in the example shown in FIG. 24, a substantially cylindrical shape centered on the central axis J2). The button case 32a is inserted from the lower opening of the button cover 31a and attached to the button cover 31a. The lower portion of the button case 32a protrudes downward from the lower end of the button cover 31a. In other words, the button case 32a extends downward from the upper surface portion 311a of the button cover 31a. When the button portion 3a moves vertically, the button case 32a moves vertically together with the button cover 31a. In the following description, the button portion 3a is also called a "first movable member".
 ボタンケース32aの径方向(すなわち、中心軸J2を中心とする径方向)内側には、後述する操作部材51aが保持される。ボタンケース32aの側面には、2つの凹部34aが設けられる。2つの凹部34aは略同型状であり、一方の凹部34aは、他方の凹部34aを周方向に180°回転させた位置に配置される。各凹部34aは、ボタンケース32aの上端から下方に向かって凹んでいる。各凹部34a内には、ボタンカバー31aの突起部312a、および、後述する操作部材突出部512aが配置される。操作部材突出部512aは、ボタンカバー31aの突起部312aと、ボタンケース32aの凹部34aの下端面とにより、上下から挟まれる。各凹部34aの下端面は、第1端面341aと、第2端面342aとを含む。第1端面341aは、中心軸J2に対して略垂直に広がる略水平面である。第2端面342aは、第1端面341aの平面視における反時計回り方向の端部から、反時計回り方向に広がる。第2端面342aは、平面視における反時計回り方向に向かうに従って(+Z)側へと向かう傾斜面である。 An operation member 51a, which will be described later, is held inside the button case 32a in the radial direction (that is, in the radial direction about the central axis J2). Two recesses 34a are provided on the side surface of the button case 32a. The two recessed portions 34a are of substantially the same shape, and one recessed portion 34a is arranged at a position obtained by rotating the other recessed portion 34a by 180° in the circumferential direction. Each recess 34a is recessed downward from the upper end of the button case 32a. A projecting portion 312a of the button cover 31a and an operating member projecting portion 512a, which will be described later, are arranged in each recess 34a. The operating member projecting portion 512a is sandwiched from above and below by the projecting portion 312a of the button cover 31a and the lower end surface of the recessed portion 34a of the button case 32a. The lower end surface of each recess 34a includes a first end surface 341a and a second end surface 342a. The first end surface 341a is a substantially horizontal surface extending substantially perpendicular to the central axis J2. The second end face 342a spreads counterclockwise from the counterclockwise end of the first end face 341a in plan view. The second end surface 342a is an inclined surface directed toward the (+Z) side in the counterclockwise direction in plan view.
 図20ないし図22に示す復帰弾性部材33aは、上下方向に弾性的に圧縮可能な部材である。復帰弾性部材33aは、例えば、上下方向に略平行に延びる弦巻バネである。図20ないし図22では、便宜上、復帰弾性部材33aを略円筒状に描いている。図20に示す例では、2つの復帰弾性部材33aが、ボタンケース32aの径方向内側において、周方向に180°ずれた位置に配置される。各復帰弾性部材33aの下部はボタンケース32aから下方に突出しており、ケース2aにより下方から支持される。イネーブルスイッチ1aでは、操作者によりボタン部3aが下方へと押し込まれ、ボタンカバー31aおよびボタンケース32aが初期位置から下方へと移動することにより、復帰弾性部材33aが上下方向に弾性的に圧縮される。そして、操作者によるボタン部3aの押圧が解除されると、復帰弾性部材33aの復元力により、ボタンカバー31aおよびボタンケース32aが上方へと押し上げられて初期位置へと戻る。なお、復帰弾性部材33aの配置、形状および構造は様々に変更されてよい。また、復帰弾性部材33aは、弦巻バネ以外の弾性部材(例えば、板バネ等)であってもよい。 A return elastic member 33a shown in FIGS. 20 to 22 is a member that can be elastically compressed in the vertical direction. The return elastic member 33a is, for example, a spiral spring that extends substantially parallel to the vertical direction. 20 to 22, the restoring elastic member 33a is drawn in a substantially cylindrical shape for the sake of convenience. In the example shown in FIG. 20, the two return elastic members 33a are arranged radially inside the button case 32a at positions that are circumferentially shifted by 180°. A lower portion of each return elastic member 33a protrudes downward from the button case 32a and is supported from below by the case 2a. In the enable switch 1a, the button portion 3a is pushed downward by the operator, and the button cover 31a and the button case 32a move downward from their initial positions, thereby elastically compressing the return elastic member 33a in the vertical direction. be. When the operator releases the button portion 3a from pressing, the restoring force of the restoring elastic member 33a pushes the button cover 31a and the button case 32a upward to return to their initial positions. The arrangement, shape and structure of the return elastic member 33a may be changed in various ways. Also, the return elastic member 33a may be an elastic member (for example, a plate spring or the like) other than the coiled spring.
 イネーブルスイッチ1aは、それぞれが接点4aを有する2つのマイクロスイッチ40aを備える。換言すれば、イネーブルスイッチ1aは、2つの接点4aを備え、各接点4aは、マイクロスイッチ40aの一部である。各マイクロスイッチ40aには、イネーブルスイッチ1aを他の装置と電気的に接続するための接続端子等も設けられる。2つの接点4aの構造は略同じであり、一方の接点4aは、他方の接点4aを、周方向に180°回転させた位置に配置される。 The enable switch 1a comprises two microswitches 40a each having a contact 4a. In other words, the enable switch 1a comprises two contacts 4a, each contact 4a being part of a microswitch 40a. Each microswitch 40a is also provided with a connection terminal or the like for electrically connecting the enable switch 1a to another device. The structure of the two contacts 4a is substantially the same, and one contact 4a is arranged at a position obtained by rotating the other contact 4a by 180° in the circumferential direction.
 図25は、一方の接点4a、および、当該接点4a近傍の一部の構成を示す正面図である。図25では、ボタン部3aおよびケース2aを破線で示す。接点4aは、2つの固定接点41aと、1つの移動接点42aと、接点移動機構43aとを備える。2つの固定接点41aは、上下方向に並んで配置される。移動接点42aは、2つの固定接点41aの間に配置され、2つの固定接点41aと上下方向に対向する。接点移動機構43aは、移動接点42aを上下方向に移動させる。接点移動機構43aは、移動接点42aを保持するレバー、当該レバーを回転可能に支持する回転軸、レバーに接続されるバネ等を備える公知の機構である。接点移動機構43aの構造は様々に変更されてよい。また、2つの固定接点41aは、必ずしも上下方向に並ぶ必要はなく、2つの固定接点41aおよび1つの移動接点42aの配置は様々に変更されてよい。さらには、接点4aの構造は、必ずしも2つの固定接点41aおよび1つの移動接点42aを有するものである必要はなく、様々に変更されてよい。 FIG. 25 is a front view showing the configuration of one contact 4a and part of the vicinity of the contact 4a. In FIG. 25, the button portion 3a and the case 2a are indicated by dashed lines. The contact 4a includes two fixed contacts 41a, one moving contact 42a, and a contact moving mechanism 43a. The two fixed contacts 41a are arranged side by side in the vertical direction. The moving contact 42a is arranged between the two fixed contacts 41a and vertically faces the two fixed contacts 41a. The contact moving mechanism 43a vertically moves the moving contact 42a. The contact moving mechanism 43a is a known mechanism including a lever that holds the moving contact 42a, a rotating shaft that rotatably supports the lever, a spring that is connected to the lever, and the like. The structure of the contact moving mechanism 43a may be changed variously. Also, the two fixed contacts 41a do not necessarily have to be arranged in the vertical direction, and the arrangement of the two fixed contacts 41a and the one moving contact 42a may be changed in various ways. Furthermore, the structure of the contact 4a does not necessarily have two fixed contacts 41a and one moving contact 42a, and may be modified in various ways.
 本実施の形態では、図25に示すように、移動接点42aが上側の固定接点41aと接触している状態が、接点4aが「開」の状態(すなわち、OFF状態)である。また、移動接点42aが下側の固定接点41aと接触している状態が、接点4aが「閉」の状態(すなわち、ON状態)である。なお、イネーブルスイッチ1aでは、移動接点42aが上側の固定接点41とa接触している状態が、接点4aが「閉」の状態であり、移動接点42aが下側の固定接点41aと接触している状態が、接点4aが「開」の状態であってもよい。 In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 25, the state in which the moving contact 42a is in contact with the upper fixed contact 41a is the "open" state (that is, the OFF state) of the contact 4a. The state in which the moving contact 42a is in contact with the lower fixed contact 41a is the "closed" state (that is, the ON state) of the contact 4a. In the enable switch 1a, the state in which the moving contact 42a is in contact with the upper fixed contact 41 is the "closed" state of the contact 4a, and the moving contact 42a is in contact with the lower fixed contact 41a. The contact 4a may be in the "open" state.
 接点機構5aは、ボタン部3aがケース2aに向かって押し込まれるに従って、接点4aの状態を「開」から「閉」に移行し、さらに「閉」から「開」に移行させる。なお、上述のように、接点4aの開閉状態(すなわち、ON-OFF状態)は逆であってもよい。すなわち、接点機構5aは、ボタン部3aがケース2aに向かって押し込まれるに従って、接点4aの状態を「開」および「閉」の一方から他方に移行し、さらに当該他方から当該一方に移行させる。 The contact mechanism 5a shifts the state of the contact 4a from "open" to "closed" and then from "closed" to "open" as the button portion 3a is pushed toward the case 2a. Incidentally, as described above, the open/close state (that is, the ON-OFF state) of the contact 4a may be reversed. That is, as the button portion 3a is pushed toward the case 2a, the contact mechanism 5a shifts the state of the contact 4a from one of "open" and "closed" to the other, and further shifts from the other to the one.
 図26は、接点機構5a、および、接点機構5a近傍の一部の部材を示す斜視図である。図20、図25および図26に示すように、接点機構5aは、上述の操作部材51aと、2つのスイッチ部材52aと、操作弾性部材53aとを備える。操作部材51aは、ボタン部3aのボタンケース32aにより、ボタンケース32aに対して相対移動可能に保持される。具体的には、操作部材51aは、ボタンケース32aの径方向内側に配置され、中心軸J2を中心とする周方向に回転可能な状態でボタンケース32aにより保持される。なお、ボタンケース32aは周方向には回転しない。操作部材51aは、第1可動部材であるボタン部3aにより保持される「第2可動部材」である。また、ボタンケース32aは、第2可動部材を保持する第2可動部材保持部である。 FIG. 26 is a perspective view showing the contact mechanism 5a and some members in the vicinity of the contact mechanism 5a. As shown in FIGS. 20, 25 and 26, the contact mechanism 5a includes the above-described operation member 51a, two switch members 52a, and an operation elastic member 53a. The operation member 51a is held by the button case 32a of the button portion 3a so as to be relatively movable with respect to the button case 32a. Specifically, the operation member 51a is arranged radially inward of the button case 32a, and is held by the button case 32a so as to be rotatable in the circumferential direction about the central axis J2. Note that the button case 32a does not rotate in the circumferential direction. The operation member 51a is a "second movable member" held by the button portion 3a, which is the first movable member. Further, the button case 32a is a second movable member holding portion that holds the second movable member.
 操作部材51aは、中心軸J2を中心として上下方向に延びる略筒状の部材である。操作部材51aは、上述の操作部材51(図5参照)と略同型状であり、操作部材本体511aと、2つの操作部材突出部512aとを備える。操作部材本体511aは、上下方向に延びる略筒状の部材である。図20に示す例では、操作部材本体511aは、中心軸J2を中心とする有底略円筒状の部材である。 The operation member 51a is a substantially cylindrical member that extends vertically around the central axis J2. The operation member 51a has substantially the same shape as the operation member 51 (see FIG. 5) described above, and includes an operation member main body 511a and two operation member projecting portions 512a. The operating member main body 511a is a substantially cylindrical member that extends vertically. In the example shown in FIG. 20, the operation member main body 511a is a substantially cylindrical member with a bottom centered on the central axis J2.
 図27は、操作部材51aの底面図である。操作部材本体511aの下端面513aには、当該底面から下方へと突出する凸部514aが設けられる。図27に示す例では、径方向に略直線状に延びる4つの凸部514aが、操作部材本体511aの下端面513aの外周部において、周方向に略等角度間隔にて配列される。 FIG. 27 is a bottom view of the operating member 51a. A lower end surface 513a of the operation member main body 511a is provided with a convex portion 514a projecting downward from the bottom surface. In the example shown in FIG. 27, four projections 514a extending substantially linearly in the radial direction are arranged at substantially equal angular intervals in the circumferential direction on the outer peripheral portion of the lower end surface 513a of the operation member main body 511a.
 図28は、ケース2aの平面図である。ケース2aの内部には、中心軸J2に略垂直な略平板状の仕切り板21aが設けられる。仕切り板21aは、ケース2aの上下方向の略中央部に設けられる。上述のマイクロスイッチ40a(図22参照)は、ケース2aの内部にて仕切り板21aの下側に配置される。操作部材本体511a(図27参照)の下部は、ケース2aの内部にて仕切り板21aの上側に配置される。仕切り板21aの上面は、操作部材本体511aの下端面513aと上下方向に対向する。仕切り板21aの上面には、当該上面から上方へと突出する凸部211aが設けられる。図28に示す例では、径方向に略直線状に延びる4つの凸部211aが、周方向に略等角度間隔にて配列される。仕切り板21aの4つの凸部211aは、中心軸J2を中心とする径方向において、操作部材本体511aの4つの凸部514aと略同じ位置に位置する。また、仕切り板21aの4つの凸部211aは、操作部材本体511aの4つの凸部514aから周方向にずれた位置に位置する。 FIG. 28 is a plan view of the case 2a. A substantially flat partition plate 21a substantially perpendicular to the central axis J2 is provided inside the case 2a. The partition plate 21a is provided substantially in the vertical center of the case 2a. The aforementioned microswitch 40a (see FIG. 22) is arranged below the partition plate 21a inside the case 2a. The lower portion of the operation member main body 511a (see FIG. 27) is arranged above the partition plate 21a inside the case 2a. The upper surface of the partition plate 21a vertically faces the lower end surface 513a of the operation member main body 511a. The upper surface of the partition plate 21a is provided with a convex portion 211a that protrudes upward from the upper surface. In the example shown in FIG. 28, four convex portions 211a extending substantially linearly in the radial direction are arranged at substantially equal angular intervals in the circumferential direction. The four projections 211a of the partition plate 21a are located at substantially the same positions as the four projections 514a of the operation member main body 511a in the radial direction about the central axis J2. Also, the four projections 211a of the partition plate 21a are positioned circumferentially displaced from the four projections 514a of the operation member main body 511a.
 図25ないし図27に示すように、2つの操作部材突出部512aは、操作部材本体511aの外側面の上端部から側方に突出する部位である。各操作部材突出部512aは、例えば、径方向に延びる略直方体状の部位である。2つの操作部材突出部512aは略同型状であり、一方の操作部材突出部512aは、他方の操作部材突出部512aを、周方向に180°回転させた位置に配置される。 As shown in FIGS. 25 to 27, the two operating member projecting portions 512a are portions that protrude sideways from the upper end portion of the outer surface of the operating member main body 511a. Each operation member projecting portion 512a is, for example, a substantially rectangular parallelepiped portion extending in the radial direction. The two operating member projecting portions 512a have substantially the same shape, and one operating member projecting portion 512a is arranged at a position obtained by rotating the other operating member projecting portion 512a by 180° in the circumferential direction.
 図26に示すように、操作部材本体511aは、ボタンケース32aの径方向内側に位置し、2つの操作部材突出部512aは、ボタンケース32aの2つの凹部34a内にそれぞれ位置する。操作部材突出部512aは、凹部34aを介してボタンケース32aから径方向外方へと突出する。図26に示す初期状態では、操作部材突出部512aは、凹部34aの下端面のうち第1端面341a(図24参照)の上方に位置する。操作部材51aは、中心軸J2を中心として回転可能にボタンケース32aにより保持されており、操作部材51aが回転する際には、操作部材突出部512aは凹部34a内を移動する。上述のように、操作部材51aを「第2可動部材」と呼ぶと、操作部材本体511aおよび操作部材突出部512aはそれぞれ、「第2可動部材本体」および「第2可動部材突出部」である。 As shown in FIG. 26, the operating member main body 511a is located radially inside the button case 32a, and the two operating member projecting portions 512a are located within the two concave portions 34a of the button case 32a. The operating member protrusion 512a protrudes radially outward from the button case 32a through the recess 34a. In the initial state shown in FIG. 26, the operating member projecting portion 512a is positioned above the first end surface 341a (see FIG. 24) of the lower end surface of the recess 34a. The operating member 51a is held by the button case 32a so as to be rotatable about the central axis J2. When the operating member 51a rotates, the operating member projecting portion 512a moves within the recess 34a. As described above, when the operating member 51a is called the "second movable member", the operating member main body 511a and the operating member protrusion 512a are respectively the "second movable member main body" and the "second movable member protrusion". .
 ボタンカバー31aの上述の突起部312a(図23参照)は、凹部34a内に位置する操作部材突出部512aに上側から接触する上カム部である。操作部材51aの下方への移動が制限されている状態で、ボタンカバー31aの突起部312aが操作部材突出部512aに直接的に接触して下向きに押すと、操作部材突出部512aに周方向の力が働き、操作部材51aが平面視における反時計回り方向に回転する。ボタンケース32aの凹部34aの下端面のうち第2端面342aは、操作部材突出部512aに下側から接触する下カム部である。換言すれば、凹部34aの下端面は下カム部を含む。操作部材51aの上方への移動が制限されている状態で、凹部34aの第2端面342aが操作部材突出部512aに直接的に接触して上向きに押すと、操作部材突出部512aに周方向の力が働き、操作部材51aが平面視における時計回り方向に回転する。 The above-described projecting portion 312a (see FIG. 23) of the button cover 31a is an upper cam portion that comes into contact with the operating member projecting portion 512a located inside the recessed portion 34a from above. When the projection 312a of the button cover 31a directly contacts the operation member protrusion 512a and pushes it downward while the downward movement of the operation member 51a is restricted, the operation member protrusion 512a is pushed downward. A force acts, and the operation member 51a rotates counterclockwise in plan view. A second end surface 342a of the lower end surface of the concave portion 34a of the button case 32a is a lower cam portion that contacts the operating member projecting portion 512a from below. In other words, the lower end surface of the recess 34a includes the lower cam portion. When the second end surface 342a of the recess 34a directly contacts the operating member protruding portion 512a and pushes it upward while the upward movement of the operating member 51a is restricted, the operating member protruding portion 512a is pushed upward in the circumferential direction. A force acts, and the operation member 51a rotates clockwise in plan view.
 図25に示す操作弾性部材53aは、操作部材51aの内部(すなわち、操作部材本体511aの径方向内側)に配置される。図25に示す状態では、操作弾性部材53aは、有底略円筒状の操作部材本体511aの内部空間に上方から挿入され、操作弾性部材53aの上部は操作部材本体511aの上端から上方へと突出している。操作弾性部材53aは、上下方向に弾性的に圧縮可能な部材である。操作弾性部材53aは、例えば、中心軸J2を略中心として上下方向に略平行に延びる弦巻バネである。図25では、便宜上、操作弾性部材53aを略円筒状に描いている。他の図においても同様である。 The operation elastic member 53a shown in FIG. 25 is arranged inside the operation member 51a (that is, radially inside the operation member main body 511a). In the state shown in FIG. 25, the operating elastic member 53a is inserted from above into the inner space of the bottomed substantially cylindrical operating member main body 511a, and the upper portion of the operating elastic member 53a protrudes upward from the upper end of the operating member main body 511a. ing. The operation elastic member 53a is a member that can be elastically compressed in the vertical direction. The operation elastic member 53a is, for example, a spiral spring that extends substantially parallel in the vertical direction about the central axis J2. In FIG. 25, the operation elastic member 53a is drawn in a substantially cylindrical shape for the sake of convenience. The same applies to other drawings.
 操作弾性部材53aの下端は、操作部材本体511aの底部に接触する。操作弾性部材53aは、操作部材51aにより下側から保持される。操作弾性部材53aの上端は、ボタンカバー31aの上面部311aの下面に接触する。すなわち、操作弾性部材53aは、ボタン部3aと操作部材51aとの間に配置される。また、操作部材51aは、操作弾性部材53aを下側から保持する弾性部材ホルダである。操作弾性部材53aは、ボタン部3aが操作弾性部材53aに対して相対的に下方に移動することにより、操作部材51aの内側において上下方向に圧縮される。なお、操作弾性部材53aの形状および構造は様々に変更されてよい。例えば、操作弾性部材53aは、弦巻バネ以外の弾性部材であってもよい。また、操作部材51aは、内部に操作弾性部材53aを収容する必要が無い場合、例えば、中心軸J2を中心とする略柱状の部材であってもよい。 The lower end of the operating elastic member 53a contacts the bottom of the operating member main body 511a. The operating elastic member 53a is held from below by the operating member 51a. The upper end of the operating elastic member 53a contacts the lower surface of the upper surface portion 311a of the button cover 31a. That is, the operating elastic member 53a is arranged between the button portion 3a and the operating member 51a. The operating member 51a is an elastic member holder that holds the operating elastic member 53a from below. The operating elastic member 53a is vertically compressed inside the operating member 51a by the button portion 3a moving downward relative to the operating elastic member 53a. The shape and structure of the operation elastic member 53a may be changed in various ways. For example, the operation elastic member 53a may be an elastic member other than the coiled spring. Further, if the operation member 51a does not need to contain the operation elastic member 53a, the operation member 51a may be, for example, a substantially columnar member centered on the central axis J2.
 2つのスイッチ部材52aは、それぞれ上下方向に延びる略矩形帯状の部材である。2つのスイッチ部材52aの形状は略同じであり、一方のスイッチ部材52aは、他方のスイッチ部材52aを周方向に180°回転させた位置に配置される。スイッチ部材52aは、ケース2aの仕切り板21a(図28参照)を上下方向に貫通した状態でケース2aにより保持されており、ケース2aに対して上下方向に相対移動可能である。図25に示す例では、スイッチ部材52aは、径方向に略垂直な略平板状の単一の部材である。スイッチ部材52aの内側面の下部には、径方向内方に向かって突出する突起部521aが設けられる。図26に示す初期状態では、2つのスイッチ部材52aはそれぞれ、2つの操作部材突出部512aの下方に位置し、2つの操作部材突出部512aの下端面に直接的に接触する。あるいは、スイッチ部材52aは、操作部材突出部512aの下端面との間に僅かな間隙をあけて、当該下端面に近接する。 The two switch members 52a are substantially rectangular band-shaped members extending in the vertical direction. The two switch members 52a have substantially the same shape, and one switch member 52a is arranged at a position obtained by rotating the other switch member 52a by 180 degrees in the circumferential direction. The switch member 52a is held by the case 2a while passing vertically through the partition plate 21a (see FIG. 28) of the case 2a, and is vertically movable relative to the case 2a. In the example shown in FIG. 25, the switch member 52a is a substantially flat plate-shaped single member that is substantially perpendicular to the radial direction. A projecting portion 521a projecting radially inward is provided on the lower portion of the inner surface of the switch member 52a. In the initial state shown in FIG. 26, the two switch members 52a are positioned below the two operating member projecting portions 512a and directly contact the lower end surfaces of the two operating member projecting portions 512a. Alternatively, the switch member 52a is close to the lower end surface of the operating member projecting portion 512a with a slight gap therebetween.
 操作部材突出部512aがスイッチ部材52aに上側から直接的に接触した状態で操作部材51aが下方へと移動すると、スイッチ部材52aは、操作部材突出部512aにより初期位置から押し下げられる。換言すれば、スイッチ部材52aは、操作部材突出部512aの移動に伴って下方へと変位する。スイッチ部材52aが初期位置から下方へと変位すると、接点移動機構43aの上記レバーの端部が、スイッチ部材52aの突起部521aによって押し下げられ、当該レバーが回転することにより移動接点42aが下方へと移動して下側の固定接点41aに接触する。これにより、マイクロスイッチ40aの接点4aの状態が「開」から「閉」に移行し、イネーブルスイッチ1aがON状態となる。 When the operating member 51a moves downward while the operating member projecting portion 512a is in direct contact with the switch member 52a from above, the switch member 52a is pushed down from the initial position by the operating member projecting portion 512a. In other words, the switch member 52a is displaced downward along with the movement of the operating member projecting portion 512a. When the switch member 52a is displaced downward from the initial position, the end of the lever of the contact moving mechanism 43a is pushed down by the protrusion 521a of the switch member 52a, and the lever rotates to move the movable contact 42a downward. It moves and contacts the fixed contact 41a on the lower side. As a result, the state of the contact 4a of the microswitch 40a is changed from "open" to "closed", and the enable switch 1a is turned on.
 接点4aの状態が「閉」のとき、接点移動機構43aにおいて上記バネが伸張状態となっている。このため、操作部材突出部512aがスイッチ部材52aの上方から退避し、スイッチ部材52aを押し下げる力が除去されると、当該バネの復元力により、上記レバーが回転して移動接点42aが上方へと移動する。移動接点42aは上側の固定接点41aと接触し、接点4aの状態が「閉」から「開」に移行し、イネーブルスイッチ1aがOFF状態となる。また、回転する当該レバーによりスイッチ部材52aが押し上げられ、初期位置へと戻る。 When the contact 4a is in the "closed" state, the spring in the contact moving mechanism 43a is in an extended state. Therefore, when the operating member projecting portion 512a retreats from above the switch member 52a and the force pushing down the switch member 52a is removed, the restoring force of the spring rotates the lever to move the moving contact 42a upward. Moving. The movable contact 42a comes into contact with the upper fixed contact 41a, the state of the contact 4a shifts from "closed" to "open", and the enable switch 1a is turned off. Also, the switch member 52a is pushed up by the rotating lever and returns to the initial position.
 このように、イネーブルスイッチ1aでは、スイッチ部材52aが変位することにより、接点4aの状態が「開」と「閉」との間で変更される。また、イネーブルスイッチ1aでは、2つのスイッチ部材52aに対して、操作部材51aの2つの操作部材突出部512aから付与される力が略同時に変化する。これにより、2つのスイッチ部材52aは互いに同期して変位し、2つの接点4aの状態を略同時に変更する。このため、2つの接点4aの状態は、互いに同期して移行される。 Thus, in the enable switch 1a, the state of the contact 4a is changed between "open" and "closed" by displacing the switch member 52a. Further, in the enable switch 1a, the forces applied from the two operating member projecting portions 512a of the operating member 51a to the two switch members 52a change substantially simultaneously. As a result, the two switch members 52a are displaced in synchronization with each other, and the states of the two contacts 4a are changed substantially simultaneously. Therefore, the states of the two contacts 4a are changed in synchronism with each other.
 次に、図29A~図32Aおよび図29B~図32Bを参照しつつ、イネーブルスイッチ1aが使用される際の各構成の動作について詳細に説明する。イネーブルスイッチ1aにおける各構成の動作は、上述のイネーブルスイッチ1における各構成の動作と略同様である。図29A~図31Aは、イネーブルスイッチ1aの正面図である。図29A~図31Aでは、ボタン部3aおよびケース2aを破線で示す。図29B~図31Bは、イネーブルスイッチ1aの一部の構成を示す平面図である。図29B~図31Bでは、ボタンケース32a、操作部材51aおよび2つのスイッチ部材52aを示す。図29Aおよび図29Bは、上述の第1ポジションに位置するイネーブルスイッチ1aを示す。図30Aおよび図30Bは、上述の第2ポジションに位置するイネーブルスイッチ1aを示す。図31Aおよび図31Bは、上述の第3ポジションに位置するイネーブルスイッチ1aを示す。 Next, with reference to FIGS. 29A to 32A and 29B to 32B, the operation of each configuration when the enable switch 1a is used will be described in detail. The operation of each component in the enable switch 1a is substantially the same as the operation of each component in the enable switch 1 described above. 29A to 31A are front views of the enable switch 1a. 29A to 31A, the button portion 3a and the case 2a are indicated by dashed lines. 29B to 31B are plan views showing the configuration of part of the enable switch 1a. 29B to 31B show button case 32a, operating member 51a and two switch members 52a. Figures 29A and 29B show enable switch 1a in the first position described above. Figures 30A and 30B show the enable switch 1a in the second position described above. Figures 31A and 31B show enable switch 1a in the third position described above.
 図32Aは、ボタン部3aが第1ポジションから第3ポジションへと移動する際におけるボタン部3aのストローク(mm)と、ボタン部3aの押し下げに要する操作荷重(N)との関係を示すグラフである。図32Bは、ボタン部3aのストローク(mm)と、マイクロスイッチ40aのストローク(mm)との関係を示すグラフである。図32Aおよび図32Bの横軸は、ボタン部3aのストロークを示し、横軸上における第1ポジション、第2ポジションおよび第3ポジションに相当する位置も併せて示す。図32Aおよび図32Bの縦軸はそれぞれ、ボタン部3aの上記操作荷重およびマイクロスイッチ40aのストロークを示す。図32Bでは、接点4aが「開」から「閉」に変化する際のマイクロスイッチ40aのストロークを示すOP点ストロークライン91、および、接点4aが「閉」から「開」に変化する際のマイクロスイッチ40aのストロークを示すRP点ストロークライン92を併せて示す。 FIG. 32A is a graph showing the relationship between the stroke (mm) of the button portion 3a when the button portion 3a moves from the first position to the third position and the operation load (N) required to press down the button portion 3a. be. FIG. 32B is a graph showing the relationship between the stroke (mm) of the button portion 3a and the stroke (mm) of the microswitch 40a. The horizontal axis of FIGS. 32A and 32B indicates the stroke of the button portion 3a, and also indicates positions corresponding to the first, second and third positions on the horizontal axis. The vertical axes in FIGS. 32A and 32B indicate the operation load of the button portion 3a and the stroke of the microswitch 40a, respectively. In FIG. 32B, the OP point stroke line 91 showing the stroke of the microswitch 40a when the contact 4a changes from "open" to "closed" and the micro switch 40a when the contact 4a changes from "closed" to "open". An RP point stroke line 92 indicating the stroke of the switch 40a is also shown.
 本実施の形態では、イネーブルスイッチ1aにおいてボタン部3aが押し込まれる際に、第1ポジションと第2ポジションとの間にて、接点4aの状態が「開」から「閉」に移行し、第2ポジションと第3ポジションとの間にて、接点4aの状態が「閉」から「開」に移行する。そして、ボタン部3aが第3ポジションから第1ポジションへと戻る際には、接点4aの状態は「開」のままで維持される。また、2つの接点4aの状態は、上述のイネーブルスイッチ1と同様に、およそ同期して移行される。 In this embodiment, when the button portion 3a of the enable switch 1a is pushed, the state of the contact 4a shifts from "open" to "closed" between the first position and the second position. The state of the contact 4a changes from "closed" to "open" between the position and the third position. When the button portion 3a returns from the third position to the first position, the contact 4a is maintained in the "open" state. Also, the states of the two contacts 4a are changed approximately synchronously, similar to the enable switch 1 described above.
 イネーブルスイッチ1aでは、ボタン部3aが、図29Aおよび図29Bに示す第1ポジションに位置している状態では、接点4aの状態は「開」であり、操作部材51aおよびボタンケース32aは、ケース2aの仕切り板21aから上方に離間している。ボタン部3aが第1ポジションから下方へと押し込まれると、復帰弾性部材33が上下方向に圧縮されるとともに、操作部材51aがボタンケース32aと共に下方へと移動する。このとき、操作部材51aは回転せず、ボタンケース32aに対する操作部材51aの相対位置は、図29Aおよび図29Bに示すものから変化しない。また、操作部材突出部512aはスイッチ部材52aと上下方向に重なっているため、スイッチ部材52aは操作部材51aと共に下方へと移動する。これにより、マイクロスイッチ40aのストロークが増大する。操作部材51aは、上述のイネーブルスイッチ1の操作部材51と略同様に、ケース2aに設けられた仮止め部(図示省略)に接触する。これにより、操作部材51aはケース2aに仮止めされ(すなわち、一旦係止され)、下方への移動が制限される。このとき、接点4aの状態は「開」のままである。 In the enable switch 1a, when the button portion 3a is positioned at the first position shown in FIGS. 29A and 29B, the contact 4a is in the "open" state, and the operating member 51a and the button case 32a are connected to the case 2a. is spaced upward from the partition plate 21a. When the button portion 3a is pushed downward from the first position, the return elastic member 33 is vertically compressed, and the operating member 51a moves downward together with the button case 32a. At this time, the operating member 51a does not rotate, and the relative position of the operating member 51a with respect to the button case 32a does not change from that shown in FIGS. 29A and 29B. Further, since the operating member projecting portion 512a vertically overlaps the switch member 52a, the switch member 52a moves downward together with the operating member 51a. This increases the stroke of the microswitch 40a. The operating member 51a contacts a temporary fixing portion (not shown) provided on the case 2a in substantially the same manner as the operating member 51 of the enable switch 1 described above. As a result, the operating member 51a is temporarily fixed (that is, temporarily locked) to the case 2a, and its downward movement is restricted. At this time, the state of the contact 4a remains "open".
 ボタン部3aがさらに下方へと押し込まれると、操作部材51aは下方への移動が制限されているため上下方向に移動せず、スイッチ部材52aも上下方向に移動しない。一方、ボタンカバー31aおよびボタンケース32aは、操作弾性部材53aを上下方向に圧縮しつつ下方へと移動する。このため、ボタン部3aのストロークは増大するが、マイクロスイッチ40aのストロークは変化しない。また、ボタン部3aの操作荷重は増大する。そして、ボタンカバー31aの突起部312a(図23参照)が、操作部材51aの操作部材突出部512aに上側から接触する。 When the button portion 3a is pushed further downward, the operation member 51a does not move vertically because its downward movement is restricted, and the switch member 52a does not move vertically either. On the other hand, the button cover 31a and the button case 32a move downward while vertically compressing the operating elastic member 53a. Therefore, the stroke of the button portion 3a increases, but the stroke of the microswitch 40a does not change. Moreover, the operation load of the button part 3a increases. Then, the projecting portion 312a (see FIG. 23) of the button cover 31a comes into contact with the operating member projecting portion 512a of the operating member 51a from above.
 ボタン部3aがさらに下方へと押し込まれると、操作部材51aは下方への移動が制限されているため上下方向に移動せず、ボタンカバー31aおよびボタンケース32aがさらに下方へと移動する。すなわち、ボタン部3aが操作部材51aに対して相対的にさらに下方へと移動され、操作弾性部材53aが上下方向にさらに圧縮される。また、ボタン部3aの操作部材51aに対する下方への相対移動により、操作部材突出部512aに上側から接触するボタンカバー31aの突起部312a(すなわち、上カム部)から、操作部材突出部512aに対して周方向の力が働き、操作部材51aが、図29Bに示す位置から図30Bに示す位置へと反時計回りに少し回転する。これにより、操作部材51aが上記仮止め部から外れ、操作部材51aの仮止めが解除される。 When the button portion 3a is pushed further downward, the operation member 51a does not move vertically because its downward movement is restricted, and the button cover 31a and the button case 32a move further downward. That is, the button portion 3a is moved further downward relative to the operating member 51a, and the operating elastic member 53a is further compressed in the vertical direction. Further, due to the downward relative movement of the button portion 3a with respect to the operation member 51a, the protrusion 312a (that is, the upper cam portion) of the button cover 31a that contacts the operation member protrusion 512a from above moves toward the operation member protrusion 512a. 29B to the position shown in FIG. 30B. As a result, the operating member 51a is released from the temporary fixing portion, and the temporary fixing of the operating member 51a is released.
 操作部材51aの仮止めが解除されると、操作部材51aの内部において上下方向に圧縮されている操作弾性部材53aの復元力により、操作部材51aが、一気に下方に移動する。また、操作部材突出部512aはスイッチ部材52aと上下方向に重なっており、スイッチ部材52aに上側から接触しているため、操作部材突出部512aからスイッチ部材52aに下向きの力が付与され、スイッチ部材52aが操作部材51aと共に一気に下方へと移動する。これにより、移動接点42aが一気に下方へと移動して下側の固定接点41aに接触する。すなわち、マイクロスイッチ40aのストロークは、OP点ストロークライン91を迅速に通過し、接点4aの状態が「開」から「閉」へと移行する。ボタン部3aの操作荷重は、操作弾性部材53aが復元する(すなわち、弾性復帰する)ことにより急激に低減される。 When the temporary fixing of the operating member 51a is released, the operating member 51a moves downward at once due to the restoring force of the operating elastic member 53a that is vertically compressed inside the operating member 51a. In addition, since the operation member projecting portion 512a overlaps the switch member 52a in the vertical direction and is in contact with the switch member 52a from above, a downward force is applied from the operation member projecting portion 512a to the switch member 52a. 52a moves downward at once together with the operation member 51a. As a result, the moving contact 42a moves downward at once and comes into contact with the lower fixed contact 41a. That is, the stroke of the microswitch 40a quickly passes through the OP point stroke line 91, and the state of the contact 4a changes from "open" to "closed." The operation load of the button portion 3a is rapidly reduced as the operation elastic member 53a restores (that is, elastically returns).
 イネーブルスイッチ1aでは、上述のように、操作部材51aの下降が極短時間で行われ、接点4aが「開」から「閉」へと極短時間で切り替えられる。したがって、一方の接点4aの「開」から「閉」への状態移行のタイミングと、他方の接点4aの「開」から「閉」への状態移行のタイミングとがずれることを抑制することができる。換言すれば、2つの接点4aの状態移行を略同時に行うことができる。また、ボタン部3aの操作荷重が一気に低減されることにより、接点4aの切替直前や切替中にボタン部3aの押し込みを中断することが難しくなるため、イネーブルスイッチ1aの誤操作を抑制することができる。 In the enable switch 1a, as described above, the operation member 51a is lowered in an extremely short time, and the contact 4a is switched from "open" to "closed" in an extremely short time. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the timing of the state transition from "open" to "closed" of one contact 4a and the timing of the state transition from "open" to "closed" of the other contact 4a. . In other words, the state transition of the two contacts 4a can be performed substantially simultaneously. In addition, since the operation load of the button portion 3a is reduced at once, it becomes difficult to interrupt the pressing of the button portion 3a immediately before or during switching of the contact 4a, so that erroneous operation of the enable switch 1a can be suppressed. .
 イネーブルスイッチ1aでは、2つの接点4aの状態移行が行われた後も、ボタン部3aはさらに下方へと押し込まれ、図30Aおよび図30Bに示す第2ポジションに位置する。ボタン部3aが第2ポジションに位置している状態では、操作部材51aの下端がケース2aの仕切り板21aの上面に接触しており、これにより、操作部材51aの下方への移動が制限される。また、ボタンケース32aは、仕切り板21aから上方に離間している。 In the enable switch 1a, even after the state transition of the two contacts 4a is performed, the button portion 3a is pushed further downward and positioned at the second position shown in FIGS. 30A and 30B. When the button portion 3a is positioned at the second position, the lower end of the operating member 51a is in contact with the upper surface of the partition plate 21a of the case 2a, thereby restricting the downward movement of the operating member 51a. . Further, the button case 32a is spaced upward from the partition plate 21a.
 ボタン部3aが、第2ポジションからさらに下方へと押し込まれると、操作部材51aはケース2aの仕切り板21aにより下方への移動が制限されているため上下方向には移動せず、ボタンカバー31aおよびボタンケース32aがさらに下方へと移動する。すなわち、ボタン部3aが操作部材51aに対して相対的にさらに下方へと移動する。これにより、操作弾性部材53aが上下方向に圧縮される。また、復帰弾性部材33aも上下方向に圧縮される。 When the button portion 3a is further pushed downward from the second position, the operation member 51a does not move vertically because its downward movement is restricted by the partition plate 21a of the case 2a. The button case 32a moves further downward. That is, the button portion 3a moves further downward relative to the operation member 51a. As a result, the operating elastic member 53a is vertically compressed. The return elastic member 33a is also compressed vertically.
 また、ボタン部3aの操作部材51aに対する下方への相対移動により、操作部材突出部512aに上側から接触するボタンカバー31aの突起部312a(図23参照)から、操作部材突出部512aに対して周方向の力が働き、操作部材51aが、ボタン部3aの下降に伴って反時計回りに回転する。これにより、操作部材突出部512aがスイッチ部材52aと上下方向に重なる位置から周方向にずれる。換言すれば、操作部材突出部512aがスイッチ部材52aの上方から側方へと退避し、操作部材突出部512aとスイッチ部材52aとの上下方向における重複が解消される。 In addition, due to the downward relative movement of the button portion 3a with respect to the operation member 51a, the protrusion 312a (see FIG. 23) of the button cover 31a that contacts the operation member protrusion 512a from above moves away from the operation member protrusion 512a. A directional force acts, and the operation member 51a rotates counterclockwise as the button portion 3a descends. As a result, the operation member projecting portion 512a is displaced in the circumferential direction from the position where it overlaps the switch member 52a in the vertical direction. In other words, the operation member projecting portion 512a retreats from above the switch member 52a to the side, and the overlap in the vertical direction between the operation member projecting portion 512a and the switch member 52a is eliminated.
 操作部材突出部512aがスイッチ部材52aの上方から退避すると、操作部材突出部512aからスイッチ部材52aに付与される下向きの力が失われ、接点移動機構43a(図25参照)の上記バネの復元力により、スイッチ部材52aが図30Aに示す位置から図31Aに示す位置近傍へと上方に移動する。また、接点移動機構43aにより移動接点42aが上方へと移動して上側の固定接点41aに接触する。すなわち、スイッチ部材52aの当該上向きの変位に伴って、図32Bに示すようにマイクロスイッチ40aのストロークが一気に減少し、接点4aの状態が「閉」から「開」へと移行する。 When the operating member projecting portion 512a retreats from above the switch member 52a, the downward force applied from the operating member projecting portion 512a to the switch member 52a is lost, and the restoring force of the spring of the contact moving mechanism 43a (see FIG. 25) is applied. As a result, the switch member 52a moves upward from the position shown in FIG. 30A to the vicinity of the position shown in FIG. 31A. Further, the moving contact 42a is moved upward by the contact moving mechanism 43a and comes into contact with the upper fixed contact 41a. That is, as the switch member 52a is displaced upward, the stroke of the microswitch 40a is suddenly reduced as shown in FIG. 32B, and the state of the contact 4a changes from "closed" to "open."
 イネーブルスイッチ1aでは、上述のように、第1ポジションと第2ポジションとの間にて操作部材51aが仮止めされるため、図32Bに示すOP点ストロークライン91がRP点ストロークライン92から上方に離間する。このように、接点4aがONになるタイミングを、OFFになるタイミングに比べて遅らせることにより、ヒステリシスを大きくすることができる。 In the enable switch 1a, as described above, the operation member 51a is temporarily fixed between the first position and the second position, so the OP point stroke line 91 shown in FIG. Separate. Thus, by delaying the timing at which the contact 4a is turned ON as compared with the timing at which it is turned OFF, the hysteresis can be increased.
 また、イネーブルスイッチ1aでは、操作部材51aを回転して操作部材突出部512aがスイッチ部材52aの上方から退避するよりも前に、操作部材本体511aの下端面513aに設けられた凸部514a(図27参照)と、ケース2aの仕切り板21aに設けられた凸部211a(図28参照)とが周方向にて接触する。操作部材51aをさらに回転させるためには、凸部514aが凸部211aを乗り越える必要がある。これにより、操作部材51aを回転させるために必要な力(すなわち、ボタン部3aの操作荷重)が、図32Aに示すように増大する。したがって、第2ポジションに位置するボタン部3aが誤って押し込まれ、接点4aの状態が意図に反して「閉」から「開」へと移行することを抑制することができる。 In addition, in the enable switch 1a, before the operation member 51a is rotated and the operation member projecting portion 512a is retracted from above the switch member 52a, the projection 514a (see FIG. 27) and the convex portion 211a (see FIG. 28) provided on the partition plate 21a of the case 2a are in contact with each other in the circumferential direction. In order to further rotate the operating member 51a, the convex portion 514a needs to climb over the convex portion 211a. As a result, the force required to rotate the operating member 51a (that is, the operating load of the button portion 3a) increases as shown in FIG. 32A. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the button portion 3a located at the second position from being pushed by mistake and the state of the contact 4a from changing from "closed" to "open" against the intention.
 スイッチ部材52aが上方へ移動した後、ボタン部3aがさらに下方へと押し込まれると、ボタンカバー31aおよびボタンケース32aがさらに下方へと移動して図31Aに示す第3ポジションに位置する。このとき、操作部材51aは、ケース2aの仕切り板21aに接触しており、下方への移動が制限されているため、上下方向には移動しない。すなわち、ボタン部3aは、操作部材51aに対して相対的にさらに下方へと移動し、操作弾性部材53aが上下方向にさらに圧縮される。また、操作部材突出部512aに上側から接触するボタンカバー31aの突起部312a(図23参照)から、操作部材突出部512aに対して周方向の力が働き、操作部材51aは反時計回りに回転して図31Bに示す位置へと移動する。 After the switch member 52a moves upward, when the button portion 3a is further pushed downward, the button cover 31a and the button case 32a move further downward to the third position shown in FIG. 31A. At this time, the operating member 51a is in contact with the partition plate 21a of the case 2a and is restricted from moving downward, so that it does not move vertically. That is, the button portion 3a moves further downward relative to the operating member 51a, and the operating elastic member 53a is further compressed in the vertical direction. In addition, a circumferential force acts on the operation member protrusion 512a from the protrusion 312a (see FIG. 23) of the button cover 31a that contacts the operation member protrusion 512a from above, and the operation member 51a rotates counterclockwise. to move to the position shown in FIG. 31B.
 イネーブルスイッチ1aでは、ボタン部3aが第3ポジションに位置している状態では、操作部材51aの下端およびボタンケース32aの下端が、仕切り板21aの上面に接触している。これにより、ボタン部3aが第3ポジションよりも下方へと移動することが防止される。 In the enable switch 1a, when the button portion 3a is positioned at the third position, the lower end of the operating member 51a and the lower end of the button case 32a are in contact with the upper surface of the partition plate 21a. This prevents the button portion 3a from moving below the third position.
 ボタン部3aが第3ポジションに位置する状態で、操作者がボタン部3aから手を離すと、復帰弾性部材33a(図29Aおよび図30A参照)の復元力により、ボタンカバー31aおよびボタンケース32aが、図29Aに示す第1ポジションへと上方に移動する。ボタン部3aが第3ポジションから上方に移動する際には、ボタン部3aと操作部材51aとの間において上下方向に圧縮されている操作弾性部材53aにより、操作部材51aに下向きの力が加わり、操作部材51aの上方への移動が制限される。このため、ボタンケース32aが操作部材51aに対して相対的に上方へと移動し、ボタンケース32aの凹部34aの第2端面342a(すなわち、下カム部)が、操作部材51aの操作部材突出部512aに下側から接触する。そして、第2端面342aから操作部材突出部512aに対して周方向の力が働き、操作部材51aは、図31Bに示す位置から図29Bに示す位置へと時計回りに回転する。なお、ボタン部3aが第3ポジションから上昇して第1ポジションへと戻る間、スイッチ部材52aに下向きの力は加わらず、接点4aの状態は「開」のままで維持される。 When the operator releases the button portion 3a while the button portion 3a is located at the third position, the button cover 31a and the button case 32a are pushed back by the restoring force of the return elastic member 33a (see FIGS. 29A and 30A). , moves up to the first position shown in FIG. 29A. When the button portion 3a moves upward from the third position, the operating elastic member 53a vertically compressed between the button portion 3a and the operating member 51a applies a downward force to the operating member 51a. The upward movement of the operating member 51a is restricted. Therefore, the button case 32a moves upward relative to the operation member 51a, and the second end surface 342a (that is, the lower cam portion) of the concave portion 34a of the button case 32a moves toward the operation member projecting portion of the operation member 51a. 512a is contacted from below. Then, a circumferential force acts from the second end face 342a to the operation member projecting portion 512a, and the operation member 51a rotates clockwise from the position shown in FIG. 31B to the position shown in FIG. 29B. While the button portion 3a is raised from the third position and returned to the first position, no downward force is applied to the switch member 52a, and the contact 4a remains in the "open" state.
 以上に説明したように、イネーブルスイッチ1aでは、上述のイネーブルスイッチ1と略同様に、接点機構5aが、第2可動部材(すなわち、操作部材51a)と、スイッチ部材52aとを備える。操作部材51aは、第1可動部材(すなわち、ボタン部3a)により保持され、ボタン部3aに対して相対的に移動可能である。スイッチ部材52aは、操作部材51aと直接的に接触し、操作部材51aの移動に伴って変位することにより接点4aの状態を変更する。ボタン部3aは、操作部材51aに上側から接触する上カム部(上記例では、ボタンカバー31aの突起部312a)と、操作部材51aに下側から接触する下カム部(上記例では、凹部34aの第2端面342a)と、を備える。 As described above, in the enable switch 1a, the contact mechanism 5a includes the second movable member (that is, the operating member 51a) and the switch member 52a, in substantially the same manner as the enable switch 1 described above. The operating member 51a is held by the first movable member (that is, the button portion 3a) and is relatively movable with respect to the button portion 3a. The switch member 52a is in direct contact with the operating member 51a, and changes the state of the contact 4a by being displaced as the operating member 51a moves. The button portion 3a includes an upper cam portion (the protrusion 312a of the button cover 31a in the above example) that contacts the operation member 51a from above, and a lower cam portion (the recess portion 34a in the above example) that contacts the operation member 51a from below. and a second end surface 342a) of
 イネーブルスイッチ1aでは、ボタン部3aが第1ポジションから第2ポジションへと押し込まれる際に、ボタン部3aと共に下方へと移動する操作部材51aによってスイッチ部材52aに力が付与されることにより、スイッチ部材52aが変位して接点4aの状態が一方から他方に(例えば、「開」から「閉に)移行する。また、ボタン部3aが第2ポジションから第3ポジションへと押し込まれる際に、操作部材51aの下方への移動が制限された状態で、上カム部が操作部材51aに上側から接触し、ボタン部3aの下降に伴って操作部材51aをボタン部3aに対して所定の第1方向へと相対移動させる(上記例では、反時計回りに回転させる)。これにより、操作部材51aからスイッチ部材52aに付与される下向きの力が失われてスイッチ部材52aが元の位置へと戻り、接点4aの状態が上記他方から上記一方に移行する。 In the enable switch 1a, when the button portion 3a is pushed from the first position to the second position, force is applied to the switch member 52a by the operation member 51a that moves downward together with the button portion 3a. 52a is displaced to shift the state of the contact 4a from one side to the other (for example, from "open" to "closed"), and when the button portion 3a is pushed from the second position to the third position, the operating member In a state in which the downward movement of 51a is restricted, the upper cam contacts the operating member 51a from above, and as the button portion 3a descends, the operating member 51a moves in a predetermined first direction relative to the button portion 3a. (In the above example, the switch member 52a is rotated counterclockwise.) As a result, the downward force applied from the operation member 51a to the switch member 52a is lost and the switch member 52a returns to its original position. The state of 4a shifts from the other to the one.
 イネーブルスイッチ1aでは、さらに、ボタン部3aが第3ポジションから第1ポジションへと戻る際に、スイッチ部材52aの位置(すなわち、ボタン部3aに対する相対位置)が維持された状態で、操作部材51aがボタン部3aと共に上方へと移動する。また、操作部材51aの上方への移動が制限された状態で、下カム部が操作部材51aに下側から接触し、ボタン部3aの上昇に伴って操作部材51aをボタン部3aに対して上記第1方向とは反対向きの第2方向へと相対移動させる(上記例では、時計回りに回転させる)。 In the enable switch 1a, when the button portion 3a returns from the third position to the first position, the operation member 51a is operated while the position of the switch member 52a (that is, the position relative to the button portion 3a) is maintained. It moves upward together with the button portion 3a. In addition, in a state in which the upward movement of the operating member 51a is restricted, the lower cam portion contacts the operating member 51a from below, and the operating member 51a moves above the button portion 3a as the button portion 3a rises. Relatively move in a second direction opposite to the first direction (rotate clockwise in the above example).
 このように、イネーブルスイッチ1aでは、ボタン部3aに保持された操作部材51aをスイッチ部材52aに直接的に接触させ、操作部材51aの移動に伴ってスイッチ部材52aを変位させることにより、第1ポジション、第2ポジションおよび第3ポジションにおける接点4aの状態の切り替えを実現している。これにより、イネーブルスイッチ1と略同様に、イネーブルスイッチ1aの部品点数を削減することができるとともに、イネーブルスイッチ1aを上下方向に小型化することができる。 As described above, in the enable switch 1a, the operation member 51a held by the button portion 3a is brought into direct contact with the switch member 52a, and the switch member 52a is displaced as the operation member 51a moves, whereby the switch member 52a is moved to the first position. , the switching of the state of the contact 4a between the second position and the third position. As a result, substantially the same as the enable switch 1, the number of parts of the enable switch 1a can be reduced, and the size of the enable switch 1a can be reduced in the vertical direction.
 上述のように、ボタン部3aは、上面部311aと、筒上の第2可動部材保持部(すなわち、ボタンケース32a)とを備えることが好ましい。上面部311aは、操作者がボタン部3aを押し込む際に触れる部位である。ボタンケース32aは、上面部311aから下方に延びるとともに、内側に操作部材51aを保持する。好ましくは、上カム部は、上面部311aの下面に設けられる。また、下カム部は、ボタンケース32aの側面に設けられた凹部34aの下端面である。これにより、ボタンケース32aに上カム部および下カム部の双方を設ける場合等に比べて、イネーブルスイッチ1aを上下方向にさらに小型化することができる。 As described above, the button portion 3a preferably includes the upper surface portion 311a and the tubular second movable member holding portion (that is, the button case 32a). The upper surface portion 311a is a portion that the operator touches when pushing the button portion 3a. The button case 32a extends downward from the upper surface portion 311a and holds the operation member 51a inside. Preferably, the upper cam portion is provided on the lower surface of the upper surface portion 311a. The lower cam portion is the lower end surface of the recess 34a provided on the side surface of the button case 32a. As a result, the enable switch 1a can be further miniaturized in the vertical direction as compared with the case where both the upper cam portion and the lower cam portion are provided in the button case 32a.
 次に、本発明の第3の実施の形態に係るイネーブルスイッチ1bについて説明する。図33は、イネーブルスイッチ1bを示す正面図である。図33では、初期状態のイネーブルスイッチ1bを示す。図34は、イネーブルスイッチ1bの分解斜視図である。イネーブルスイッチ1bは、Z方向(すなわち、上下方向)に延びる中心軸J3を中心とする略円柱状のスイッチである。イネーブルスイッチ1bは、上述のイネーブルスイッチ1aと同様、3ポジション・イネーブルスイッチである。イネーブルスイッチ1bは、上述の接点4aおよび接点機構5aとは異なる構造を有する接点4bおよび接点機構5bを備える点を除き、図19および図20に示すイネーブルスイッチ1aと略同様の構造を有する。すなわち、イネーブルスイッチ1bのケース2bおよびボタン部3bは、イネーブルスイッチ1aのケース2aおよびボタン部3aと略同様の構造を有する。 Next, an enable switch 1b according to a third embodiment of the present invention will be described. FIG. 33 is a front view showing the enable switch 1b. FIG. 33 shows the enable switch 1b in the initial state. FIG. 34 is an exploded perspective view of the enable switch 1b. The enable switch 1b is a substantially cylindrical switch centered on a central axis J3 extending in the Z direction (that is, in the vertical direction). The enable switch 1b is a three-position enable switch like the enable switch 1a described above. The enable switch 1b has substantially the same structure as the enable switch 1a shown in FIGS. 19 and 20 except that it has a contact 4b and a contact mechanism 5b having different structures from the contact 4a and the contact mechanism 5a described above. That is, the case 2b and the button portion 3b of the enable switch 1b have substantially the same structure as the case 2a and the button portion 3a of the enable switch 1a.
 イネーブルスイッチ1bでは、イネーブルスイッチ1aの2つのマイクロスイッチ40aに代えて、2つのタクティルスイッチ40bが設けられる。各タクティルスイッチ40bは、内部に接点4bが設けられる押しボタン44bを備える。各タクティルスイッチ40bは、当該押しボタン44bを側方(すなわち、中心軸J3を中心とする径方向外方)に向けて配置される。換言すれば、タクティルスイッチ40bでは、押しボタン44bの押圧面は径方向に略垂直であり、押しボタン44bの押し込み方向は径方向に略平行である。図34に示す例では、押しボタン44b(および、押しボタン44b内の接点4b)はX方向に向けられている。 The enable switch 1b is provided with two tactile switches 40b instead of the two microswitches 40a of the enable switch 1a. Each tactile switch 40b comprises a push button 44b in which the contact 4b is provided. Each tactile switch 40b is arranged with the push button 44b facing sideways (that is, radially outward about the central axis J3). In other words, in the tactile switch 40b, the pressing surface of the push button 44b is substantially perpendicular to the radial direction, and the pushing direction of the push button 44b is substantially parallel to the radial direction. In the example shown in FIG. 34, the push button 44b (and the contact 4b within the push button 44b) is oriented in the X direction.
 接点機構5bは、操作部材51bと、2つの第1スイッチ部材52bと、操作弾性部材53bと、2つの第2スイッチ部材54bと、2つのスイッチ弾性部材55bと、スイッチ支持部56bとを備える。操作部材51bおよび操作弾性部材53bは、イネーブルスイッチ1aの操作部材51aおよび操作弾性部材53aと略同様の構造を有し、操作部材51aおよび操作弾性部材53aと略同じ位置に配置される。操作部材51bは、操作部材51aと同様に、略円筒状の操作部材本体511bと、操作部材本体511bから径方向外方へと突出する2つの操作部材突出部512bとを備える。第1スイッチ部材52bは、イネーブルスイッチ1aのスイッチ部材52aと略同様の構造を有し、スイッチ部材52aと略同じ位置に配置される。第1スイッチ部材52bには、スイッチ部材52aと同様に、径方向内方に向かって突出する突起部521bが設けられる。 The contact mechanism 5b includes an operation member 51b, two first switch members 52b, an operation elastic member 53b, two second switch members 54b, two switch elastic members 55b, and a switch support portion 56b. The operating member 51b and the operating elastic member 53b have substantially the same structure as the operating member 51a and the operating elastic member 53a of the enable switch 1a, and are arranged at substantially the same positions as the operating member 51a and the operating elastic member 53a. Like the operating member 51a, the operating member 51b includes a substantially cylindrical operating member main body 511b and two operating member projecting portions 512b projecting radially outward from the operating member main body 511b. The first switch member 52b has substantially the same structure as the switch member 52a of the enable switch 1a, and is arranged at substantially the same position as the switch member 52a. Like the switch member 52a, the first switch member 52b is provided with a protrusion 521b that protrudes radially inward.
 スイッチ支持部56bは、中心軸J3を中心とする略円柱状の部材である。スイッチ支持部56bは、ケース2bの下側の開口からケース2b内に挿入され、ケース2bに取り付けられる。スイッチ支持部56bは、ケース2b内において、2つの第2スイッチ部材54b、2つのスイッチ弾性部材55b、および、2つのタクティルスイッチ40bを支持する。換言すれば、2つの第2スイッチ部材54b、2つのスイッチ弾性部材55b、および、2つのタクティルスイッチ40bは、スイッチ支持部56bを介してケース2bによって間接的に保持される。 The switch support portion 56b is a substantially cylindrical member centered on the central axis J3. The switch support portion 56b is inserted into the case 2b through an opening on the lower side of the case 2b and attached to the case 2b. The switch support portion 56b supports two second switch members 54b, two switch elastic members 55b, and two tactile switches 40b in the case 2b. In other words, the two second switch members 54b, the two switch elastic members 55b, and the two tactile switches 40b are indirectly held by the case 2b via the switch support portions 56b.
 図35および図36は、第1スイッチ部材52b近傍を示す平面図および斜視図である。第2スイッチ部材54bは、第1スイッチ部材52bよりも下側に位置する略平板状の部材である。第2スイッチ部材54bは、例えば、樹脂により形成されている。なお、第2スイッチ部材54bは、金属等の他の材料により形成されていてもよい。第2スイッチ部材54bの一部は、第1スイッチ部材52bの突起部521bに下側から接触している。第2スイッチ部材54bは、軸部541bと、フレーム部542bと、押圧部543bとを備える。軸部541bは、上下方向に略平行に延びる略円柱状の部位であり、上下方向の両端部がスイッチ支持部56bおよび/またはケース2bによって回転可能に保持される。軸部541bは、中心軸J3を中心とする周方向において、第1スイッチ部材52bから離れた位置に配置される。 35 and 36 are a plan view and a perspective view showing the vicinity of the first switch member 52b. The second switch member 54b is a substantially flat plate-shaped member located below the first switch member 52b. The second switch member 54b is made of resin, for example. The second switch member 54b may be made of other material such as metal. Part of the second switch member 54b is in contact with the protrusion 521b of the first switch member 52b from below. The second switch member 54b includes a shaft portion 541b, a frame portion 542b, and a pressing portion 543b. The shaft portion 541b is a substantially cylindrical portion that extends substantially parallel in the vertical direction, and both ends in the vertical direction are rotatably held by the switch support portion 56b and/or the case 2b. The shaft portion 541b is arranged at a position apart from the first switch member 52b in the circumferential direction about the central axis J3.
 フレーム部542bは、1つの辺にて軸部541bに接続された略矩形枠状の部位である。フレーム部542bの一対の辺は上下方向に略平行に延び、他の一対の辺は上下方向に略垂直に延びる。フレーム部542bは、軸部541bから第1スイッチ部材52bに向かって、周方向に沿って広がる。フレーム部542bは、平面視において、径方向外方に凸となるように湾曲している。フレーム部542bの軸部541bとは反対側の端部は、第1スイッチ部材52bの径方向内側に位置し、第1スイッチ部材52bの突起部521bに下側から直接的に接触している。 The frame portion 542b is a substantially rectangular frame-shaped portion connected to the shaft portion 541b at one side. A pair of sides of the frame portion 542b extends substantially parallel to the vertical direction, and the other pair of sides extends substantially perpendicular to the vertical direction. The frame portion 542b extends along the circumferential direction from the shaft portion 541b toward the first switch member 52b. The frame portion 542b is curved so as to protrude radially outward in plan view. The end portion of the frame portion 542b opposite to the shaft portion 541b is positioned radially inside the first switch member 52b and is in direct contact with the projecting portion 521b of the first switch member 52b from below.
 押圧部543bは、略矩形枠状のフレーム部542bの内側に位置する略矩形平板状の部位である。押圧部543bは、フレーム部542bのうち軸部541bに接続される1つの辺に連続し、他の3つの辺とは直接的には連続することなく離間している。押圧部543bは、当該1つの辺から周方向に沿って延びる。押圧部543bの軸部541bとは反対側の端部は、タクティルスイッチ40bの押しボタン44b(および、押しボタン44b内の接点4b)と径方向に対向する。押圧部543bの当該端部は、押しボタン44bに向かって径方向内方に突出している。押圧部543bの当該端部は、タクティルスイッチ40bの押しボタン44bから径方向外方に僅かに離間していてもよく、押しボタン44bに接触していてもよい。スイッチ弾性部材55bは、第1スイッチ部材52bの下側に配置され、第1スイッチ部材52bに下側から接触している。スイッチ弾性部材55bは、上下方向に弾性変形可能である。スイッチ弾性部材55bは、例えば、上下方向に略平行に延びる弦巻バネである。図35では、便宜上、スイッチ弾性部材55bを略円筒状に描いている。 The pressing portion 543b is a substantially rectangular plate-like portion located inside the substantially rectangular frame-shaped frame portion 542b. The pressing portion 543b is continuous with one side of the frame portion 542b that is connected to the shaft portion 541b, and is separated from the other three sides without being directly continuous. The pressing portion 543b extends along the circumferential direction from the one side. The end of the pressing portion 543b opposite to the shaft portion 541b radially faces the push button 44b (and the contact 4b within the push button 44b) of the tactile switch 40b. The end of the pressing portion 543b protrudes radially inward toward the push button 44b. The end of the pressing portion 543b may be slightly spaced radially outward from the push button 44b of the tactile switch 40b and may be in contact with the push button 44b. The switch elastic member 55b is arranged below the first switch member 52b and contacts the first switch member 52b from below. The switch elastic member 55b is elastically deformable in the vertical direction. The switch elastic member 55b is, for example, a spiral spring that extends substantially parallel to the vertical direction. In FIG. 35, the switch elastic member 55b is drawn in a substantially cylindrical shape for the sake of convenience.
 本実施の形態では、イネーブルスイッチ1bにおいてボタン部3bが押し込まれる際に、第1ポジションと第2ポジションとの間にて、接点4bの状態が「開」から「閉」に移行し、第2ポジションと第3ポジションとの間にて、接点4bの状態が「閉」から「開」に移行する。そして、ボタン部3bが第3ポジションから第1ポジションへと戻る際には、接点4bの状態は「開」のままで維持される。また、2つの接点4bの状態は、上述のイネーブルスイッチ1aと同様に、およそ同期して移行される。 In this embodiment, when the button portion 3b of the enable switch 1b is pushed, the state of the contact 4b shifts from "open" to "closed" between the first position and the second position, The state of the contact 4b changes from "closed" to "open" between the position and the third position. Then, when the button portion 3b returns from the third position to the first position, the state of the contact 4b remains "open". Also, the states of the two contacts 4b are changed approximately synchronously, similar to the enable switch 1a described above.
 イネーブルスイッチ1bでは、ボタン部3bが第1ポジションから第2ポジションへと押し込まれる際、第2ポジションから第3ポジションへと押し込まれる際、および、第3ポジションから第1ポジションへと復帰する際における操作部材51bおよび第1スイッチ部材52bの動作は、イネーブルスイッチ1aの操作部材51aおよびスイッチ部材52aの動作と略同様である。 In the enable switch 1b, when the button portion 3b is pushed from the first position to the second position, when pushed from the second position to the third position, and when returning from the third position to the first position, The operations of the operating member 51b and the first switch member 52b are substantially the same as those of the operating member 51a and the switch member 52a of the enable switch 1a.
 具体的には、ボタン部3bが第1ポジションから第2ポジションへと押し込まれる際には、イネーブルスイッチ1aと略同様に、操作部材51bの操作部材突出部512bから第1スイッチ部材52bに下向きの力が付与され、第1スイッチ部材52bが下方へと変位する。これにより、第1スイッチ部材52bの突起部521bと接触しているフレーム部542bの自由端部が、下方かつ径方向内方へと押され、第2スイッチ部材54bが軸部541bを中心として図36中の反時計回り方向に回転する。その結果、第2スイッチ部材54bの押圧部543bがタクティルスイッチ40bの押しボタン44bに対して付勢され、押しボタン44bが押し込まれて接点4bの状態が「開」から「閉」に移行する。また、第1スイッチ部材52bの下側に位置するスイッチ弾性部材55bが上下方向に圧縮される。 Specifically, when the button portion 3b is pushed from the first position to the second position, the operating member protruding portion 512b of the operating member 51b is directed downward to the first switch member 52b in substantially the same manner as the enable switch 1a. A force is applied and the first switch member 52b is displaced downward. As a result, the free end of the frame portion 542b, which is in contact with the protrusion 521b of the first switch member 52b, is pushed downward and radially inward, and the second switch member 54b is moved around the shaft portion 541b. 36 in the counterclockwise direction. As a result, the pressing portion 543b of the second switch member 54b is urged against the push button 44b of the tactile switch 40b, the push button 44b is pushed in, and the state of the contact 4b shifts from "open" to "close." . In addition, the switch elastic member 55b positioned below the first switch member 52b is vertically compressed.
 イネーブルスイッチ1bでは、第1スイッチ部材52bおよび第2スイッチ部材54b等により、上述のスイッチ部材(すなわち、第2可動部材である操作部材51bと直接的に接触し、操作部材51bの移動に伴って変位することにより接点4bの状態を変更するスイッチ部材)が構成される。換言すれば、当該スイッチ部材は、第1スイッチ部材52bおよび第2スイッチ部材54bを備える。 In the enable switch 1b, the first switch member 52b, the second switch member 54b, and the like make direct contact with the switch member (that is, the operation member 51b, which is the second movable member), and move as the operation member 51b moves. A switch member that changes the state of the contact 4b by being displaced is configured. In other words, the switch member comprises a first switch member 52b and a second switch member 54b.
 イネーブルスイッチ1bでは、イネーブルスイッチ1aと同様に、接点4bの状態が「開」から「閉」に移行するよりも前に、操作部材51bが仮止めされて下方への移動が制限された状態でボタン部3bが押し込まれた後、操作部材51bが少し回転することにより仮止めが解除される。仮止めが解除されると、操作部材51bの内部において上下方向に圧縮されている操作弾性部材53bの復元力によって、操作部材51bおよび第1スイッチ部材52bが一気に下方へと移動し、タクティルスイッチ40bの押しボタン44bが勢いよく押し込まれる。これにより、接点4bの状態が「開」から「閉」へと迅速に移行する。したがって、一方の接点4bの「開」から「閉」への状態移行のタイミングと、他方の接点4bの「開」から「閉」への状態移行のタイミングとがずれることを抑制することができる。換言すれば、2つの接点4bの状態移行を略同時に行うことができる。 In the enable switch 1b, as in the enable switch 1a, before the state of the contact 4b changes from "open" to "closed", the operating member 51b is temporarily fixed to restrict downward movement. After the button portion 3b is pushed in, the operation member 51b rotates slightly to release the temporary fixing. When the temporary fixation is released, the operating member 51b and the first switch member 52b move downward at once due to the restoring force of the operating elastic member 53b that is vertically compressed inside the operating member 51b, thereby turning the tactile switch into a tactile switch. The push button 44b of 40b is pushed forcefully. As a result, the state of the contact 4b is rapidly changed from "open" to "closed". Therefore, it is possible to suppress the deviation of the timing of the state transition from "open" to "closed" of one contact 4b and the timing of the state transition from "open" to "closed" of the other contact 4b. . In other words, the state transition of the two contacts 4b can be performed substantially simultaneously.
 また、イネーブルスイッチ1bでは、第2スイッチ部材54bの押圧部543bがタクティルスイッチ40bの押しボタン44bに対して付勢されて接点4bの状態が「開」から「閉」に移行した後も、操作部材51bから付与される下向きの力により第1スイッチ部材52bの下方への変位が継続される。このため、第2スイッチ部材54bの反時計回り方向への回転も継続され、フレーム部542bは、押圧部543bの周囲にて、押圧部543bに対して径方向内方へと相対的に変位する。換言すれば、押圧部543bがフレーム部542bから径方向外方へと突出するように、第2スイッチ部材54bが第1スイッチ部材52bと押しボタン44bとの間にて弾性変形する。すなわち、第2スイッチ部材54bは弾性変形可能な樹脂バネであり、ボタン部3bのストロークとタクティルスイッチ40bの押しボタン44bのストロークとの差(すなわち、ストローク差)を吸収するオーバーストローク吸収部材として機能する。これにより、タクティルスイッチ40bの押しボタン44bを押し込む際のボタン部3bのストロークを、所望量だけ大きくすることができる。その結果、イネーブルスイッチ1bの組立時の誤差等によって押しボタン44bの押し込みが不足して接点4bの移行不良が生じることを抑制することができる。 In addition, in the enable switch 1b, even after the pressing portion 543b of the second switch member 54b is urged against the push button 44b of the tactile switch 40b and the state of the contact 4b is changed from "open" to "closed." The downward force applied from the operating member 51b continues the downward displacement of the first switch member 52b. Therefore, the counterclockwise rotation of the second switch member 54b is also continued, and the frame portion 542b is relatively displaced radially inward with respect to the pressing portion 543b around the pressing portion 543b. . In other words, the second switch member 54b is elastically deformed between the first switch member 52b and the push button 44b so that the pressing portion 543b protrudes radially outward from the frame portion 542b. That is, the second switch member 54b is an elastically deformable resin spring, and serves as an overstroke absorbing member that absorbs the difference between the stroke of the button portion 3b and the stroke of the push button 44b of the tactile switch 40b (i.e., stroke difference). Function. As a result, the stroke of the button portion 3b when pushing the push button 44b of the tactile switch 40b can be increased by a desired amount. As a result, it is possible to prevent the contact 4b from failing to move due to insufficient pressing of the push button 44b due to an error or the like during assembly of the enable switch 1b.
 ボタン部3bが第2ポジションから第3ポジションへと押し込まれる際には、イネーブルスイッチ1aと略同様に、ボタン部3bが操作部材51bに対して相対的に下方へと移動する。これにより、操作部材突出部512bに上側から接触するボタンカバー31bの突起部312b(すなわち、上カム部)から、操作部材突出部512bに対して周方向の力が働き、操作部材51bが反時計回りに回転する。その結果、操作部材突出部512bが、第1スイッチ部材52bと上下方向に重なる位置から周方向にずれる。換言すれば、操作部材突出部512bが第1スイッチ部材52bの上方から側方へと退避し、操作部材突出部512bと第1スイッチ部材52bとの上下方向における重複が解消される。 When the button portion 3b is pushed from the second position to the third position, the button portion 3b moves downward relative to the operating member 51b, substantially similar to the enable switch 1a. As a result, a circumferential force acts on the operating member projecting portion 512b from the projecting portion 312b (that is, the upper cam portion) of the button cover 31b that contacts the operating member projecting portion 512b from above, and the operating member 51b rotates counterclockwise. rotate around. As a result, the operation member projecting portion 512b is displaced in the circumferential direction from the position vertically overlapping the first switch member 52b. In other words, the operating member projecting portion 512b retreats from above the first switch member 52b to the side, and the overlap in the vertical direction between the operating member projecting portion 512b and the first switch member 52b is eliminated.
 操作部材突出部512bが第1スイッチ部材52bの上方から退避すると、操作部材突出部512bから第1スイッチ部材52bに付与される下向きの力が失われ、スイッチ弾性部材55bの復元力により、第1スイッチ部材52bが上方に移動する。これにより、第2スイッチ部材54bを径方向内方へと押し込む力が失われ、タクティルスイッチ40bの押しボタン44bの復元力により、第2スイッチ部材54bが図36中の時計回り方向に回転して元の位置へ戻るとともに、接点4bの状態が「閉」から「開」へと移行する。 When the operating member projecting portion 512b retreats from above the first switch member 52b, the downward force applied from the operating member projecting portion 512b to the first switch member 52b is lost, and the restoring force of the switch elastic member 55b causes the first switch member 52b to move downward. The switch member 52b moves upward. As a result, the force for pushing the second switch member 54b radially inward is lost, and the restoring force of the push button 44b of the tactile switch 40b causes the second switch member 54b to rotate clockwise in FIG. The state of the contact 4b is changed from "closed" to "open".
 ボタン部3bが第3ポジションに位置する状態で、操作者がボタン部3bから手を離すと、復帰弾性部材33bの復元力により、ボタンカバー31bおよびボタンケース32bが上方へと移動して第1ポジションへと移動する。ボタン部3bが第3ポジションから上方に移動する際には、ボタン部3bと操作部材51bとの間において上下方向に圧縮されている操作弾性部材53bにより、操作部材51bに下向きの力が加わり、操作部材51bの上方への移動が制限される。このため、ボタンケース32bが操作部材51bに対して相対的に上方へと移動し、ボタンケース32bの凹部34bの第2端面342b(すなわち、下カム部)が、操作部材51bの操作部材突出部512bに下側から接触する。そして、第2端面342bから操作部材突出部512bに対して周方向の力が働き、操作部材51bが回転して初期状態の位置へと戻る。なお、ボタン部3bが第3ポジションから上昇して第1ポジションへと戻る間、第1スイッチ部材52bに下向きの力は加わらず、接点4bの状態は「開」のままで維持される。 When the operator releases the button portion 3b while the button portion 3b is in the third position, the restoring force of the return elastic member 33b causes the button cover 31b and the button case 32b to move upward to the first position. move to a position. When the button portion 3b moves upward from the third position, a downward force is applied to the operating member 51b by the operating elastic member 53b, which is vertically compressed between the button portion 3b and the operating member 51b. The upward movement of the operating member 51b is restricted. Therefore, the button case 32b moves upward relative to the operation member 51b, and the second end surface 342b (that is, the lower cam portion) of the concave portion 34b of the button case 32b moves toward the operation member projecting portion of the operation member 51b. 512b is contacted from below. Then, a circumferential force acts on the operation member projecting portion 512b from the second end surface 342b, and the operation member 51b rotates and returns to the initial position. While the button portion 3b is raised from the third position and returned to the first position, no downward force is applied to the first switch member 52b, and the contact 4b is maintained in the "open" state.
 以上に説明したように、イネーブルスイッチ1bでは、上述のイネーブルスイッチ1aと略同様に、接点機構5bが、第2可動部材(すなわち、操作部材51b)と、スイッチ部材(上記例では、第1スイッチ部材52bおよび第2スイッチ部材54b)とを備える。操作部材51bは、第1可動部材(すなわち、ボタン部3b)により保持され、ボタン部3bに対して相対的に移動可能である。上記スイッチ部材は、操作部材51bと直接的に接触し、操作部材51bの移動に伴って変位することにより接点4bの状態を変更する。ボタン部3bは、操作部材51bに上側から接触する上カム部(上記例では、ボタンカバー31bの突起部312b)と、操作部材51bに下側から接触する下カム部(上記例では、凹部34bの第2端面342b)と、を備える。 As described above, in the enable switch 1b, substantially similar to the enable switch 1a described above, the contact mechanism 5b includes the second movable member (that is, the operation member 51b) and the switch member (in the above example, the first switch a member 52b and a second switch member 54b). The operating member 51b is held by the first movable member (that is, the button portion 3b) and is relatively movable with respect to the button portion 3b. The switch member changes the state of the contact 4b by being in direct contact with the operating member 51b and being displaced as the operating member 51b moves. The button portion 3b includes an upper cam portion (the protrusion 312b of the button cover 31b in the above example) that contacts the operation member 51b from above, and a lower cam portion (the recess portion 34b in the above example) that contacts the operation member 51b from below. and a second end face 342b) of the
 イネーブルスイッチ1bでは、ボタン部3bが第1ポジションから第2ポジションへと押し込まれる際に、ボタン部3bと共に下方へと移動する操作部材51bによってスイッチ部材に力が付与されることにより、スイッチ部材が変位して接点4bの状態が一方から他方に(例えば、「開」から「閉に)移行する。また、ボタン部3bが第2ポジションから第3ポジションへと押し込まれる際に、操作部材51bの下方への移動が制限された状態で、上カム部が操作部材51bに上側から接触し、ボタン部3bの下降に伴って操作部材51bをボタン部3bに対して所定の第1方向へと相対移動させる(上記例では、反時計回りに回転させる)。これにより、操作部材51bからスイッチ部材に付与される下向きの力が失われてスイッチ部材が元の位置へと戻り、接点4bの状態が上記他方から上記一方に移行する。 In the enable switch 1b, when the button portion 3b is pushed from the first position to the second position, force is applied to the switch member by the operation member 51b that moves downward together with the button portion 3b. When the button portion 3b is pushed from the second position to the third position, the state of the contact 4b is changed from one to the other (for example, from “open” to “closed”). In a state in which downward movement is restricted, the upper cam contacts the operating member 51b from above, and the operating member 51b moves relative to the button 3b in the predetermined first direction as the button 3b descends. (In the above example, it is rotated counterclockwise.) As a result, the downward force applied to the switch member from the operating member 51b is lost and the switch member returns to its original position, and the state of the contact 4b is restored. Transition from the other to the one.
 イネーブルスイッチ1bでは、さらに、ボタン部3bが第3ポジションから第1ポジションへと戻る際に、スイッチ部材の位置(すなわち、ボタン部3bに対する相対位置)が維持された状態で、操作部材51bがボタン部3bと共に上方へと移動する。また、操作部材51bの上方への移動が制限された状態で、下カム部が操作部材51bに下側から接触し、ボタン部3bの上昇に伴って操作部材51bをボタン部3bに対して上記第1方向とは反対向きの第2方向へと相対移動させる(上記例では、時計回りに回転させる)。 Further, in the enable switch 1b, when the button portion 3b returns from the third position to the first position, the operation member 51b is moved to the button while the position of the switch member (that is, the position relative to the button portion 3b) is maintained. It moves upward together with the part 3b. In addition, in a state in which the upward movement of the operating member 51b is restricted, the lower cam portion contacts the operating member 51b from below, and the operating member 51b is moved above the button portion 3b as the button portion 3b rises. Relatively move in a second direction opposite to the first direction (rotate clockwise in the above example).
 このように、イネーブルスイッチ1bでは、ボタン部3bに保持された操作部材51bをスイッチ部材に直接的に接触させ、操作部材51bの移動に伴ってスイッチ部材を変位させることにより、第1ポジション、第2ポジションおよび第3ポジションにおける接点4bの状態の切り替えを実現している。これにより、イネーブルスイッチ1aと略同様に、イネーブルスイッチ1bの部品点数を削減することができるとともに、イネーブルスイッチ1bを上下方向に小型化することができる。 As described above, in the enable switch 1b, the operation member 51b held by the button portion 3b is brought into direct contact with the switch member, and the switch member is displaced as the operation member 51b is moved, whereby the first position and the second position are selected. Switching of the state of the contact 4b between the 2nd position and the 3rd position is realized. As a result, substantially the same as the enable switch 1a, the number of parts of the enable switch 1b can be reduced, and the size of the enable switch 1b can be reduced in the vertical direction.
 上述のように、接点4bは、押しボタン44bを側方に向けて配置されるタクティルスイッチ40bの当該押しボタン44bの内部に配置されることが好ましい。また、上記スイッチ部材は、操作部材51bに直接的に接触する第1スイッチ部材52bと、第1スイッチ部材52bとタクティルスイッチ40bの上記押しボタン44bとの間に配置される第2スイッチ部材54bと、を備えることが好ましい。そして、ボタン部3bが第1ポジションから第2ポジションへと押し込まれる際に、操作部材51bから付与される力により変位する第1スイッチ部材52bによって、第2スイッチ部材54bがタクティルスイッチ40bの押しボタン44bに対して付勢され、接点4bの状態が上記一方から上記他方に移行する。このように、ボタン部3bによって押しボタン44bを押し込む際のストロークの一部を、上下方向に略垂直な方向とすることにより、イネーブルスイッチ1bを上下方向においてさらに小型化することができる。 As described above, the contact 4b is preferably arranged inside the push button 44b of the tactile switch 40b arranged with the push button 44b facing sideways. Moreover, the switch member includes a first switch member 52b that directly contacts the operation member 51b and a second switch member 54b that is arranged between the first switch member 52b and the push button 44b of the tactile switch 40b. and preferably. When the button portion 3b is pushed from the first position to the second position, the first switch member 52b displaced by the force applied from the operation member 51b causes the second switch member 54b to push the tactile switch 40b. The button 44b is urged to change the state of the contact 4b from the one to the other. In this way, by making part of the stroke when pushing the push button 44b by the button portion 3b substantially perpendicular to the vertical direction, the enable switch 1b can be further miniaturized in the vertical direction.
 上述のように、好ましくは、ボタン部3bが第1ポジションから第2ポジションへと押し込まれる際に、第2スイッチ部材54bが押しボタン44bに対して付勢された後も、操作部材51bから付与される力による第1スイッチ部材52bの変位が継続され、第2スイッチ部材54bが第1スイッチ部材52bと押しボタン44bとの間にて弾性変形する。このように、第2スイッチ部材54bが上記ストローク差を吸収するオーバーストローク吸収部材として機能することにより、操作部材51bのストロークを大きくすることができる。その結果、イネーブルスイッチ1bの組立時の誤差等によって押しボタン44bの押圧が不足して接点4bの移行不良が生じることを抑制することができる。 As described above, preferably, when the button portion 3b is pushed from the first position to the second position, even after the second switch member 54b is urged against the push button 44b, the pressure applied from the operating member 51b is preferably The applied force continues to displace the first switch member 52b, and the second switch member 54b is elastically deformed between the first switch member 52b and the push button 44b. In this manner, the second switch member 54b functions as an overstroke absorbing member that absorbs the stroke difference, thereby increasing the stroke of the operating member 51b. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of poor transition of the contact 4b due to insufficient pressing of the push button 44b due to an error or the like during assembly of the enable switch 1b.
 次に、本発明の第4の実施の形態に係るイネーブルスイッチ1cについて説明する。図37は、イネーブルスイッチ1cを示す正面図である。図37では、初期状態のイネーブルスイッチ1cを示す。図38は、イネーブルスイッチ1cの分解斜視図である。イネーブルスイッチ1cは、Z方向(すなわち、上下方向)に延びる中心軸J4を中心とする略円柱状のスイッチである。イネーブルスイッチ1cは、上述のイネーブルスイッチ1aと同様、3ポジション・イネーブルスイッチである。イネーブルスイッチ1cは、上述の接点4aおよび接点機構5aとは異なる構造を有する接点4cおよび接点機構5cを備える点を除き、図19および図20に示すイネーブルスイッチ1aと略同様の構造を有する。すなわち、イネーブルスイッチ1cのケース2cおよびボタン部3cは、イネーブルスイッチ1aのケース2aおよびボタン部3aと略同様の構造を有する。 Next, an enable switch 1c according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described. FIG. 37 is a front view showing the enable switch 1c. FIG. 37 shows the enable switch 1c in the initial state. FIG. 38 is an exploded perspective view of the enable switch 1c. The enable switch 1c is a substantially cylindrical switch centered on a central axis J4 extending in the Z direction (that is, in the vertical direction). The enable switch 1c is a three-position enable switch like the enable switch 1a described above. The enable switch 1c has substantially the same structure as the enable switch 1a shown in FIGS. 19 and 20 except that it has a contact 4c and a contact mechanism 5c having different structures from the contact 4a and the contact mechanism 5a described above. That is, the case 2c and the button portion 3c of the enable switch 1c have substantially the same structure as the case 2a and the button portion 3a of the enable switch 1a.
 イネーブルスイッチ1cでは、イネーブルスイッチ1aの2つのマイクロスイッチ40aに代えて、2つの接点4cが設けられる。2つの接点4cの構造は略同じであり、一方の接点4cは、他方の接点4cを、周方向に180°回転させた位置に配置される。図39は、一方の接点4c、および、当該接点4c近傍の一部の部材を示す側面図である。図39では、ボタン部3cおよびケース2cを破線で示す。後述する図41および図42においても同様である。図40は、当該接点4c、および、接点4c近傍の一部の構成を示す斜視図である。各接点4cは、固定端子45cと、導電性弾性部材46cとを備える。図39および図40に示す例では、各接点4cは、一対の固定端子45cおよび1つの導電性弾性部材46cにより構成される。導電性弾性部材46cおよび固定端子45cは、導電性の部材であり、例えば金属により形成されている。 The enable switch 1c is provided with two contacts 4c instead of the two microswitches 40a of the enable switch 1a. The structure of the two contacts 4c is substantially the same, and one contact 4c is arranged at a position obtained by rotating the other contact 4c by 180° in the circumferential direction. FIG. 39 is a side view showing one contact 4c and some members in the vicinity of the contact 4c. In FIG. 39, the button portion 3c and the case 2c are indicated by dashed lines. The same applies to FIGS. 41 and 42 to be described later. FIG. 40 is a perspective view showing the configuration of the contact 4c and part of the vicinity of the contact 4c. Each contact 4c has a fixed terminal 45c and a conductive elastic member 46c. In the examples shown in FIGS. 39 and 40, each contact 4c is composed of a pair of fixed terminals 45c and one conductive elastic member 46c. The conductive elastic member 46c and the fixed terminal 45c are conductive members, and are made of metal, for example.
 固定端子45cは、Y方向に略垂直な平板状の部材ある。図40に示す例では、固定端子45cは、上下方向(すなわち、Z方向)に沿って伸びる略矩形帯状の部材である。固定端子45cの上部には、固定端子45cの上端縁から下方へと延びるスリット451cが設けられる。 The fixed terminal 45c is a plate-like member substantially perpendicular to the Y direction. In the example shown in FIG. 40, the fixed terminal 45c is a substantially rectangular band-shaped member extending along the vertical direction (that is, the Z direction). A slit 451c extending downward from the upper edge of the fixed terminal 45c is provided in the upper portion of the fixed terminal 45c.
 各接点4cの一対の固定端子45cは、互いに離間した状態でY方向に配列され、端子支持部56cに取り付けられている。一対の固定端子45cは、略平行に配置されており、一対の固定端子45c間のY方向における距離(すなわち、一対の固定端子45cの間隔)は、Z方向の略全長に亘って略一定である。端子支持部56cは、中心軸J4を中心とする有底略円筒状の部材である。端子支持部56cは、ケース2cの下側の開口からケース2c内に挿入され、ケース2cに取り付けられる。これにより、各接点4cの一対の固定端子45cが、端子支持部56cを介してケース2cに間接的に固定される。各固定端子45cの下端部は、ケース2cの下端から下方へと突出する。なお、固定端子45cはケース2cに直接的に固定されていてもよい。また、端子支持部56cは、ケース2cの一部と捉えられてもよい。 A pair of fixed terminals 45c of each contact 4c are arranged in the Y direction while being spaced apart from each other, and attached to the terminal support portion 56c. The pair of fixed terminals 45c are arranged substantially parallel, and the distance between the pair of fixed terminals 45c in the Y direction (that is, the distance between the pair of fixed terminals 45c) is substantially constant over substantially the entire length in the Z direction. be. The terminal support portion 56c is a substantially cylindrical member with a bottom centered on the central axis J4. The terminal support portion 56c is inserted into the case 2c through an opening on the lower side of the case 2c and attached to the case 2c. Thereby, the pair of fixed terminals 45c of each contact 4c is indirectly fixed to the case 2c via the terminal support portion 56c. A lower end portion of each fixed terminal 45c protrudes downward from the lower end of the case 2c. Note that the fixed terminal 45c may be directly fixed to the case 2c. Also, the terminal support portion 56c may be regarded as part of the case 2c.
 図39および図40に示す例では、導電性弾性部材46cは、導電性の線状部材により形成された線バネの一種であるねじりコイルバネである。導電性弾性部材46cは、コイル部461cと、一対の腕部462cとを備える。コイル部461cは、上記線状部材がコイル状または円周状に巻回された部位である。コイル部461cの中心軸はX方向に略平行である。コイル部461cのY方向における直径は、一対の固定端子45cの間隔よりも小さい。また、各腕部462cの太さ(すなわち、上記線状部材の直径)は、固定端子45cのスリット451cのX方向の幅よりも大きい。 In the examples shown in FIGS. 39 and 40, the conductive elastic member 46c is a torsion coil spring, which is a type of wire spring formed of conductive linear members. The conductive elastic member 46c includes a coil portion 461c and a pair of arm portions 462c. The coil portion 461c is a portion in which the linear member is wound in a coil shape or a circumferential shape. The central axis of the coil portion 461c is substantially parallel to the X direction. The diameter of the coil portion 461c in the Y direction is smaller than the interval between the pair of fixed terminals 45c. Also, the thickness of each arm portion 462c (that is, the diameter of the linear member) is larger than the width in the X direction of the slit 451c of the fixed terminal 45c.
 一対の腕部462cは、コイル部461cに連続しており、コイル部461cから上方に向かって互いに離れるように延びる。各腕部462cは、第1腕部463cと、第2腕部464cと、第3腕部465cとを備える。第1腕部463cは、コイル部461cから上方に向かって斜め外方へと延びる。第2腕部464cは、第1腕部463cの上端部に連続しており、第1腕部463cの上端部から上方に向かって斜め内方へと延びる。換言すれば、第2腕部464cは、第1腕部463cのうちコイル部461cとは反対側の端部から、コイル部461cとは反対側に向かって斜め内方へと延びる。 The pair of arm portions 462c are continuous with the coil portion 461c and extend upward from the coil portion 461c so as to separate from each other. Each arm 462c comprises a first arm 463c, a second arm 464c and a third arm 465c. The first arm portion 463c extends obliquely outward upward from the coil portion 461c. The second arm portion 464c is continuous with the upper end portion of the first arm portion 463c and extends obliquely inward upward from the upper end portion of the first arm portion 463c. In other words, the second arm portion 464c extends obliquely inward from the end of the first arm portion 463c opposite to the coil portion 461c toward the opposite side to the coil portion 461c.
 腕部462cは、第1腕部463cと第2腕部464cとの接続部において屈曲している。以下の説明では、第1腕部463cと第2腕部464cとの接続部を「屈曲部466c」とも呼ぶ。一対の腕部462cにおける屈曲部466c間のY方向の距離は、コイル部461cのY方向における直径よりも大きい。第3腕部465cは、第2腕部464cの上端部に連続しており、第2腕部464cの上端部から上方に延びる。一対の腕部462cにおける第2腕部464cと第3腕部465cとの接続部(すなわち、第2腕部464cの上端部)間のY方向の距離は、例えば、コイル部461cのY方向における直径よりも大きい。 The arm portion 462c is bent at the connecting portion between the first arm portion 463c and the second arm portion 464c. In the following description, the connecting portion between the first arm portion 463c and the second arm portion 464c will also be referred to as the "flexion portion 466c". The Y-direction distance between the bent portions 466c of the pair of arm portions 462c is greater than the Y-direction diameter of the coil portion 461c. The third arm portion 465c is continuous with the upper end portion of the second arm portion 464c and extends upward from the upper end portion of the second arm portion 464c. The distance in the Y direction between the connection portion between the second arm portion 464c and the third arm portion 465c in the pair of arm portions 462c (that is, the upper end portion of the second arm portion 464c) is, for example, larger than the diameter.
 図39に示す例では、一方の腕部462cでは、第1腕部463cがコイル部461cの(+Y)側の端部近傍から(+Y)方向かつ(+Z)方向へと延び、コイル部461cの上端よりも上方において第2腕部464cに連続する。第2腕部464cは、第1腕部463cの(+Z)側の端部から(-Y)方向かつ(+Z)方向へと延び、第3腕部465cは、第2腕部464cの(+Z)側の端部から(+Z)方向へと延びる。また、他方の腕部462cでは、第1腕部463cがコイル部461cの(-Y)側の端部近傍から(-Y)方向かつ(+Z)方向へと延び、コイル部461cの上端よりも上方において第2腕部464cと連続する。第2腕部464cは、第1腕部463cの(+Z)側の端部から(+Y)方向かつ(+Z)方向へと延び、第3腕部465cは、第2腕部464cの(+Z)側の端部から(+Z)方向へと延びる。 In the example shown in FIG. 39, in one arm portion 462c, the first arm portion 463c extends in the (+Y) direction and the (+Z) direction from the vicinity of the (+Y) side end of the coil portion 461c. Above the upper end, it continues to the second arm portion 464c. The second arm portion 464c extends from the (+Z) side end of the first arm portion 463c in the (−Y) direction and the (+Z) direction, and the third arm portion 465c extends from the (+Z) side end of the second arm portion 464c. ) side end in the (+Z) direction. In the other arm portion 462c, the first arm portion 463c extends in the (-Y) direction and the (+Z) direction from the vicinity of the (-Y) side end of the coil portion 461c, and extends from the upper end of the coil portion 461c. It is continuous with the second arm portion 464c above. The second arm portion 464c extends from the (+Z) side end of the first arm portion 463c in the (+Y) direction and the (+Z) direction, and the third arm portion 465c extends from the (+Z) side of the second arm portion 464c. It extends in the (+Z) direction from the side end.
 接点機構5cは、操作部材51cと、2つのスイッチ部材52cと、操作弾性部材53cと、2つのスイッチ弾性部材55cとを備える。操作部材51cおよび操作弾性部材53cは、イネーブルスイッチ1aの操作部材51aおよび操作弾性部材53aと略同様の構造を有し、操作部材51aおよび操作弾性部材53aと略同じ位置に配置される。操作部材51cは、操作部材51aと同様に、略円筒状の操作部材本体511cと、操作部材本体511cから径方向外方へと突出する2つの操作部材突出部512cとを備える。 The contact mechanism 5c includes an operating member 51c, two switch members 52c, an operating elastic member 53c, and two switch elastic members 55c. The operating member 51c and the operating elastic member 53c have substantially the same structure as the operating member 51a and the operating elastic member 53a of the enable switch 1a, and are arranged at substantially the same positions as the operating member 51a and the operating elastic member 53a. Like the operating member 51a, the operating member 51c includes a substantially cylindrical operating member main body 511c and two operating member projecting portions 512c projecting radially outward from the operating member main body 511c.
 2つのスイッチ部材52cは、それぞれ上下方向に延びる略矩形帯状の部材である。2つのスイッチ部材52cの形状は略同じであり、一方のスイッチ部材52cは、他方のスイッチ部材52cを周方向に180°回転させた位置に配置される。スイッチ部材52cは、ケース2cの仕切り板(図28に示す仕切り板21a参照)を上下方向に貫通した状態でケース2cにより保持されており、ケース2cに対して上下方向に相対移動可能である。スイッチ部材52cの上部は、略円筒状のボタンケース32cの径方向内側に配置され、ボタンケース32cの内側面と操作部材本体511cの外側面との間に位置する。図39に示す初期状態では、スイッチ部材52cの上端部は、操作部材突出部512cの下方に位置し、操作部材突出部512cの下端面に直接的に接触する。あるいは、スイッチ部材52cは、操作部材突出部512cの下端面との間に僅かな間隙をあけて、当該下端面に近接する。 The two switch members 52c are substantially rectangular band-shaped members extending in the vertical direction. The two switch members 52c have substantially the same shape, and one switch member 52c is arranged at a position obtained by rotating the other switch member 52c by 180 degrees in the circumferential direction. The switch member 52c is held by the case 2c while penetrating vertically through the partition plate (see the partition plate 21a shown in FIG. 28) of the case 2c, and is vertically movable relative to the case 2c. The upper portion of the switch member 52c is arranged radially inside the substantially cylindrical button case 32c and positioned between the inner surface of the button case 32c and the outer surface of the operation member main body 511c. In the initial state shown in FIG. 39, the upper end of the switch member 52c is positioned below the operating member projecting portion 512c and directly contacts the lower end face of the operating member projecting portion 512c. Alternatively, the switch member 52c is close to the lower end surface of the operating member projecting portion 512c with a slight gap therebetween.
 図40に示す例では、スイッチ部材52cは、中心軸J4を中心とする径方向に略垂直な略平板状の単一の部材である。スイッチ部材52aの上下方向の中央部には段差部が設けられており、スイッチ部材52aの下部は、スイッチ部材52aの上部よりも径方向内側に位置する。スイッチ部材52cの下部の外側面には、径方向外方に向かって突出する略円柱状の突起部521cが設けられる。突起部521cには、導電性弾性部材46cのコイル部461cが嵌合する。導電性弾性部材46cの第3腕部465cは、上記段差部を下側から貫通することにより、当該段差部に固定される。導電性弾性部材46cは、一対の腕部462cが自然状態よりもY方向において互いに近づくように僅かに弾性変形された状態(すなわち、圧縮された状態)で、スイッチ部材52cに取り付けられている。これにより、導電性弾性部材46cがスイッチ部材52cから外れることを抑制することができる。 In the example shown in FIG. 40, the switch member 52c is a substantially flat single member that is substantially perpendicular to the radial direction centered on the central axis J4. A stepped portion is provided in the vertical central portion of the switch member 52a, and the lower portion of the switch member 52a is located radially inside the upper portion of the switch member 52a. A substantially cylindrical protrusion 521c protruding radially outward is provided on the outer surface of the lower portion of the switch member 52c. The coil portion 461c of the conductive elastic member 46c is fitted to the projecting portion 521c. The third arm portion 465c of the conductive elastic member 46c is fixed to the stepped portion by passing through the stepped portion from below. The conductive elastic member 46c is attached to the switch member 52c in a state in which the pair of arm portions 462c are slightly elastically deformed (that is, in a compressed state) so that they are closer to each other in the Y direction than in the natural state. This can prevent the conductive elastic member 46c from coming off the switch member 52c.
 スイッチ部材52cの下部の径方向内側には、スイッチ弾性部材55cが配置される。スイッチ弾性部材55cは、上下方向に弾性変形な部材である。スイッチ弾性部材55cは、例えば、上下方向に延びる弦巻バネである。スイッチ弾性部材55cの上端は、スイッチ部材52cに固定されており、スイッチ弾性部材55cの下端は、端子支持部56cにより支持されている。したがって、スイッチ部材52cが下方へと移動すると、スイッチ弾性部材55cは上下方向に圧縮される。 A switch elastic member 55c is arranged radially inside the lower portion of the switch member 52c. The switch elastic member 55c is a member that is elastically deformable in the vertical direction. The switch elastic member 55c is, for example, a spiral spring extending in the vertical direction. The upper end of the switch elastic member 55c is fixed to the switch member 52c, and the lower end of the switch elastic member 55c is supported by the terminal support portion 56c. Therefore, when the switch member 52c moves downward, the switch elastic member 55c is vertically compressed.
 図39に示す状態では、スイッチ部材52cに取り付けられた導電性弾性部材46cのコイル部461cは、一対の固定端子45cの上端よりも下側に位置し、Y方向に関して一対の固定端子45cの間に位置する。また、一対の腕部462cの屈曲部466cは、一対の固定端子45cの上方において、一対の固定端子45cの上端から上側に離間した位置に位置する。一対の腕部462cの屈曲部466c間のY方向における距離は、一対の固定端子45cの間隔(すなわち、一対の固定端子45cのY方向にて対向する主面間の間隔)よりも大きい。 In the state shown in FIG. 39, the coil portion 461c of the conductive elastic member 46c attached to the switch member 52c is positioned below the upper ends of the pair of fixed terminals 45c and is located between the pair of fixed terminals 45c in the Y direction. Located in In addition, the bent portions 466c of the pair of arm portions 462c are positioned above the pair of fixed terminals 45c and spaced upward from the upper ends of the pair of fixed terminals 45c. The distance in the Y direction between the bent portions 466c of the pair of arm portions 462c is greater than the distance between the pair of fixed terminals 45c (that is, the distance between the main surfaces of the pair of fixed terminals 45c facing each other in the Y direction).
 イネーブルスイッチ1cでは、図39に示す状態では、一対の固定端子45cは電気的に接続されておらず、接点4cの状態は「開」である。また、スイッチ部材52cが、図39に示す状態から、導電性弾性部材46cと共に下方へと移動すると、一対の腕部462cの屈曲部466c(すなわち、第1腕部463cと第2腕部464cとの接続部)が、一対の固定端子45cのY方向における間に上側から挿入される。そして、一対の腕部462cの屈曲部466c近傍の部位が、一対の固定端子45cに接触することにより、一対の固定端子45cが導電性弾性部材46cを介して電気的に接続され、接点4cの状態が「開」から「閉」に移行する。また、一対の腕部462cは、互いに近づくように(すなわち、一対の腕部462c間の距離が変化するように)弾性変形し、導電性弾性部材46cがY方向に圧縮される。各腕部462cの屈曲部466c近傍の部位は、例えば、固定端子45cのスリット451cに嵌まっており、スリット451cの内面と2ヶ所以上の互いに離間する端子接触部において接触する。 In the enable switch 1c, in the state shown in FIG. 39, the pair of fixed terminals 45c are not electrically connected, and the state of the contact 4c is "open". Further, when the switch member 52c moves downward together with the conductive elastic member 46c from the state shown in FIG. ) is inserted from above between the pair of fixed terminals 45c in the Y direction. The pair of fixed terminals 45c are electrically connected via the conductive elastic member 46c by bringing the portions of the pair of arms 462c in the vicinity of the bent portions 466c into contact with the pair of fixed terminals 45c. The state transitions from "open" to "closed". Also, the pair of arm portions 462c are elastically deformed so as to approach each other (that is, the distance between the pair of arm portions 462c is changed), and the conductive elastic member 46c is compressed in the Y direction. A portion near the bent portion 466c of each arm portion 462c is, for example, fitted in the slit 451c of the fixed terminal 45c, and contacts the inner surface of the slit 451c at two or more terminal contact portions spaced apart from each other.
 本実施の形態では、イネーブルスイッチ1cにおいてボタン部3cが押し込まれる際に、第1ポジションと第2ポジションとの間にて、接点4cの状態が「開」から「閉」に移行し、第2ポジションと第3ポジションとの間にて、接点4cの状態が「閉」から「開」に移行する。そして、ボタン部3cが第3ポジションから第1ポジションへと戻る際には、接点4cの状態は「開」のままで維持される。また、2つの接点4cの状態は、上述のイネーブルスイッチ1aと同様に、およそ同期して移行される。 In this embodiment, when the button portion 3c of the enable switch 1c is pushed, the state of the contact 4c shifts from "open" to "closed" between the first position and the second position. The state of the contact 4c changes from "closed" to "open" between the position and the third position. When the button portion 3c returns from the third position to the first position, the contact 4c is maintained in the "open" state. Also, the states of the two contacts 4c are changed approximately synchronously, similar to the enable switch 1a described above.
 イネーブルスイッチ1cでは、ボタン部3cが第1ポジションから第2ポジションへと押し込まれる際、第2ポジションから第3ポジションへと押し込まれる際、および、第3ポジションから第1ポジションへと復帰する際における操作部材51cおよびスイッチ部材52cの動作は、イネーブルスイッチ1aの操作部材51aおよびスイッチ部材52aの動作と略同様である。 In the enable switch 1c, when the button portion 3c is pushed from the first position to the second position, when pushed from the second position to the third position, and when returning from the third position to the first position, The operations of the operating member 51c and the switch member 52c are substantially the same as those of the operating member 51a and the switch member 52a of the enable switch 1a.
 具体的には、ボタン部3c(すなわち、ボタンカバー31cおよびボタンケース32c)が、図39に示す第1ポジションから図41に示す第2ポジションへと押し込まれる際には、イネーブルスイッチ1aと略同様に、操作部材51cの操作部材突出部512cからスイッチ部材52cに下向きの力が付与され、スイッチ部材52cがボタン部3cと共に下方へと変位する。これにより、スイッチ部材52cに固定されている導電性弾性部材46cも、スイッチ部材52cと共に下方へと移動する。そして、一対の腕部462cの屈曲部466c近傍の部位が、一対の固定端子45cの間の空間に挿入されることにより、導電性弾性部材46cがY方向に圧縮されるように弾性変形する。また、一対の腕部462cの屈曲部466c近傍の部位が、一対の固定端子45cと直接的に接触する。換言すれば、一対の腕部462cと一対の固定端子45cとの接触状態が、「非接触」から「接触」に切り替えられる。これにより、一対の固定端子45cが導電性弾性部材46cを介して電気的に接続され、接点4cの状態が「開」から「閉」に移行する。また、操作弾性部材53cおよびスイッチ弾性部材55cは、上下方向に圧縮される。 Specifically, when the button portion 3c (that is, the button cover 31c and the button case 32c) is pushed from the first position shown in FIG. 39 to the second position shown in FIG. Then, a downward force is applied to the switch member 52c from the operating member projecting portion 512c of the operating member 51c, and the switch member 52c is displaced downward together with the button portion 3c. As a result, the conductive elastic member 46c fixed to the switch member 52c also moves downward together with the switch member 52c. By inserting the portions of the pair of arms 462c near the bent portions 466c into the space between the pair of fixed terminals 45c, the conductive elastic members 46c are elastically deformed so as to be compressed in the Y direction. In addition, portions of the pair of arm portions 462c near the bent portion 466c directly contact the pair of fixed terminals 45c. In other words, the contact state between the pair of arm portions 462c and the pair of fixed terminals 45c is switched from "non-contact" to "contact." As a result, the pair of fixed terminals 45c are electrically connected via the conductive elastic member 46c, and the state of the contact 4c is changed from "open" to "closed". Also, the operation elastic member 53c and the switch elastic member 55c are compressed in the vertical direction.
 ボタン部3cが第2ポジションから図42に示す第3ポジションへと押し込まれる際には、イネーブルスイッチ1aと略同様に、ボタン部3cが操作部材51cに対して相対的に下方へと移動する。これにより、操作部材突出部512cに上側から接触するボタンカバー31cの突起部312c(すなわち、上カム部)から、操作部材突出部512cに対して周方向の力が働き、操作部材51cが反時計回りに回転する。その結果、操作部材突出部512cが、スイッチ部材52cと上下方向に重なる位置から周方向にずれる。換言すれば、操作部材突出部512cがスイッチ部材52cの上方から側方へと退避し、操作部材突出部512cとスイッチ部材52cとの上下方向における重複が解消される。 When the button portion 3c is pushed from the second position to the third position shown in FIG. 42, the button portion 3c moves downward relative to the operating member 51c in substantially the same manner as the enable switch 1a. As a result, a force in the circumferential direction acts on the operating member projecting portion 512c from the projecting portion 312c (that is, the upper cam portion) of the button cover 31c that contacts the operating member projecting portion 512c from above, and the operating member 51c rotates counterclockwise. rotate around. As a result, the operating member projecting portion 512c is displaced in the circumferential direction from the position where it overlaps the switch member 52c in the vertical direction. In other words, the operation member projecting portion 512c retreats from above the switch member 52c to the side, and the vertical overlap between the operation member projecting portion 512c and the switch member 52c is eliminated.
 操作部材突出部512cがスイッチ部材52cの上方から退避すると、操作部材突出部512cからスイッチ部材52cに付与される下向きの力が失われ、スイッチ弾性部材55cの復元力によりスイッチ部材52cが上方に移動する。これにより、導電性弾性部材46cもスイッチ部材52cと共に上方に移動し(すなわち、上方へと戻り)、一対の固定端子45cの間の空間から抜けて、一対の固定端子45cから上方に離間する。換言すれば、スイッチ部材52cが導電性弾性部材46cと共に元の位置へと戻ることにより、一対の腕部462cと一対の固定端子45cとの接触状態が、「接触」から「非接触」に切り替えられる。その結果、一対の固定端子45cの電気的接続が解除され、接点4cの状態が「閉」から「開」に移行する。なお、上述のスイッチ部材52cの上方への移動は、スイッチ弾性部材55cの復元力に加えて、導電性弾性部材46cの復元力も利用して行われてもよい。あるいは、スイッチ弾性部材55cが省略され、導電性弾性部材46cの復元力によりスイッチ部材52cの上方への移動が実現されてもよい。 When the operating member projecting portion 512c retreats from above the switch member 52c, the downward force applied from the operating member projecting portion 512c to the switch member 52c is lost, and the switch member 52c moves upward due to the restoring force of the switch elastic member 55c. do. As a result, the conductive elastic member 46c also moves upward together with the switch member 52c (that is, returns upward), escapes from the space between the pair of fixed terminals 45c, and separates upward from the pair of fixed terminals 45c. In other words, when the switch member 52c returns to its original position together with the conductive elastic member 46c, the contact state between the pair of arm portions 462c and the pair of fixed terminals 45c is switched from "contact" to "non-contact". be done. As a result, the electrical connection between the pair of fixed terminals 45c is released, and the state of the contact 4c shifts from "closed" to "open." The above-described upward movement of the switch member 52c may be performed using not only the restoring force of the switch elastic member 55c but also the restoring force of the conductive elastic member 46c. Alternatively, the switch elastic member 55c may be omitted and the switch member 52c may be moved upward by the restoring force of the conductive elastic member 46c.
 ボタン部3cが第3ポジションに位置する状態で、操作者がボタン部3cから手を離すと、復帰弾性部材33cの復元力により、ボタンカバー31cおよびボタンケース32cが上方へと移動して第1ポジションへと移動する。ボタン部3cが第3ポジションから上方に移動する際には、ボタン部3cと操作部材51cとの間において上下方向に圧縮されている操作弾性部材53cにより、操作部材51cに下向きの力が加わり、操作部材51cの上方への移動が制限される。このため、ボタンケース32cが操作部材51cに対して相対的に上方へと移動し、ボタンケース32cの凹部34cの第2端面342c(すなわち、下カム部)が、操作部材51cの操作部材突出部512cに下側から接触する。そして、第2端面342cから操作部材突出部512cに対して周方向の力が働き、操作部材51cは回転して初期状態の位置へと戻る。なお、ボタン部3cが第3ポジションから上昇して第1ポジションへと戻る間、スイッチ部材52cに下向きの力は加わらず、接点4cの状態は「開」のままで維持される。 When the operator releases the button portion 3c while the button portion 3c is in the third position, the restoring force of the return elastic member 33c causes the button cover 31c and the button case 32c to move upward to the first position. move to a position. When the button portion 3c moves upward from the third position, the operating elastic member 53c vertically compressed between the button portion 3c and the operating member 51c applies downward force to the operating member 51c. The upward movement of the operating member 51c is restricted. Therefore, the button case 32c moves upward relative to the operation member 51c, and the second end surface 342c (that is, the lower cam portion) of the concave portion 34c of the button case 32c moves toward the operation member projecting portion of the operation member 51c. 512c is contacted from below. Then, a circumferential force acts on the operation member projecting portion 512c from the second end surface 342c, and the operation member 51c rotates and returns to the initial position. While the button portion 3c is raised from the third position and returned to the first position, no downward force is applied to the switch member 52c, and the contact 4c is maintained in the "open" state.
 以上に説明したように、イネーブルスイッチ1cでは、上述のイネーブルスイッチ1aと略同様に、接点機構5cが、第2可動部材(すなわち、操作部材51c)と、スイッチ部材52cとを備える。操作部材51cは、第1可動部材(すなわち、ボタン部3c)により保持され、ボタン部3cに対して相対的に移動可能である。スイッチ部材52cは、操作部材51cと直接的に接触し、操作部材51cの移動に伴って変位することにより接点4cの状態を変更する。ボタン部3cは、操作部材51cに上側から接触する上カム部(上記例では、ボタンカバー31cの突起部312c)と、操作部材51cに下側から接触する下カム部(上記例では、凹部34cの第2端面342c)と、を備える。 As described above, in the enable switch 1c, the contact mechanism 5c includes the second movable member (that is, the operating member 51c) and the switch member 52c, in substantially the same manner as the enable switch 1a described above. The operating member 51c is held by the first movable member (that is, the button portion 3c) and is relatively movable with respect to the button portion 3c. The switch member 52c is in direct contact with the operating member 51c and displaces along with the movement of the operating member 51c to change the state of the contact 4c. The button portion 3c includes an upper cam portion (the protrusion 312c of the button cover 31c in the above example) that contacts the operating member 51c from above, and a lower cam portion (the concave portion 34c in the above example) that contacts the operating member 51c from below. a second end face 342c) of the
 イネーブルスイッチ1cでは、ボタン部3cが第1ポジションから第2ポジションへと押し込まれる際に、ボタン部3cと共に下方へと移動する操作部材51cによってスイッチ部材52cに力が付与されることにより、スイッチ部材52cが変位して接点4cの状態が一方から他方に(例えば、「開」から「閉に)移行する。また、ボタン部3cが第2ポジションから第3ポジションへと押し込まれる際に、操作部材51cの下方への移動が制限された状態で、上カム部が操作部材51cに上側から接触し、ボタン部3cの下降に伴って操作部材51cをボタン部3cに対して所定の第1方向へと相対移動させる(上記例では、反時計回りに回転させる)。これにより、操作部材51cからスイッチ部材52cに付与される下向きの力が失われてスイッチ部材52cが元の位置へと戻り、接点4cの状態が上記他方から上記一方に移行する。 In the enable switch 1c, when the button portion 3c is pushed from the first position to the second position, force is applied to the switch member 52c by the operation member 51c that moves downward together with the button portion 3c. 52c is displaced to shift the state of the contact 4c from one side to the other (for example, from "open" to "closed"), and when the button portion 3c is pushed from the second position to the third position, the operating member While the downward movement of 51c is restricted, the upper cam portion contacts the operating member 51c from above, and as the button portion 3c descends, the operating member 51c moves in a predetermined first direction relative to the button portion 3c. (In the above example, the switch member 52c is rotated counterclockwise.) As a result, the downward force applied from the operation member 51c to the switch member 52c is lost, and the switch member 52c returns to its original position. The state of 4c shifts from the other to the one.
 イネーブルスイッチ1cでは、さらに、ボタン部3cが第3ポジションから第1ポジションへと戻る際に、スイッチ部材52cの位置(すなわち、ボタン部3cに対する相対位置)が維持された状態で、操作部材51cがボタン部3cと共に上方へと移動する。また、操作部材51cの上方への移動が制限された状態で、下カム部が操作部材51cに下側から接触し、ボタン部3cの上昇に伴って操作部材51cをボタン部3cに対して上記第1方向とは反対向きの第2方向へと相対移動させる(上記例では、時計回りに回転させる)。 In the enable switch 1c, when the button portion 3c returns from the third position to the first position, the operation member 51c is operated while the position of the switch member 52c (that is, the position relative to the button portion 3c) is maintained. It moves upward together with the button portion 3c. In addition, in a state in which the upward movement of the operating member 51c is restricted, the lower cam portion contacts the operating member 51c from below, and the operating member 51c moves above the button portion 3c as the button portion 3c rises. Relatively move in a second direction opposite to the first direction (rotate clockwise in the above example).
 このように、イネーブルスイッチ1cでは、ボタン部3cに保持された操作部材51cをスイッチ部材52cに直接的に接触させ、操作部材51cの移動に伴ってスイッチ部材52cを変位させることにより、第1ポジション、第2ポジションおよび第3ポジションにおける接点4cの状態の切り替えを実現している。これにより、イネーブルスイッチ1aと略同様に、イネーブルスイッチ1cの部品点数を削減することができるとともに、イネーブルスイッチ1cを上下方向に小型化することができる。 As described above, in the enable switch 1c, the operation member 51c held by the button portion 3c is brought into direct contact with the switch member 52c, and the switch member 52c is displaced as the operation member 51c moves, whereby the switch member 52c is moved to the first position. , the switching of the state of the contact 4c between the second position and the third position. As a result, substantially the same as the enable switch 1a, the number of parts of the enable switch 1c can be reduced, and the size of the enable switch 1c can be reduced in the vertical direction.
 上述のように、接点4cは、固定端子45cと、導電性弾性部材46cとを備えることが好ましい。また、導電性弾性部材46cは、スイッチ部材52cに取り付けられて、スイッチ部材52cの変位に伴って弾性変形することが好ましい。そして、ボタン部3cが第1ポジションから第2ポジションへと押し込まれる際に、導電性弾性部材46cが弾性変形するとともに、固定端子45cと導電性弾性部材46cとの接触状態が切り替えられて接点4cの状態が上記一方から上記他方に移行する。また、ボタン部3cが第2ポジションから第3ポジションへと押し込まれる際に、スイッチ部材52cが導電性弾性部材46cと共に元の位置へと戻り、固定端子45cと導電性弾性部材46cとの接触状態が切り替えられて接点4cの状態が上記他方から上記一方に移行する。 As described above, the contact 4c preferably includes the fixed terminal 45c and the conductive elastic member 46c. Moreover, it is preferable that the conductive elastic member 46c is attached to the switch member 52c and elastically deformed as the switch member 52c is displaced. Then, when the button portion 3c is pushed from the first position to the second position, the conductive elastic member 46c is elastically deformed, and the contact state between the fixed terminal 45c and the conductive elastic member 46c is switched to the contact 4c. state changes from the one to the other. Further, when the button portion 3c is pushed from the second position to the third position, the switch member 52c returns to the original position together with the conductive elastic member 46c, and the contact state between the fixed terminal 45c and the conductive elastic member 46c is maintained. is switched, and the state of the contact 4c shifts from the other to the one.
 このように、イネーブルスイッチ1cでは、接点4cの一部(すなわち、導電性弾性部材46c)をスイッチ部材52cに取り付けてスイッチ部材52cと共に変位させることにより、接点4cの状態移行を実現している。これにより、イネーブルスイッチ1cの部品点数をさらに削減することができるとともに、イネーブルスイッチ1cを上下方向にさらに小型化することができる。また、マイクロスイッチ40aやタクティルスイッチ40bを用いることなく、固定端子45cおよび導電性弾性部材46cで接点4cを構成することにより、接点4cを小型化することができる。その結果、イネーブルスイッチ1cの上下方向および径方向における更なる小型化を実現することができる。 Thus, in the enable switch 1c, a part of the contact 4c (that is, the conductive elastic member 46c) is attached to the switch member 52c and displaced together with the switch member 52c, thereby realizing the state transition of the contact 4c. As a result, the number of parts of the enable switch 1c can be further reduced, and the size of the enable switch 1c can be further reduced in the vertical direction. Further, the contact 4c can be miniaturized by configuring the contact 4c with the fixed terminal 45c and the conductive elastic member 46c without using the microswitch 40a or the tactile switch 40b. As a result, it is possible to further reduce the size of the enable switch 1c in the vertical and radial directions.
 上述のイネーブルスイッチ1a~1cでは、様々な変更が可能である。 Various modifications are possible for the enable switches 1a to 1c described above.
 例えば、イネーブルスイッチ1aに設けられる接点4aの数は、2つには限定されず、1つであってもよく、3つ以上であってもよい。イネーブルスイッチ1b,1cにおいても同様である。 For example, the number of contacts 4a provided in the enable switch 1a is not limited to two, and may be one, or may be three or more. The same applies to the enable switches 1b and 1c.
 操作部材51aでは、スイッチ部材52aに接触する部位と、上カム部および下カム部に接触する部位とは異なっていてもよい。例えば、上カム部および下カム部は、必ずしも操作部材突出部512aに接触して操作部材51aを移動させる必要はなく、操作部材51aの他の部位に接触してもよい。また、スイッチ部材52aに接触する操作部材51aの部位は、必ずしも操作部材突出部512aには限定されず、操作部材51aにおける操作部材突出部512a以外の部位であってもよい。イネーブルスイッチ1b,1cにおいても同様である。 In the operating member 51a, the portion that contacts the switch member 52a may be different from the portion that contacts the upper cam portion and the lower cam portion. For example, the upper cam portion and the lower cam portion do not necessarily need to contact the operating member projecting portion 512a to move the operating member 51a, and may contact other portions of the operating member 51a. Also, the portion of the operating member 51a that contacts the switch member 52a is not necessarily limited to the operating member projecting portion 512a, and may be a portion of the operating member 51a other than the operating member projecting portion 512a. The same applies to the enable switches 1b and 1c.
 イネーブルスイッチ1aでは、上カム部は、必ずしもボタンカバー31aに設けられた突起部312aである必要はなく、他の構造であってもよい。また、下カム部は、必ずしもボタンケース32aに設けられた凹部34aの第2端面342aである必要はなく、他の構造であってもよい。イネーブルスイッチ1b,1cにおいても同様である。 In the enable switch 1a, the upper cam portion does not necessarily have to be the protrusion 312a provided on the button cover 31a, and may have another structure. Also, the lower cam portion does not necessarily have to be the second end face 342a of the recess 34a provided in the button case 32a, and may have another structure. The same applies to the enable switches 1b and 1c.
 イネーブルスイッチ1aでは、下カム部(凹部34aの第2端面342a)が操作部材51aに下側から接触することで、ボタン部3aを第3ポジションから第1ポジションへと復帰させているが、必ずしも上記例には限定されず、様々に変更されてもよい。例えば、操作弾性部材53aを圧縮ねじりコイルバネとすることにより、その復元力を利用してボタン部3aを第3ポジションから第1ポジションへと復帰させてもよい。イネーブルスイッチ1b,1cにおいても同様である。 In the enable switch 1a, the lower cam portion (the second end surface 342a of the recessed portion 34a) contacts the operating member 51a from below, thereby returning the button portion 3a from the third position to the first position. It is not limited to the above examples, and may be modified in various ways. For example, by using a compression torsion coil spring as the operating elastic member 53a, the restoring force thereof may be used to return the button portion 3a from the third position to the first position. The same applies to the enable switches 1b and 1c.
 イネーブルスイッチ1aでは、操作部材51aのボタンケース32aに対する上記第1方向および第2方向への相対移動は、必ずしも、中心軸J2を中心とする周方向への一方側および他方側への回転である必要はなく、様々に変更されてよい。例えば、上述の第1方向および第2方向への相対移動は、(+Y)方向への移動および(-Y)方向への移動であってもよい。イネーブルスイッチ1b,1cにおいても同様である。 In the enable switch 1a, the relative movement of the operation member 51a with respect to the button case 32a in the first direction and the second direction is necessarily the rotation in one side and the other side in the circumferential direction about the central axis J2. It is not required and may be varied. For example, the above-described relative movements in the first direction and the second direction may be movements in the (+Y) direction and movements in the (−Y) direction. The same applies to the enable switches 1b and 1c.
 イネーブルスイッチ1aでは、ボタン部3aが第1ポジションから第2ポジションへと移動する際の操作部材51aの仮止めは、必ずしも行われる必要はない。イネーブルスイッチ1bにおいても同様である。イネーブルスイッチ1cでは、ボタン部3cが第1ポジションから第2ポジションへと移動する際に、操作部材51cが仮止めされてもよい。 In the enable switch 1a, the operation member 51a does not necessarily have to be temporarily fixed when the button portion 3a moves from the first position to the second position. The same applies to the enable switch 1b. In the enable switch 1c, the operation member 51c may be temporarily fixed when the button portion 3c moves from the first position to the second position.
 イネーブルスイッチ1aでは、操作部材51aの形状は、上述の例には限定されず、様々に変更されてよい。例えば、操作部材51aの下端面513aの凸部514aは省略されてもよい。また、操作部材本体511aは、必ずしも中心軸J2を中心とする筒状または柱状である必要はなく、他の形状を有していてもよい。操作部材51aは、必ずしも操作部材本体511aおよび操作部材突出部512aを備える必要はなく、他の構造を有していてもよい。イネーブルスイッチ1b,1cにおいても同様である。 In the enable switch 1a, the shape of the operation member 51a is not limited to the above example, and may be changed in various ways. For example, the convex portion 514a of the lower end surface 513a of the operating member 51a may be omitted. Further, the operation member main body 511a does not necessarily have a cylindrical or columnar shape centered on the central axis J2, and may have another shape. The operation member 51a does not necessarily have the operation member main body 511a and the operation member projecting portion 512a, and may have other structures. The same applies to the enable switches 1b and 1c.
 イネーブルスイッチ1aでは、スイッチ部材52aの形状および移動方向は、必ずしも上記例には限定されず、様々に変更されてよい。例えば、スイッチ部材52aがZ方向に対して傾斜した方向に変位することにより、接点4aの状態が変更されてもよい。 In the enable switch 1a, the shape and moving direction of the switch member 52a are not necessarily limited to the above example, and may be changed in various ways. For example, the state of the contact 4a may be changed by displacing the switch member 52a in a direction inclined with respect to the Z direction.
 イネーブルスイッチ1a~1cでは、接点4a~4cの構造は上記例には限定されず、様々に変更されてよい。例えば、イネーブルスイッチ1cでは、導電性弾性部材46cのコイル部461cがスイッチ部材52cの上下方向の略中央部に取り付けられ、一対の腕部462cは、コイル部461cから斜め下方に向かって互いに離れるように延びていてもよい。また、導電性弾性部材46cの形状は様々に変更されてよい。具体的には、例えば、導電性弾性部材46cの一対の腕部462cから、第3腕部465cが省略されてもよく、第3腕部465cおよび第2腕部464cが省略されてもよい。導電性弾性部材46cは、ねじりコイルバネには限定されず、様々な構造を有する弾性部材であってよい。例えば、導電性弾性部材46cは、コイル部を有しないV字状またはU字状の線バネであってもよく、線バネ以外の弾性部材(例えば、板バネ)であってもよい。 In the enable switches 1a to 1c, the structures of the contacts 4a to 4c are not limited to the above examples, and may be changed in various ways. For example, in the enable switch 1c, the coil portion 461c of the conductive elastic member 46c is attached to the substantially central portion of the switch member 52c in the vertical direction, and the pair of arm portions 462c are separated from each other obliquely downward from the coil portion 461c. may extend to Also, the shape of the conductive elastic member 46c may be changed in various ways. Specifically, for example, the third arm portion 465c may be omitted from the pair of arm portions 462c of the conductive elastic member 46c, or the third arm portion 465c and the second arm portion 464c may be omitted. The conductive elastic member 46c is not limited to a torsion coil spring, and may be an elastic member having various structures. For example, the conductive elastic member 46c may be a V-shaped or U-shaped wire spring that does not have a coil portion, or may be an elastic member (for example, a plate spring) other than the wire spring.
 イネーブルスイッチ1aでは、上述の例とは逆に、ボタン部3aが押し込まれる際に、第1ポジションと第2ポジションとの間にて、接点4aの状態が「閉」から「開」に移行し、第2ポジションと第3ポジションとの間にて、接点4aの状態が「開」から「閉」に移行し、ボタン部3aが第3ポジションから第1ポジションへと戻る際には、接点4aの状態は「閉」のままで維持されてもよい。イネーブルスイッチ1b,1cにおいても同様である。 In the enable switch 1a, contrary to the above example, when the button portion 3a is pushed, the state of the contact 4a changes from "closed" to "open" between the first position and the second position. , the state of the contact 4a is changed from "open" to "closed" between the second position and the third position, and when the button portion 3a returns from the third position to the first position, the contact 4a may be maintained as "closed". The same applies to the enable switches 1b and 1c.
 上記実施の形態および各変形例における構成は、相互に矛盾しない限り適宜組み合わされてよい。 The configurations in the above embodiment and each modification may be combined as appropriate as long as they do not contradict each other.
 発明を詳細に描写して説明したが、既述の説明は例示的であって限定的なものではない。したがって、本発明の範囲を逸脱しない限り、多数の変形や態様が可能であるといえる。 Although the invention has been described in detail, the above description is illustrative and not limiting. Accordingly, many modifications and variations are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention.
 1,1a~1c  イネーブルスイッチ
 2,2a~2c  ケース
 3,3a~3c  ボタン部
 4,4a~4c  接点
 5,5a~5c  接点機構
 32,32a~32c  ボタンケース
 34  溝部
 34a~34c  凹部
 40b  タクティルスイッチ
 44b  押しボタン
 45c  固定端子
 46c  導電性弾性部材
 51,51a~51c  操作部材
 52,52a,52c  スイッチ部材
 52b  第1スイッチ部材
 53,53a~53c  操作弾性部材
 54b  第2スイッチ部材
 61  仮止め部
 311,311a  上面部
 312a~312c  (ボタンカバーの)突起部
 341  (溝部の)上端面
 342  (溝部の)下端面
 342a~342c  (凹部の)第2端面
 511,511a~511c  操作部材本体
 512,512a~512c  操作部材突出部
 513,513a  (操作部材の)下端面
 J1~J4  中心軸
1, 1a to 1c enable switch 2, 2a to 2c case 3, 3a to 3c button portion 4, 4a to 4c contact 5, 5a to 5c contact mechanism 32, 32a to 32c button case 34 groove 34a to 34c recess 40b tactile switch 44b push button 45c fixed terminal 46c conductive elastic member 51, 51a to 51c operation member 52, 52a, 52c switch member 52b first switch member 53, 53a to 53c operation elastic member 54b second switch member 61 temporary fixing portion 311, 311a Upper surface portion 312a to 312c Projection portion 341 (of button cover) Upper end surface 342 (of groove portion) Lower end surface (of groove portion) 342a to 342c Second end surface (of concave portion) 511, 511a to 511c Operation member body 512, 512a to 512c Operation Member projecting portion 513, 513a Lower end surface (of operating member) J1 to J4 Central axis

Claims (12)

  1.  イネーブルスイッチであって、
     ケースと、
     前記ケースに向かって下方に押し込まれる第1可動部材と、
     接点と、
     前記第1可動部材が前記ケースに向かって押し込まれるに従って、前記接点の状態を、開および閉の一方から他方に移行し、さらに前記他方から前記一方へと移行する接点機構と、
    を備え、
     前記第1可動部材が押し込まれていない状態における前記ケースに対する前記第1可動部材の位置を第1ポジションとし、
     前記第1可動部材が最も下側に押し込まれた状態における前記ケースに対する前記第1可動部材の位置を第3ポジションとし、
     前記第1ポジションと前記第3ポジションとの間における前記ケースに対する前記第1可動部材の所定の位置を第2ポジションとして、
     前記第1可動部材が押し込まれる際に、前記第1ポジションと前記第2ポジションとの間にて前記接点の状態が前記一方から前記他方に移行し、前記第2ポジションと前記第3ポジションとの間にて前記接点の状態が前記他方から前記一方に移行し、
     前記第1可動部材が前記第3ポジションから前記第1ポジションへと戻る際に、前記接点の状態が前記一方のままで維持され、
     前記接点機構は、
     前記第1可動部材により保持され、前記第1可動部材に対して相対的に移動可能な第2可動部材と、
     前記第2可動部材と直接的に接触し、前記第2可動部材の移動に伴って変位することにより前記接点の状態を変更するスイッチ部材と、
    を備え、
     前記第1可動部材は、
     前記第2可動部材に上側から接触する上カム部と、
     前記第2可動部材に下側から接触する下カム部と、
    を備え、
     前記第1可動部材が前記第1ポジションから前記第2ポジションへと押し込まれる際に、前記第1可動部材と共に下方へと移動する前記第2可動部材によって前記スイッチ部材に力が付与されることにより、前記スイッチ部材が変位して前記接点の状態が前記一方から前記他方に移行し、
     前記第1可動部材が前記第2ポジションから前記第3ポジションへと押し込まれる際に、前記第2可動部材の下方への移動が制限された状態で、前記上カム部が前記第2可動部材に上側から接触し、前記第1可動部材の下降に伴って前記第2可動部材を前記第1可動部材に対して所定の第1方向へと相対移動させることより、前記第2可動部材から前記スイッチ部材に付与される下向きの力が失われて前記スイッチ部材が元の位置へと戻り、前記接点の状態が前記他方から前記一方に移行し、
     前記第1可動部材が前記第3ポジションから前記第1ポジションへと戻る際に、前記スイッチ部材の位置が維持された状態で、前記第2可動部材が前記第1可動部材と共に上方へと移動し、また、前記第2可動部材の上方への移動が制限された状態で、前記下カム部が前記第2可動部材に下側から接触し、前記第1可動部材の上昇に伴って前記第2可動部材を前記第1可動部材に対して前記第1方向とは反対向きの第2方向へと相対移動させる。
    an enable switch,
    a case;
    a first movable member pushed downward toward the case;
    a point of contact;
    a contact mechanism that shifts the state of the contact from one of open and closed to the other and further shifts from the other to the one as the first movable member is pushed toward the case;
    with
    A position of the first movable member with respect to the case in a state in which the first movable member is not pushed in is defined as a first position;
    A third position is a position of the first movable member with respect to the case when the first movable member is pushed to the bottom,
    A predetermined position of the first movable member with respect to the case between the first position and the third position as a second position,
    When the first movable member is pushed in, the state of the contact changes from the one to the other between the first position and the second position, and between the second position and the third position. during which the state of the contact transitions from the other to the one;
    when the first movable member returns from the third position to the first position, the state of the contact is maintained in the one state;
    The contact mechanism is
    a second movable member held by the first movable member and movable relative to the first movable member;
    a switch member that is in direct contact with the second movable member and changes the state of the contact by being displaced along with the movement of the second movable member;
    with
    The first movable member is
    an upper cam portion that contacts the second movable member from above;
    a lower cam portion that contacts the second movable member from below;
    with
    When the first movable member is pushed from the first position to the second position, force is applied to the switch member by the second movable member that moves downward together with the first movable member. , the switch member is displaced to shift the state of the contact from the one to the other;
    When the first movable member is pushed from the second position to the third position, the upper cam portion is moved to the second movable member while the downward movement of the second movable member is restricted. By contacting from above and moving the second movable member relative to the first movable member in a predetermined first direction as the first movable member descends, the switch is moved from the second movable member to the switch. when the downward force applied to the member is removed, the switch member returns to its original position and the state of the contact transitions from the other to the one;
    When the first movable member returns from the third position to the first position, the second movable member moves upward together with the first movable member while the position of the switch member is maintained. Also, in a state in which the upward movement of the second movable member is restricted, the lower cam portion contacts the second movable member from below, and the second movable member moves upward as the first movable member rises. The movable member is moved relative to the first movable member in a second direction opposite to the first direction.
  2.  請求項1に記載のイネーブルスイッチであって、
     前記第1可動部材が前記第1ポジションから前記第2ポジションへと押し込まれる際に、前記第2可動部材は前記スイッチ部材に上側から接触し、前記第1可動部材と共に下方へと移動する前記第2可動部材によって前記スイッチ部材が押し下げられる。
    The enable switch of claim 1, comprising:
    When the first movable member is pushed from the first position to the second position, the second movable member contacts the switch member from above and moves downward together with the first movable member. 2 the switch member is pushed down by the movable member;
  3.  請求項1または2に記載のイネーブルスイッチであって、
     前記第1可動部材は、
     操作者が前記第1可動部材を押し込む際に触れる上面部と、
     前記上面部から下方に延びるとともに内側に前記第2可動部材を保持する筒状の第2可動部材保持部と、
    をさらに備え、
     前記上カム部は、前記第2可動部材保持部の側面において上下方向に対して傾斜する方向に延びる溝部の上端面であり、
     前記下カム部は、前記溝部の下端面である。
    3. The enable switch according to claim 1 or 2,
    The first movable member is
    an upper surface portion that an operator touches when pushing the first movable member;
    a tubular second movable member holding portion extending downward from the upper surface portion and holding the second movable member inside;
    further comprising
    The upper cam portion is an upper end surface of a groove portion extending in a direction inclined with respect to the vertical direction on the side surface of the second movable member holding portion,
    The lower cam portion is the lower end surface of the groove portion.
  4.  請求項1または2に記載のイネーブルスイッチであって、
     前記第1可動部材は、
     操作者が前記第1可動部材を押し込む際に触れる上面部と、
     前記上面部から下方に延びるとともに内側に前記第2可動部材を保持する筒状の第2可動部材保持部と、
    をさらに備え、
     前記上カム部は、前記上面部の下面に設けられ、
     前記下カム部は、前記第2可動部材保持部の側面に設けられた凹部の下端面である。
    3. The enable switch according to claim 1 or 2,
    The first movable member is
    an upper surface portion that an operator touches when pushing the first movable member;
    a tubular second movable member holding portion extending downward from the upper surface portion and holding the second movable member inside;
    further comprising
    The upper cam portion is provided on the lower surface of the upper surface portion,
    The lower cam portion is a lower end surface of a recess provided on the side surface of the second movable member holding portion.
  5.  請求項1または2に記載のイネーブルスイッチであって、
     前記第2可動部材は、
     上下方向に延びる第2可動部材本体と、
     前記第2可動部材本体から側方に突出する第2可動部材突出部と、
    を備え、
     前記第1可動部材が前記第1ポジションから前記第2ポジションへと押し込まれる際に、前記第2可動部材突出部は前記スイッチ部材に上側から接触して力を付与し、
     前記第1可動部材が前記第2ポジションから前記第3ポジションへと押し込まれる際に、前記上カム部は前記第2可動部材突出部に上側から接触し、
     前記第1可動部材が前記第3ポジションから前記第1ポジションへと戻る際に、前記下カム部は前記第2可動部材突出部に下側から接触する。
    3. The enable switch according to claim 1 or 2,
    The second movable member is
    a second movable member main body extending in the vertical direction;
    a second movable member protruding portion that protrudes laterally from the second movable member main body;
    with
    when the first movable member is pushed from the first position to the second position, the protrusion of the second movable member contacts the switch member from above to apply force;
    when the first movable member is pushed from the second position to the third position, the upper cam portion contacts the second movable member projecting portion from above;
    When the first movable member returns from the third position to the first position, the lower cam portion contacts the second movable member projecting portion from below.
  6.  請求項1または2に記載のイネーブルスイッチであって、
     前記第2可動部材は、上下方向に延びる中心軸を中心とする筒状または柱状であり、
     前記第2可動部材の前記第1可動部材に対する前記第1方向への相対移動は、前記中心軸を中心とする周方向の一方側への回転であり、前記第2可動部材の前記第1可動部材に対する前記第2方向への相対移動は、前記中心軸を中心とする周方向の他方側への回転である。
    3. The enable switch according to claim 1 or 2,
    the second movable member has a cylindrical shape or a columnar shape centered on a central axis extending in the vertical direction;
    The relative movement of the second movable member in the first direction with respect to the first movable member is rotation to one side in the circumferential direction about the central axis, and the second movable member moves in the first movable direction. The relative movement in the second direction with respect to the member is rotation in the other circumferential direction around the central axis.
  7.  請求項1または2に記載のイネーブルスイッチであって、
     前記第1可動部材が前記第2ポジションから前記第3ポジションへと押し込まれる際に、前記第2可動部材の下方への移動の制限が、前記第2可動部材の下端面が前記ケースに接触することより実現され、
     前記第2可動部材の前記下端面は、中央部が下方に凸となるように湾曲する凸面である。
    3. The enable switch according to claim 1 or 2,
    When the first movable member is pushed from the second position to the third position, the downward movement of the second movable member is restricted such that the lower end surface of the second movable member contacts the case. realized by
    The lower end surface of the second movable member is a convex surface curved so that the central portion thereof is downwardly convex.
  8.  請求項1または2に記載のイネーブルスイッチであって、
     前記接点は、押しボタンを側方に向けて配置されるタクティルスイッチの前記押しボタンの内部に配置され、
     前記スイッチ部材は、
     前記第2可動部材に直接的に接触する第1スイッチ部材と、
     前記第1スイッチ部材と前記タクティルスイッチの前記押しボタンとの間に配置される第2スイッチ部材と、
    を備え、
     前記第1可動部材が前記第1ポジションから前記第2ポジションへと押し込まれる際に、前記第2可動部材から付与される力により変位する前記第1スイッチ部材によって、前記第2スイッチ部材が前記タクティルスイッチの前記押しボタンに対して付勢され、前記接点の状態が前記一方から前記他方に移行する。
    3. The enable switch according to claim 1 or 2,
    The contact is arranged inside the push button of a tactile switch arranged with the push button facing sideways,
    The switch member is
    a first switch member in direct contact with the second movable member;
    a second switch member disposed between the first switch member and the push button of the tactile switch;
    with
    When the first movable member is pushed from the first position to the second position, the first switch member displaced by the force applied from the second movable member causes the second switch member to move to the tactility. biased against the push button of the switch to transition the state of the contacts from the one to the other.
  9.  請求項8に記載のイネーブルスイッチであって、
     前記第1可動部材が前記第1ポジションから前記第2ポジションへと押し込まれる際に、前記第2スイッチ部材が前記押しボタンに対して付勢された後も、前記第2可動部材から付与される力による前記第1スイッチ部材の変位が継続され、前記第2スイッチ部材が前記第1スイッチ部材と前記押しボタンとの間にて弾性変形する。
    9. The enable switch of claim 8, comprising:
    Even after the second switch member is urged against the push button when the first movable member is pushed from the first position to the second position, the switch is applied from the second movable member. The force continues to displace the first switch member, and the second switch member is elastically deformed between the first switch member and the push button.
  10.  請求項1または2に記載のイネーブルスイッチであって、
     前記接点は、
     固定端子と、
     前記スイッチ部材に取り付けられて前記スイッチ部材の変位に伴って弾性変形する導電性弾性部材と、
    を備え、
     前記第1可動部材が前記第1ポジションから前記第2ポジションへと押し込まれる際に、前記導電性弾性部材が弾性変形するとともに、前記固定端子と前記導電性弾性部材との接触状態が切り替えられて前記接点の状態が前記一方から前記他方に移行し、
     前記第1可動部材が前記第2ポジションから前記第3ポジションへと押し込まれる際に、前記スイッチ部材が前記導電性弾性部材と共に元の位置へと戻り、前記固定端子と前記導電性弾性部材との接触状態が切り替えられて前記接点の状態が前記他方から前記一方に移行する。
    3. The enable switch according to claim 1 or 2,
    The contact is
    a fixed terminal;
    a conductive elastic member attached to the switch member and elastically deformed as the switch member is displaced;
    with
    When the first movable member is pushed from the first position to the second position, the conductive elastic member is elastically deformed and the state of contact between the fixed terminal and the conductive elastic member is switched. the state of the contact transitions from the one to the other;
    When the first movable member is pushed from the second position to the third position, the switch member returns to its original position together with the conductive elastic member, and the fixed terminal and the conductive elastic member are separated from each other. The contact state is switched and the state of the contact shifts from the other to the one.
  11.  請求項1または2に記載のイネーブルスイッチであって、
     前記第2可動部材と前記第1可動部材との間に配置され、前記第1可動部材が前記第2可動部材に対して相対的に下方に移動することにより上下方向に圧縮される操作弾性部材をさらに備え、
     前記第1可動部材が前記第1ポジションから前記第2ポジションへと押し込まれる際に、前記接点の状態が前記一方から前記他方に移行するよりも前に、前記第2可動部材が前記ケースに設けられた仮止め部に接触して前記第2可動部材の下方への移動が制限され、
     前記第2可動部材の下方への移動が制限された状態で前記第1可動部材が下方へと移動することにより、前記操作弾性部材が上下方向に圧縮され、前記上カム部が前記第2可動部材に上側から接触し、前記第1可動部材の下降に伴って前記第2可動部材を前記第1方向へと移動させ、これによって、前記第2可動部材が前記仮止め部からずれ、前記操作弾性部材の復元力によって前記第2可動部材が下方へと移動して前記スイッチ部材に力が付与されることにより、前記スイッチ部材が変位して前記接点の状態が前記一方から前記他方に移行する。
    3. The enable switch according to claim 1 or 2,
    An operating elastic member disposed between the second movable member and the first movable member and compressed vertically by the first movable member moving downward relative to the second movable member. further comprising
    When the first movable member is pushed from the first position to the second position, the second movable member is provided in the case before the state of the contact changes from the one to the other. the downward movement of the second movable member is restricted by coming into contact with the temporarily fixed portion;
    When the first movable member moves downward while the downward movement of the second movable member is restricted, the operating elastic member is vertically compressed, and the upper cam portion moves toward the second movable member. contacting the member from above to move the second movable member in the first direction along with the descent of the first movable member; The second movable member is moved downward by the restoring force of the elastic member, and force is applied to the switch member, thereby displacing the switch member and changing the state of the contact from the one to the other. .
  12.  請求項1または2に記載のイネーブルスイッチであって、
     前記第2可動部材を挟んで前記接点の反対側に配置される他の接点をさらに備え、
     前記他の接点の状態は、前記接点機構により前記接点の状態と同期して移行され、
     前記接点機構は、前記第2可動部材を挟んで前記スイッチ部材の反対側に配置されて前記ケースにより保持される他のスイッチ部材をさらに備え、
     前記他のスイッチ部材は、前記スイッチ部材と同様に、前記第2可動部材と直接的に接触し、前記第2可動部材の移動に伴って前記スイッチ部材の変位と同期して変位することにより、前記他の接点の状態を変更する。
    3. The enable switch according to claim 1 or 2,
    Further comprising another contact arranged on the opposite side of the contact across the second movable member,
    the state of the other contact is shifted in synchronization with the state of the contact by the contact mechanism;
    The contact mechanism further comprises another switch member arranged on the opposite side of the switch member across the second movable member and held by the case,
    The other switch member, like the switch member, is in direct contact with the second movable member and is displaced in synchronism with the displacement of the switch member as the second movable member moves, Changing the state of said other contact.
PCT/JP2022/032213 2021-08-30 2022-08-26 Enabling switch WO2023032846A1 (en)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202280053218.6A CN117769752A (en) 2021-08-30 2022-08-26 Enabling switch
JP2023545527A JPWO2023032846A1 (en) 2021-08-30 2022-08-26

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2021140083 2021-08-30
JP2021-140083 2021-08-30

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2023032846A1 true WO2023032846A1 (en) 2023-03-09

Family

ID=85412686

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2022/032213 WO2023032846A1 (en) 2021-08-30 2022-08-26 Enabling switch

Country Status (3)

Country Link
JP (1) JPWO2023032846A1 (en)
CN (1) CN117769752A (en)
WO (1) WO2023032846A1 (en)

Citations (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO1995025333A1 (en) * 1994-03-17 1995-09-21 Fanuc Ltd Three-position switch
JP2002334625A (en) * 2001-05-09 2002-11-22 Yaskawa Electric Corp 3-position deadman switch
JP2003323832A (en) * 2002-05-02 2003-11-14 Omron Corp Enable switch
JP2006269157A (en) * 2005-03-23 2006-10-05 Nihon Kaiheiki Industry Co Ltd Three-position switch
US20100025208A1 (en) * 2008-07-23 2010-02-04 Apem Secure Enabling Switch
JP2020053327A (en) * 2018-09-28 2020-04-02 Idec株式会社 Enable switch
KR102161002B1 (en) * 2019-09-23 2020-09-29 주식회사 세펙트 Enable Switch
JP2020167044A (en) * 2019-03-29 2020-10-08 新晃電機株式会社 Enable switch

Patent Citations (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO1995025333A1 (en) * 1994-03-17 1995-09-21 Fanuc Ltd Three-position switch
JP2002334625A (en) * 2001-05-09 2002-11-22 Yaskawa Electric Corp 3-position deadman switch
JP2003323832A (en) * 2002-05-02 2003-11-14 Omron Corp Enable switch
JP2006269157A (en) * 2005-03-23 2006-10-05 Nihon Kaiheiki Industry Co Ltd Three-position switch
US20100025208A1 (en) * 2008-07-23 2010-02-04 Apem Secure Enabling Switch
JP2020053327A (en) * 2018-09-28 2020-04-02 Idec株式会社 Enable switch
JP2020167044A (en) * 2019-03-29 2020-10-08 新晃電機株式会社 Enable switch
KR102161002B1 (en) * 2019-09-23 2020-09-29 주식회사 세펙트 Enable Switch

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JPWO2023032846A1 (en) 2023-03-09
TW202324467A (en) 2023-06-16
CN117769752A (en) 2024-03-26

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
KR100328792B1 (en) Multi-contact input apparatus
EP1310968B2 (en) Switch apparatus
TW200814116A (en) Lateral pushig type push switch
US7135646B2 (en) Electrical switch
WO2007015461A1 (en) Folding apparatus
JP2000276975A (en) Microswitch
JP2001307599A (en) Multidirectional slide switch
WO2023032846A1 (en) Enabling switch
JP2003257270A (en) Switching device
TWI840931B (en) Enable switch
JP4026498B2 (en) Small switch
JP4213019B2 (en) Multi-directional input device
KR100348940B1 (en) Multi-directional switch having a plurality of manual switches
WO2021085309A1 (en) Switch device
JPH10302576A (en) Control switch
WO2012090521A1 (en) Switch
JP3763676B2 (en) SWITCH DEVICE AND ELECTRONIC DEVICE USING SWITCH DEVICE
JP3710668B2 (en) Multi-contact input device
JP7452845B2 (en) Multi-directional swing type electronic components
WO2020184308A1 (en) Push switch
JP2024031379A (en) switch
JP2007200738A (en) Push-button switch
JP2004327115A (en) Switch
JP4087626B2 (en) Lever type switch
JP2003151404A (en) Multidirectional input device

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 22864430

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2023545527

Country of ref document: JP

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 202280053218.6

Country of ref document: CN

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE